SAP SD Blue Print

To-Be Business Processes of Sales & Distribution for ISPAT Industries
Processes
in Sales
Business Requirement from ISPAT / Usage

suggested by CVS IT
To Be Process suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Introduction
This Business Blue Print Document describes the following:
Enterprise Structure of ISPAT group of companies.
Business requirements as given by the ISPAT Key Users.
Suggestions by CVS IT consultants wherever SAP R/3 4.6C features are found to be useful to ISPATs business functionality.
To-Be Process on SAP R/3 system suggested by CVS IT Consultants
Comments whether the requirement can be realized on the SAP R/3 system or not.
Gaps which are at different stages of exploration

It may not be possible to decide the realization possibility of all Business requirements on the SAP R/3 4.6C / CIN4.0A / Mill Products 2.0 system
immediately and hence the following legend is being followed for describing the statuses:
Status of To-Be Business

Process
Status Description
A-Possible
Can be implemented on 4.6C
B-Possible with workaround
Can be implemented on 4.6C through indirect means
C-Possible with ABAP
Can be implemented on 4.6C through ABAP/4 development
D-Possible with ABAP (But

performance issue)
Can be implemented on 4.6C through ABAP/4 development

but system performance may be effected
E-Not possible with out Major Cannot be implemented on 4.6C without major system
Modification
modification
F-Open for exploration
Possibility of implementation will be explored in the

development environment. Cannot be confirmed at this
stage
G-Not possible
Cannot be implemented on 4.6C
H-Not in Scope
To-Be Business Processes of Sales &
Cannot be implemented because it is not part of the scope

defined in the Software Services Agreement between
CVS IT & for
ISPAT
Distribution
ISPAT Industries
The To-Be business process realization is dependent on the following aspects:
Scope of services described in the Software Services Agreement signed by ISPAT & CVS IT
Scope of functionality described in the Software Services Agreement mentioned above.

Business Blue Print Sales & Distribution Prepared By: CVSIT
Page 1 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Capabilities & Limitations of SAP R/3 4.6C / CIN 4.0A / IS Mill Products system
As-Is Business Knowledge Transfer from ISPAT Project Team members
Business Requirements defined by the ISPAT Project Team members
ISPAT accepts that the decision to accept the To-Be Business Processes is completely its own and not influenced by CVS IT. CVS IT shall not be
responsible for the business consequences on ISPAT after the realization and usage of the processes being suggested here.
ISPAT shall indemnify CVS IT from all responsibilities for any other business consequences during the framing of the To-Be Business processes, or at any
time during or after the realization / implementation of these processes on SAP R/3 system or while using the system.
Page 2 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Contents
Serial
Number
Topic
Page Numbers
Start
End
Current Enterprise Structure
Product Range
Enterprise Structure on SAP R/3 system
14
Different Types of Sales
15
19
Master Data
20
40
To-Be Business Processes
41
169
Summary Of Integration Points
170
243
Print Outputs
244
245
Master Data Coding Logic
246
248
10
Reports
249
253
11
Role Matrix
254
261
12
Pricing Matrix
262
321
Page 3 Of 361

6
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
1. Current Enterprise Structure

Companies in ISPAT
1
2
3
Ispat Industries Limited

Ispat Metallics Limited
Ispat Energy Limited
Manufacturing Locations
1
2
3
Dolvi
Kalmeshwar
Taloja ( Processing Unit)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Hot Roll Mill

Sponge Iron Plant
Blast Furnace
Galvanizing Line
Cold Roll Mill
Colour Coating Line
Lime and Calcination Plant
Oxygen Plant
Taloja Plant
Manufacturing Plants
Depots
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Kolkata-Liluah
Kolkata-Belurmath
Guwahati
Patna
Bangalore
Chennai
Hyderabad
Delhi
Parwanoo
Chandigarh
Ludhiana
Faridabad
Karnal
Ghaziabad
Kanpur
Ahmedabad
Mumbai
Consignment Agents
Marketing Office / Branch /
Regional Office
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
Nariman Point
CMO-Casablanca
New Delhi
Chennai
Kolkata
Mumbai
Aurangabad
Raipur
2
3
4
5
6
7
Pali
Cuttack
Coimbatore
Siliguri
Cochin
Hubli
Baramulla
Page 4 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Pune
Ahmedabad
Indore
Ludhiana
Parwanoo
Faridabad
Karnal
Chandigarh
Kanpur
Ghaziabad
Kolkata
Patna
Guwahati
Hyderabad
Banglore
Gaps/Comments
Jammu
10
Srinagar
11
Udaipur
12
Gorakhpur
13
Ajmer
Page 5 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
2. Product Range
Location
Plant
Product Group
HR
Hot Rolled
Products
SIP
Sponge Iron
Products
CBP
Cold Briquetting
BF
Blast Furnace
LCP
Lime Calcining
Air Separation
Plant (IMIL & IIL)
Power
Dolvi
ASP
ELE
Taloja
TAL
Hot Rolled
Products
Product Range
Mill Coil
Slit Coil
Sheets
Plates
Chequered Coils
Skin Passed Coils, Plates & sheets: Skin passed
pickled & oiled coils, sheets and plates
Pickled & Oiled Coils , plates & sheets;
Chequered Plates
Secondary Products like side trimming, coil end cut,
slab end cut, wrap end cut, cobble, plates, tundish
skull, ladle skull, launder skull etc
HR Scrap
DRI Prime
DRI granules
DRI Granules 2
Secondary Products like OffGrade DRI, OffGrade
Granules etc.
SIP Scrap
Iron Ore Briquettes
Pig Iron - basic grade
Pig Iron - Foundry Grade 2
Secondary Products like DumpPit, SlagPit etc.
BF Scrap, Saleable Raw material Coke.
Super Fine Lime , Calcine Lime ,Weathered Lime
Oxygen, N2, Argon
Electricity
Mill Coil
Slit Coil
Sheets
Plates
Secondary Products like side trimming coil end cut.
Page 6 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
ASP
Angle & shapes

Cold Rolled
Kalmeshwar
CRM
Gaps/Comments
Ridge, Barge Board, North Light Curve, Gutter,

Corners, Aprons etc.
Sheets
Coils
CRM Scrap
HR coils, Sheets & HR scrap.
Sheets
Coils
CGL
Galvanized
Products
CCL
Colour Coated
Corrugated Sheets
Profile Sheets
Accessories (Angles & Shapes)
CGL Scrap
Coil
Sheets
Corrugated Sheets
Profiles
Accessories
CCL Scrap
Page 7 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
3. SD Enterprise Structure on SAP R/3 4.6C

SD Enterprise Structure Definitions
Sales Organization
Description
EAST
Explanation / Justification
Sales Organisation East, IIL
This Sales Organisation will be responsible for all business transactions

of IIL in the Eastern Region.
NORT
Sales Organisation North, IIL

of IIL in the Northern Region.
SOUT
Sales Organisation South, IIL

of IIL in the Southern Region.
WEST
Sales Organisation West, IIL

of IIL in the Western Region.
IMEA
Sales Organisation East, IMIL

of IMIL in the Eastern Region.
IMNO
Sales Organisation North, IMIL

of IMIL in the Northern Region.
IMSO
Sales Organisation South, IMIL

of IMIL in the Southern Region.
IMWE
Sales Organisation West, IMIL

of IMIL in the Western Region.
IEEA
Sales Organisation East, IEL

of IEL in the Eastern Region.
IENO
Sales Organisation North, IEL

of IEL in the Northern Region.
IESO
Sales Organisation South, IEL

of IEL in the Southern Region.
ILWE
Sales Organisation West, IEL

of IEL in the Western Region.
Page 8 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Distribution
Channel
DI
Description
Gaps/Comments
The distribution channel is the channel through which saleable
materials or services reach the customer. The distribution channel is
used to target a particular group of customers.
Direct Sales
DP
Depot Sales
AS
Auction Sales
TP
Third party Sales
EX
Export Sales
A Direct Sales is a distribution channel which would be used for

direct domestic sales.
A Depot Sales is a distribution channel which would be used for
sales from depots.
An auction sale is a distribution channel which would be used for
internet & normal auction.
A Third Party sale is a distribution channel which shall be used for
Third Party / Conversion sales.
An export sale is a distribution channel which would be used to
cater for all international customers.
OT
Others
Any other type of distribution channel.
Division
HR
CR
GP
CC
BF
SP
PW
Sales Office
SOWE
SONO
Description
HR- Hot Rolled Products
CR- Cold Rolled Products
GP- Galvanized Products
CC- Color Coated Products
BF- Blast Furnace
SP- SIP Products
PW-Power
Description
Sales office West (Mumbai)
Sales Office North (Delhi)
SOEA
Sales Office East (Calcutta)
SOSO
Sales Office South(Chennai)
Sales Groups
Description
Explanation/Justification
For
For
For
For
For
For
For
Hot Rolled Products (Including Saleable Lime products)

Cold Rolled Products
Galvanized Products
Color Coated Products
Blast Furnace (Including Saleable Coke)
SIP Products
Power (Electricity )
Sales Office is considered as Regional office, which is looking after
sales of particular region, and controlling branch offices and depots in
the respective region.
Page 9 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
MUM
Mumbai Sales Office
AUR
PUN
AHM
IND
Aurangabad Sales Office

Pune Sales Office
Ahmedabad Sales Office
Indore Sales Office
Dolvi Sales Office (Raw material & miscellaneous
scrap sales)
Delhi Sales Office
Ludhiana Sales Office
Parwanoo Sales Office
Faridabad Sales Office
Karnal Sales Office
Chandigarh Sales Office
Kanpur Sales Office
Ghaziabad Sales office
Kolkata Sales Office
Patna Sales Office
Guwahati Sales office
Chennai Sales Office
Hyderabad Sales Office
Banglore Sales Office
DOL
DEL
LUD
PAR
FRD
KRN
CHD
KNP
GBD
KOL
PTN
GUH
CHN
HYD
BNG
Sales Groups are considered as individual offices assigned to the

Regional offices or sales offices
Plant
PSIP
Gaps/Comments
Description
Plant is either a place of manufacturing or a place of storage or a
combination of closely situated storage locations.
Sponge Iron Plant-SIP
PHSM
Hot Strip Mill-HSM
PLCP
Lime Calcinations Plant-LCP
POX1
Oxygen Plant1- IIL Plant (Air Separation Plant)
PTAL
Taloja Plant
PCRM
Cold Rolling Mill-CRM
Page 10 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
PCGL
Continuous Galvanizing Line-CGL
PCCL
Color Coating Line-CCL
PASS
Angle Shapes & Sections
DMUM
Mumbai Depot
DAHM
Ahmedabad Depot
DDEL
Delhi Depot
DLUD
Ludhiana Depot
DPAR
Parwanoo Depot
DFRD
Faridabad Depot
DKRN
Karnal Depot
DCHD
Chandigarh Depot
DKNP
Kanpur Depot
DGBD
Ghaziabad Depot
DKOL
Kolkata-(Liluah)
DKOB
Kolkata-(Belurmath)
DGUH
Guwahati Depot
DPTN
Patna Depot
DCHN
Chennai Depot
DHYD
Hyderabad Depot
DBNG
Banglore Depot
PBLF
Blast Furnace-BLF
POX2
Oxygen Plant2-100 TPD- IMIL Plant
POX3
Oxygen Plant2-100 TPD- IMIL Plant
POX4
Oxygen Plant- 50-TPD- IMIL Plant
POX5
Oxygen Plant- 37.5- TPD- IMIL Plant
Gaps/Comments
Page 11 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
Shipping Point
SSIP
SHSM

suggested by CVS IT
PCBP
Cold Briquetting Plant
PIEL
Ispat Energy
PMPT
Mumbai Port Trust (Logical Plant)
PJPT
JNPT (Logical Plant)
PNGT
Nagothane (Logical Plant)
PNGP
Nagpur Railway Yard (Logical Plant)
Description
Shipping Point For Sponge Iron Plant-SIP (PSIP)
Shipping Point For Hot Strip Mill-HSM (PHSM)
Loading Points
Gaps/Comments
Description
11
SIP- Loading Pont for warehouse B Conveyer
12
SIP- Loading Pont for warehouse C Conveyer
13
SIP- Loading Pont for warehouse G Conveyer
14
SIP- Loading Pont for warehouse A Pay Loader
15
SIP- Loading Pont for warehouse B Pay Loader
16
SIP- Loading Pont for warehouse C Pay Loader
17
SIP- yard 346
18
SIP- SILO
19
SIP- Loading Pont for warehouse A Conveyer
21
HSM-coil yard loading point NO 01
22
23
24
HSM-roll shop bay loading point NO 01
25
HSM-roll shop bay loading point NO 02
26
HSM-open yard near to coil yard
27
HSM- Caster Bay Yard
28
HSM- Scrap Yard

HSM - Mill bay / Cobble Yard
Page 12 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
SLCP
SOX1
STAL
SCRM
Shipping Point For Lime Calcinations Plant-LCP (PLCP)

Shipping Point For Oxygen Plant- IIL Plant (POX1)
Shipping Point For Taloja Plant (PTAL)
Shipping Point For Cold Rolling Mill-CRM (PCRM)
29
SCGL
Shipping Point For Continuous Galvanizing Line-CGL

(PCGL)
32
30
31
33
34
35
Gaps/Comments
HSM - Electrical Arc-furnace Area

LCP- Loading Point
Through Pipe line
Taloja Yard
CRM-Slitter Bay
CRM-Balancing Line
Loading Point For CGL1 Despatch
SCCL
SASS
Shipping Point For Colour Coating Line-CCL (PCCL )

Shipping Point For Angle Shapes & Sections (PASS)
36
37

Loading Point For CGL4 Despatch (Under
commissioning).
Loading Point For CCL Despatch
Loading Point For Angle Shapes & Sections
SMUM
SAHM
SDEL
SLUD
SPAR
SFRD
SKRN
SCHD
SKNP
SGBD
Shipping Point For Mumbai Depot (DMUM)

Shipping Point For Ahmedabad Depot (DAHM)
Shipping Point For Delhi Depot (DDEL)
Shipping Point For Ludhiana Depot (DLUD)
Shipping Point For Parwanoo Depot (DPAR)
Shipping Point For Faridabad Depot (DFRD)
Shipping Point For Karnal Depot (DKRN)
Shipping Point For Chandigarh Depot (DCHD)
Shipping Point For Kanpur Depot (DKNP)
Shipping Point For Ghaziabad Depot (DGBD)
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Loading Point For Mumbai Depot

Loading Point For Ahmedabad Depot
Loading Point For Delhi Depot
Loading Point For Ludhiana Depot
Loading Point For Parwanoo Depot
Loading Point For Faridabad Depot
Loading Point For Karnal Depot
Loading Point For Chandigarh Depot
Loading Point For Kanpur Depot
Loading Point For Ghaziabad Depot
SKOL
SKOB
51
52
Loading Point For Kolkata- Liluah

Loading Point For Kolkata- Belurmath
SGUH
SPTN
SCHN
SHYD
SBNG
Shipping Point For Kolkata- Liluah (DKOL)

Shipping Point For Kolkata-Belurmath (DKOB)
Shipping Point For Guwahati Depot (DGUH)
Shipping Point For Patna Depot (DPTN)
Shipping Point For Chennai Depot (DCHN)
Shipping Point For Hyderabad Depot (DHYD)
Shipping Point For Banglore Depot (DBNG)
53
54
55
56
57
Loading Point For Guwahati Depot

Loading Point For Patna Depot
Loading Point For Chennai Depot
Loading Point For Hyderabad Depot
Loading Point For Banglore Depot
SBLF
Shipping Point For Blast Furnace-BLF (PBLF)
71
BLF-Loading Point For Pig Iron Yard
Page 13 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
SOX2

suggested by CVS IT
SOX3
SOX4
SOX5
SCBP
SMPT
SJPT
SNGT
SNGP
Shipping Point For Oxygen Plant2-100 TPD- IMIL Plant

Shipping Point For Oxygen Plant3-100 TPD- IMIL Plant
Shipping Point For Oxygen Plant4- 50-TPD- IMIL Plant
Shipping Point For Oxygen Plant5- 37.5- TPD- IMIL Plant
Shipping Point For Cold Briquetting Plant
Shipping Point For Mumbai Port Trust
Shipping Point For JNPT
Shipping Point For Nagothane
Shipping Point For Nagpur Railway Yard
Company Code
Description
1000
Ispat Industries Ltd. IIL
2000
Ispat Metallics ( India ) Ltd. IMIL
72
73
74
75
76
Transportation
Planning Point
TSIP
THSM
TKL1
TKL2
TDEP
TEXP
TIML
Gaps/Comments
Through Pipe line

Through Pipe line
Through Pipe line
Through Pipe line
Shipping Point for Cold Briquetting Plant ( 2106 )
Loading Point For Bombay Port Trust
Loading Point For JNPT
Loading Point for Nagothane
Loading Point for Nagpur Railway Yard.
Description
Tr.Type for SIP
Tr.Type for HSM
Tr.Type for KLM Plant
Tr.Type for KLM General
Tr.Type for Depot
Tr.Type for Export ( Dolvi & KLM)
Tr.Type for IMIL
Page 14 Of 361

6
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
4. Different Types of Sales

ISPAT makes the following types of Sales:
1) Domestic sales:
1.1 Direct Sales - OEM /OAU Sales, Projects, Trade and export diverted
1.2 Assortment Sale
1.3 Sales through Depots
1.4 Sales through Commission Agents
1.5 Sales through Consignment Agents
1.6 Third Party Sales
1.7 Scrap Sales (Raw material scrap, Production scrap, miscellaneous scrap)
1.8 Sale to Govt. companies (Defence, Railways etc) / PSUs
1.9 Barter Sales
1.10 Sales through Auctions
1.11 Free Samples
1.12 Sale of Service (billeting of barges, utilisation of production capacity)
1.13 Job Work
1.13 Sales to ISPAT Group Companies
1.14 Sale of By-products
2) Stock Transfer:
2.1 Stock transfer for sale: plant to depot, depot to depot, plant to plant, depot to plant
2.2 Stock transfer for Consumption: home consumption, captive consumption
3) Export & Export Related sales:
3.1 Direct Export Sales to countries other than Nepal, Bhutan
3.2 Exports to Nepal and Bhutan
3.3 Third Party Exports
3.4 CT-2 / CT-3 Sales
3.5 Export Support Sales
Brief Explanation of each type of Sale:
1. Domestic Sales:
All sales are done to the parties who are with in India. All materials produced at Dolvi and Kalmeshwar locations of IIL, IMIL and IEL is sold under
this category.
Page 15 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
1.1.
Direct Sales - OEM Sales, OAU, Projects, Trade, Export Diverted, By products;
Direct Sale is done normally to Original Equipment Manufacturers, Other actual users, Projects and Trade Customers. Customers would
produce the following sales tax concession forms for sales tax exemption / concession:
Form BC - for Sales Tax exemption for Sales made to Units in Backward Area
Form EC - for Sales Tax exemption for Sales made to Units in Backward Area (no difference from Form BC as far as treatment by Ispat
Industries Ltd. is concerned)
CST with & without Form C
LST
Form N-15 - for Sales Tax Exemption (for exemption of capacity expansion)
From D - for Sales tax exemption for Sales to Govt. & PSUs
Form H - for Sales Tax exemption to 100% EOUs
Form R for Octroi exemption for 100% EOUs.
Form F for depot stock transfer .
1.2.
Assortment Sale:
A Product Mix is prepared by ISPAT on the basis of requirement from Customer and sold to that particular customer.
1.3.
Sales though Depots:

Material is transferred to depots for onward sale to end customers or traders.
1.4.
Sales through Commission Agents:

A commission Agent is a Business partner who earns a commission from the sale he has secured for ISPAT.
The Order comes from the End Customer either directly addressed to Ispat or it may be in the name of the Commission Agent. The Order
Confirmation is given to the end customer in all cases.
The payment comes from the end Customer to ISPAT.
Price is the end Customer price.
The commission to the commission agent has to be calculated as a certain %age of the Net Value
1.5.
Sales through Consignment Agents:

A consignment transfer is made to the consignment agents godown with only an Excise Invoice. The stock belongs to ISPAT but the
consignment agent owns the godown. The consignment Agent bills the end customer and sends a invoice copy to ISPAT. Based on this
Invoice ISPAT will pass a Debit entry on the Consignment agent. The difference in excise will be paid to the Excise Authorities in a month-end
settlement. Commission is paid to the Consignment agent for the services rendered. They are being treated as customers.
Page 16 Of 361
1.6.
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Third Party Sales:

The process is as follows:
Excise Invoice
Ispat
Third Party
@ Rs.100
Ispat.
Gaps/Comments
Excise Invoice
@ Rs.200
End-Customer
Commercial Invoice
End-Customer
@ Rs.200
1.7.
Scrap Sales:
When Scrap is generated a communication is sent to CMO from the plant. CMO will book Orders for the generation. The process flow for the
sale is exactly the same as that for the Normal Products Sold.
Sales Order
Delivery
Invoice
1.8.
Sale to Govt Companies:

Ministry of Railways release yearly requirements through tendering which has two stages technical & commercial. For the execution of the
order an approval is needed from Research & Development Standards Organisation (RDSO). After the material has been produced the official
nominated by the RDSO inspects the same and the material is then despatched to the various locations required by the railways. As soon as
the material is received at various locations then a receipt note/ receipt order is sent to ISPAT. Then the receipt note / RDSO Clearance
Certificate / Freight Certificate is submitted at the FA & CO Mumbai Office. Then a payment to the extent of 98% of the value of material
supplied is made. Subsequently the balance 2% is made after inspection of material.
The railways pay freight, as per their standard rates, either by rail or by road, whichever is lower.
1.9.
Barter Sales:
In some cases ISPAT supplies some material to a party and they supply back the same type or different material to ISPAT and this is need
based. For e.g.: Sales of DRI to ESSAR who in return supplies Pellets to Sponge Iron Plant and Hot Rolled Coil to Cold Rolled Coil.
1.10.
Auctions:
Material, which will become arising or diversions like diverted from export/domestic/OEM/ Depot etc, is sold in an auction. The auction is done
for the estimated quantity generated of the goods. Price is decided on the basis of the price of the highest bidder and as per financial
arrangement.
Page 17 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
1.11.
Free Samples:
ISPAT issues Free Samples to Customers as a part of promotional campaign or for targeting new customers.
1.12.
Sale of Service:
ISPATs customer sends their material to ISPAT on a 57F(4) / any normal challan for processing of goods and material should be delivered
back within 180 days to the customer. The goods are processed and ISPAT sends the material to the customer on the same 57F(4) and then
raises a commercial Invoice, for services rendered. In this case there will be no Excise Duty or Sales Tax. Freight may or may not be
charged.
1.13
Job Work:
Ispat sends the material to a processor for processing on a 57F(4) / any normal challan for processing of goods. After processing the finish
goods are taken back to the plant/Depot. The processor is paid for the processing charges as per the contract. For example, when the
demand for GP increases, KLM sends CR coils to external processors who galvanises the materials and send the galvanised coils to depots
from where they are despatched to the end customers.
1.14
Intergroup company sale:

Sales of products by one company code to another company code under the same company come under this category. For example, sale of
IMIL products like hot metal to IIL. Sales of oxygen by IMIL to IIL (HSM plant) etc.
1.15
Sale of By-products:
Products which are generated during manufacturing process of main products are called as By-Products. Sale of By-Products is done similar
to NCO Non-Prime products.
Stock Transfers:
2.1
2.2
Inter-Plant Transfers:
Transfer of material to the various units within ISPAT. Transfer of material takes place between plants of different excise registration
HR coils from HSM (Hot Strip Mill) to CRM of Kalmeshwar.
Slit Coil supply from Dolvi Slitting Lines to CRM of Kalmeshwar.
Mill Coil Supplied from HSM of Dolvi to CRM of Kalmeshwar and Slitted at their end, Wider Width is consumed as per the requirement of
CRM.
Captive and Home consumption:
Transfer of material and consumption takes place between plants of the same excise registration.
CRM to CGL
Page 18 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
CRM to CCL
CGL to CCL
CGL to CRM (Packing)
CCL to CRM (Packing)
SIP to HSM
OXY to BF (IMIL)
HSM to SIP: (HR Sheets): Home Consumption
HSM to HSM : Home consumption
CCL to Civil Deptt (for roofing), CRM to CCL (for packing) : Home Consumption
Exports :
3.1
Direct Export Sales:

Direct Sales to customers, who are outside India.
3.2
Exports to Nepal and Bhutan:

Export made to Nepal and Bhutan is treated differently. The excise rebate is granted to His Majestys Govt of Nepal on Indo Nepal treaty .
3.3
Third Party Exports:

ISPAT sells to an Exporter (trading house) who in turn sells to his overseas customers. The turnover is booked in Indian Rupees. The benefits
like SIL etc. accrue to ISPAT.
3.4
CT-2 / CT-3 Sales:

If the customer wants to take the benefit of exporting his finished goods for which he uses ISPATs material as a raw material then he
executes a bond with the Central Excise & will apply for a bond / certificate (CT-2 / CT-3 Certificate). After getting the certificate the
customer gives the certificate to CMO. Only against receipt of this Form and after Excise Dept clearance, FG can be despatched without
charging excise duty. This form CT2, CT3 is produced to Excise Supdt. Office of suppliers range for assessment.
3.5
Export Support Sales:

ISPAT sells material to customers who export their finished goods using the EPCG license of Ispat after manufacturing them using ISPATs
raw material for completing obligation for plant & machinery imported during project stage free of import duties.
Page 19 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
5.
Gaps/Comments
Master Data
6.0 Master Data Maintenance

Provision for Maintaining the following master data is
required:
6.0.0
Master Data
Maintenance
1.
Business partners
2.
Materials
3.
Conditions (Commercial)
4.
Agreements with customers
5.
Customer Credit Information
Business Partners shall be maintained using

standard SAP functionality.
(A)
6.0.1 Maintenance of Business Partners
6.0.1.1
6.0.1.2
1.
Before any sales activity planning /

logging, the marketing person shall create a
sales prospect in the system, if the company
already doesnt exist in the system.
2.
Differentiation of a Sales Prospect from a

regular customer shall be done using a
different account group for the Sales
Prospect. When the sales prospect will be
converted to a regular customer, then up
gradation in account group shall be done.
Sales Prospect
Maintenance
It is suggested to maintain Sales Prospects in the

SAP system so that all sales activities shall be
maintained for prospective customers.
Maintaining
Customers
All customers and their related information should be 1. The following partner functions shall be made
maintained in SAP.
available:
Following Partner Functions should be made
available:
1.
Partner to whom the material is sold.
2.
Partner to whom the material is to be

shipped.
3.
Partner who makes the payment for the

business transaction.
a. Sold to Party the company that places

the order on ISPAT.
b. Ship to Party the company at whose

premises material sold by ISPAT is
unloaded.
c. Payer the company which settles the

invoices for goods sold by ISPAT
d. Bill-to-party the company on whose

(A)
1-5 & 7-9 (A)

6-Sales Tax &
Excise Details
should not be
maintained in the
Standard SAP R/3
transaction in
which the main
details of the
customer are
maintained. Excise
Page 20 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
4.
Partner on whom the invoice is raised.
5.
The excise details (EC C No, CST, and LST

No) of sold to party & ship to party should
be maintained in the customer master itself.
6.
Customer Sales Info (like Total requirement,

total Turn over) (in Grade, Size, Qty)
name & address the Invoice is prepared

by ISPAT.
e. Forwarding Agent The Company which

ships (transport) the material.
Gaps/Comments
details of the
custom4er will be
maintained in J1IL
in CIN.
2. Following views shall be maintained for the

customer:
Customer related information regarding requirement,

qty purchased from competitor, the NSR of the price
etc should be maintained in the customer master
record.
3.
a.
General data which contains the

address, control data, marketing, foreign
trade, unloading point and contact
person.
b.
Company Code data which contains the

accounting specific details like accounting
information, payment transaction,
correspondence accounting and
insurance accounting.
c.
Sales Area data which contains sales,

shipping, billing, output ( if required to
be controlled through customer master
record) and partner specific details.
Point 10 (F)
The customer master record shall be

maintained for all or any of the following
companies depending upon the business
relationship:
a. Ispat Energy Limited
b. Ispat Metallics India Limited
c. Ispat Industries Limited
4.
The customer master record shall be

maintained for all or any of the sales areas
mentioned in the Enterprise Structure
depending upon which sales area is
servicing the customer.
Page 21 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
5.
Changes to customer master should be

controlled. Company Code Data shall be
created/changed/maintained by Accounts
department. Sales Specific Data shall be
maintained by Marketing Department.
6.
Sales tax registration Numbers, Excise

Registration, Division, range, Collectorate,
ECC Number etc. shall be maintained using
the transaction for customer maintenance
in the Add-on Component CIN 4.0A.
7.
Frequently used grades/sizes/qty for a

particular customer may be stored in an
item proposal. The item proposal number
shall be entered in the customer master
record.
8.
Quantity tolerance in % for delivery (i.e.

under delivery or over delivery) shall be
defined in the customer master. So the
quantity delivered within tolerance limit
shall be acceptable to the customer.
9.
If the customer allows order combination

or accepts partial deliveries, the same
shall be indicated in the customer master
record.
Gaps/Comments
10. Customer related information regarding

requirement, qty purchased from
competitor, the NSR of the price etc is not
available for inclusion in customer master
Page 22 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
record in standard SAP system.
6.0.1.3
6.0.1.4
Contact
Persons
Maintenance
Forwarding
Agents
Maintenance
It is proposed to maintain the details of contact

person of a customer Name, telephone, mobile
number, e-mail id, etc.
The Agent who is involved in the Export Sales should

be maintained in the SAP system.
1.
Contact Person shall be maintained for

each of the Customers
2.
This contact person shall be entered while

maintaining the Customer Master Record
or in the master record of contact persons.
1.
Forwarding Agent shall be created using

the standard SAP transaction
Forwarding Agent Create.
2.
This partner function shall be used when

creating the export order.
(A)
(A)
Employee Number of ISPAT Marketing Personnel

shall be entered:
1.
6.0.1.5
6.0.1.6
Sales
Personnel
Maintenance
Transporters
All the sales employee master records should made

available in SAP.
2.
In the customer master: if the employee

( KAM) is normally responsible for processing
transactions with this customer .
In the sales document: if the employee is
responsible for processing the business
transaction.
Following types of Transporters should be defined as

master data in SAP system:
1.
Transporters shall be created as Vendors in

the SAP R/3 system.
Pre-Paid Transporters
2.
Transporters shall be of the partner type CR.

(Carriers). Condition record is to be
maintained for freight for each transporter,
destination and route.
3.
In the Customer master, all the preferred

transporters of the Customer shall be
maintained using the partner function CR.
4.
When an order is being booked, the system

shall give the option of selecting one of these
1.
2.
For all stock transfers delivery order shall be

placed by IIL approved transporters on PrePaid billed basis. When the customer fixes
Transportation charges from plant to partys
site then material is sent on pre-paid basis.
Destination-wise freight charges should be
maintained on monthly / periodic basis.
(A)
(A)
Page 23 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
3.
ISPAT shall pay the transporter for the service.
4.
ISPAT recovers the freight from the customer

during billing.
5.
6.
preferred transporters.
5.
Transporter is identified after allocation of

stock, in most of the cases.
For Stock Transfers, Stock Transport

Purchase Order shall be created in which the
Transporter shall be mentioned.
6.
To be included in the master if the transporter

is an IBA approved transporter & number.
This allows the system to book a liability

against the vendor automatically.
7.
Contracts with Transporters is covered

under Service Orders of Materials
Management Module (Process ID 7.1.2).
8.
Conditions record shall be maintained in

pricing so that system automatically
determines the freight rate during pricing on
the basis of transporter, tonnage and
destination with a validity period. In case of
To Pay transporters the system shall
determine a zero value for freight.
9.
All types of texts shall be maintained in the

system and the same can be available for
printout.
To-Pay Transporter
1.
Customer approved or preferred transporters

should also be maintained as Master Data in
the system.
2.
All approved transporters for that customer

should be available while selecting during
Delivery/Sales Order.
3.
Customer shall pay directly to the Transporter.
Gaps/Comments
To-be Billed Transporter

1.
For stock transfer from depot to depot or sales

return from depot/site to Kalmeshwar/depot,
from depot to customer, freight charges
are/may be on To- be billed basis.
2.
After material receipt at destination,

transporter raises the bill for freight charges,
which are paid from respective
depot/CMO/Works.
3.
For a given customer if he has nominated a

transporter then the same should be available
in the customer master and while making a
sales order the same should be reflected as the
default transporters.
Exclusively for Kalmeshwar
All freight agreements to be maintained

by Logistics department on SAP system
Page 24 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Payments to Transporters shall be made

from Branches, CMO or from Kalmeshwar
Works.
Exclusively for Dolvi
6.0.1.7
Hierarchy
All freight agreements shall be

maintained by Transportation Dept. At
Dolvi.
Payments to Transporters shall be made

from Dolvi Works Accounts Department
Freight agreements with transporters to

be maintained in SAP so that system
should propose the freight for that
particular transporter for particular
region, product, truck weight.
4.
Transporter agreements should be done in SAP

by fixing the terms and conditions with ISPAT
and fixing the freight for at least three months.
5.
If the terms and conditions are accepted by

transporter, agreement is done in standard
format. One copy of agreement is given to
account department for their working. This
format should be recorded in system and allow
to view by any concern person of Ispat.
6.
Various agreements are done for different

destination for one transporter.
7.
Modification against this format should be

available for change in customer, transporter,
destination, freight, date, agreement conditions
etc to create new contract.
8.
Transport agreement(Terms and conditions)

should be made available for print out.
When a customer has more than one branch and
Hierarchy node shall be maintained to map a
(A)
Page 25 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
offices, then hierarchy nodes are to be maintained
so that some parts or the whole of the customers
organisation are benefited by a discount or rebate
agreement.
nodes
Some customers of Ispat open offices in many

different names for tax reasons. To keep track of all
their transactions hierarchy is required.
Some customers have complex chain of
organisational structure. To keep track of all the
transactions made by individual offices or
departmental platforms hierarchy is required.
6.0.1.8
6.0.1.9
Special Stock
Partners
Commission
Agents
6.0.1.10 One Time

Customers
Gaps/Comments
customers organisational structure so that

whenever an order is created for a particular
office of the customer, the system will be able to
track the office in the hierarchy. Also whenever a
discount/ rebate agreement is made with a
particular hierarchy node, then all the nodes
below it will be benefited by the agreement.
Consignment agents of the business are to be

maintained as special stock partners for a particular
customer who buys through them. Consignment
Agent can bill material to any no. of customers on
his own sales invoice.
Consignment agents shall be treated as

customers and customer master records are to
be maintained. In the partner screen of the
master record of the end customers who buy
through consignment agent, they should be
entered using the partner function SB.
(A)
Partner function has to be maintained for

commission agents.
Vendor master record shall be maintained for

commission agents and their number should be
mentioned in the partner screen of the customer.
When a sale is made through commission agent,
the system will automatically determine the
commission in the pricing screen and create a
liability . Condition record has to be maintained
in such cases to maintain the commission values
depending on the agent and volume of sales .
(A)
Customers who enter into business transaction with

ISPAT only once are One Time Customers . Separate
master record to be maintained in SAP for one time
customers.
Maintaining separate master record for all one

time customers will lead to wastage of system
memory as after the business transaction is over,
the master record will be of no use. So all one
time customers will be grouped under a dummy
name and a master record will be created for
that dummy customer using the account group
(A)
Page 26 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
CPD or CPDA . When a sales order will be

maintained for that dummy customer the system
will automatically branch to the address screen
and other screens specific to that particular
customer.
6.0.2 Sub process Scope: Maintenance of Materials

Material master record containing all the relevant
details pertaining to basic data, sales,
purchasing, storage, plant, valuation, work
scheduling etc shall be maintained in SAP.
6.0.2.1
Material
All relevant details about materials should be

maintained in material master.
Material master record is to be maintained for

each combination of sales organisation,
distribution channel, plant , valuation type and
storage location. In the sales view the important
fields to be maintained are base unit of measure,
sales unit, division, delivering plant, material
group, tax categories, minimum order qty,
minimum delivery qty etc. Over and under
delivery tolerance shall be provided in the
material master record.
(A)
Material codification structure is covered in PP

module( Process Id : 8.1)
6.0.2.2
6.0.2.3
Customer
Material
Competitors
and
Competitor
Products
Customers description of a material and specified

values of characteristics of a particular material
specific to a customer should be maintained in
customer material.
Customer material info record containing

customers description of the material and the
values of characteristics specific to that customer
shall be stored in SAP from where it shall be
transferred to transactions pertaining to the
particular customer.
All the relevant data about competitors and

competitors products should be maintained in SAP.
Master data shall be maintained for competitors

using standard SAP functionality.
(A)
(A)
Material master data of competitors products

shall be maintained in SAP using material type
WETT. This can be used to compare competitors
Page 27 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
product range with the companys product range.
6.0.2.4
6.0.2.5
Item Proposals
Bill of Materials
Frequently used materials and their common

delivery qtys pertaining to particular customer
should be maintained in the system for reordering
purpose.
Item proposal shall be maintained for a

particular customer with his frequently ordered
materials and their common delivery qty shall be
maintained in SAP. Item proposal number shall
be entered in master record of the customer so
that during an order entry system proposes the
frequently ordered materials with their qtys. For
example in case of ISPAT, when a list of material
in certain qtys has to be sent to a depot every
month, then the list can be entered as an item
proposal which can be used in all monthly
orders.
(A)
When a Material is made up of more than one

component then it should be possible to capture the
material as the sum of all the components.
Bill of material shall be created with the main

item as header and components as sub items.
During a transaction when the header material
will be used the system will explode the header
material into all its components. For example, in
case of ISPAT, when materials are sold to
projects, the product mix contains materials
along with accessories. In such a case, we can
create a bill of material with all the items to be
delivered and enter the header material in the
document so that during processing the header
material explodes to give all the subitems.
(A)
6.0.3 Sub process Scope: Maintenance of Conditions

6.0.3.1
Prices
Prices on the basis of various conditions should be

stored in the system so that during a transaction
(Quotation, Sales order, Billing) system can find out
the appropriate price on the basis of conditions
matching the transactions. Types of prices include
material prices, price specific to customer and
material, price at which material is to be issued from
depots, price decided by the highest bidder in
Pricing condition records are maintained for all

required prices and values associated with
conditions for the all prices and System will
determine the valid condition record on the
basis of the access sequence . Variant pricing is
to be maintained wherever price will vary on the
basis of values of characteristics.
(A)
Prices maintained at various levels are :

Page 28 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
auctions, price for scrap and secondary products etc.
Quotation :
All Prices are decided at CMO.
Make to Order
HR Products
DRI Products
Made to Order these are Customer wise,

grade wise, width wise, thickness wise.
NCO Price This is region / branch wise,
thickness wise.
Narrow Slit Price this is region / branch wise,
width wise, and thickness wise.
Pig Iron Products

New customer (CCS/CGL/CR)
Sales Order :
Make to Order
Kalmeshwar Prices (HR from Dolvi to KLM)

these are thickness wise.
NCO Price
All the above prices are for HR in Coil Form.

For material in Sheet / Plate form additional
charges are included.
Trade Prices
Secondary Prices material wise.

DRI Products
This is material wise and region wise.
Pig Iron Products
This is material wise and region wise.
Lime Products
This is material wise.
Coke Products
This is material wise.
Trade MTO Price

Narrow Slit Price
Kalmeshwar Prices (HR from Dolvi to KLM)
-These are based on thickness.
Conversion Prices.
Export Customer prices.
DRI Products
Pig Iron Products
Lime Products
Coke Products
Regular Customer
CCS/CGL/CR
New customer
Regular Customer
Customer wise, Material wise, grade wise,

thickness wise, Widthwise, process wise, Region
wise.
CR/CCS/GP sales prices ( Trade, Regular,

new Customer).
Trade
Region wise, Material wise, grade wise, thickness
wise, quantity wise.
Gaps/Comments
Scrap & By product sales prices.

Stock Transfer prices shall be maintained
separately.
Page 29 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
New customer
Material wise, grade wise, thickness wise, Width
wise, process wise.
Secondary (Trade) Product Prices material

wise. (CR/CCS/GP).
Prices for Sales Of Services.
Whenever there is revision of prices (In case of

Trade and projects) CMO circulates the prices to all
branches, depots and plants.
Each depot has its own pricelist for the material to
be sold from the depot.
Depot specific prices decided by CMO are circulated
to the Depots periodically, in the form of a price list.
Price revision shall be handled by changing

all condition records or New prices shall be
uploaded with the help of BDC.
Authorisation for changing prices will be given to
appropriate levels.
Depot also sends material to the customer on price

depending on negotiation with customer.
Depot specific prices shall be maintained in the

system so same shall be applicable for all sales
made from depot.
Revision in the prices is informed to Branches as well

as sales person through mail.
In case of exports, prices will be customerspecific.
All material sales through export should have

customer specific prices and which are order
dependent.
6.0.3.2
Discounts
Discounts on the basis of various conditions should

be stored in the system so that during a transaction
system can find out the appropriate discount on the
basis of conditions matching the transactions.
Discounts maintained at various levels are as
follows:
1.
Discounts Before Sale (maintained only at Dolvi)

Discounts which are maintained in the quotation
are Discounts before sale.
Types of the discounts are:
Discount condition records shall be maintained

with conditions and values associated with
conditions. While processing a transaction
system will follow the access sequence to find
the valid record matching the condition of sales.
(A)
Discount before sale is maintained in the pricing

procedure which shall be applicable at quotation
level (for Dolvi only). Discounts are maintained
as per the requirement ,which shall be :
1. Customer-Specific discount; Conditions shall
be maintained wherever required.
Page 30 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Cash Discount.
Turn over Discount
Quantity Discount
All discounts should be maintained in the
system.
2.
Discounts During Sales

Various Discounts are given to customers during
sales and are adjusted in the invoice itself. Types
of discounts given to customers are:
Off-Width Discount in case of Kalmeshwar
Trade.
Quality grade, Discount in case of
Kalmeshwar Trade
Special discount

2.
3.
Discounts After Sale

Many times discounts are given for a specific
period after sales. These discounts are:
Monthly /Qtrly/Yearly Off take Rebate
Turnover Discount (TOD)
Quantity Discount (QD)
Over Billing Discount (Price Difference)
Quality Discount
Special Discount/Rebate
Freight Subsidy Discount.
Export Support Discount
Purchase order wise Discount
These discounts are passed on to customer at the

end of specific period or sale. Which are in the form
of credit notes. Billing should be done for the basic
price and the rebate amounts should be mentioned
in billing (but should not be considered for
Material specific Discounts: Conditions shall

Customer-Material specific: Conditions shall
This discount condition shall be active from

quotation stage. These discounts are maintained
at header as well as item level, depending upon
the company policy.
Discounts during sales
1.
2.
3.
All discounts should be maintained in SAP.
3.
Gaps/Comments
Off-Width Discounts, Quality Discount,

special Discounts come under this category.
Discount condition values for off-standard
specifications shall be maintained in the
system before hand.
The system shall pickup the discounts
automatically based on the characteristics of
the material that is being picked up during
delivery.
Cash Discount is maintained at header level and

Off-Width Discounts, Quality Discounts are
maintained at item level.
This discount condition shall be active in Billing.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Rebates shall cover all Discounts given

retroactively, which are based on sales
volumes quantities & volumes over a
period of time.
Ideally, all rebate agreements shall be
maintained in the SAP R/3 system before the
Rebate is announced.
Even other wise, retroactive rebate
agreements shall be maintained on a later
date.
Whenever a Rebate is being declared
condition records shall be maintained for
customer, hierarchy node, and material or
customer-material combination.
The Rebate agreement shall consider all the
billing documents invoices, credit memos &
Page 31 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
calculating the net billing value) and later on credit

note should be passed to the customer.
Immediately after billing the discount amount should
be shown as liability against that customer until a
credit note is passed.
6.0.3.3
Freight
Freight on the basis of various conditions should be

stored in the system so that during a transaction
system can find out the appropriate freight on the
basis of conditions matching the transactions.
Freight contract is made with transporter for prepaid transport on the basis of destination and
material. Mostly it is on the basis of destination
which is maintained at factory as well as depot level.
For the material supplied from third party transport
is not arranged by Ispat.
In case of stock transfer the freight is charged as per
contract with the transporter.
In case of Export sale there should be two freight
elements: from plant to port & port onwards to end
customers.
In case of Ex-Works (Domestic & Export) no freight
will be charged (i.e. To Pay basis) .
All freights (Rail, Road, Sea) agreements with
transporters to be covered.
Handling charges at Nagothane/ Nagpur Railway
Yard to be taken into consideration at the time of
sending material by road up to Nagothane/ Nagpur
Railway Yard and from there onwards by rail to end
customers. Provision should be there to track the
6.
Gaps/Comments
debit memos which are relevant for rebate

processing.
Issuing a credit memo to the customer for
the accumulated rebate total shall do the
final settlement.
For Rebate agreements with long periods, ISPAT

shall have the option to post the accruals in the
intermittent period automatically so that the
accumulated value of a rebate is recorded for
accounting purposes.
Freight condition records shall be maintained

with conditions and values on the basis of
agreement with the transporter, which is
destination wise.
(A)
Freight is determined automatically on the basis

of Incoterms, Ship-to-Party, Destination,
Unloading Point and weight etc.
Freight is maintained at item level.
All freights (Rail, Road, and Sea) agreements
with transporters/railways should be covered in
MM (Process ID 7.1.2).
Loading and handling charges at port if paid
separately by customer shall be created as
separate record.
In case of port being treated as a plant, stock
transport order will be created where the freight
will be determined from plant to port. Freight
from port onwards to end customer will be
determined in the sales order from port to end
customer.
Same will be the case when Nagothane/ Nagpur
Railway Yard is being treated as a plant.
Page 32 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
stock at Nagothane/Nagpur Railway Yard. Individual

freights up to Nagothane/ Nagpur Railway Yard and
from Nagothane/ Nagpur Railway Yard onwards to
end customer should be captured.
Gaps/Comments
Handling charges at Nagothane and freight from

Dolvi to Nagothane, Kalmeshwar to Nagpur
Railway Yard will be determined in the stock
transport order while the freight from
Nagothane/ Nagpur Railway Yard onwards will be
determined in the sales order from Nagothane to
end customer.
With Nagothane/ Nagpur Railway Yard and Port
being treated as plant, system will allow tracking
of stock at Nagothane/ Nagpur Railway Yard and
Port.
6.0.3.4
Taxes
While processing a transaction, the system should

determine the taxes on the basis of prevailing tax
rates maintained in the system.
Tax condition records shall be maintained in the

system for various levels of taxes, like central
sales Tax, State sales tax, turn over tax,
Surcharge etc. which will be automatically
determined during a transaction depending upon
the delivering plant, ship to party and unloading
point.
Various tax codes are maintained for various tax
scenarios and forms applicable.
(A)
Tax rates are maintained in UTXJ condition type

in the tax procedure TAXINJ on the basis of
various access sequences.
Tax shall be Item level condition.
6.0.3.5
Excise
While processing a transaction, the system should

determine the excise rate on the basis of prevailing
excise rates maintained in the system for a material.
Excise is a duty which is charged on all finished

products which are manufactured
(A)
Excise rates for finished goods are based on

chapter ID. Excise authorities have declared
Excise tariff rate on the basis of material chapter
ID. This is maintained in the Excise Rate
maintenance (J1ID) screen.
Excise for a material is determined on the basis
of material chapter ID and the final indicator for
Page 33 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
plant and customer.
6.0.3.6
Octroi
Octroi is a tax charged by municipal Corporation for

outside material coming inside Municipal Corporation
Area. This is charged on the final invoice value.
Octroi shall be maintained as a condition type,

and will be maintained at transaction level.
(A)
In case of Ispat (Kalmeshwar, Dolvi & Depots) Octroi

is generally paid by customer.
6.0.3.7
Entry Tax
Entry Tax is a tax charged for material coming inside

city /MIDC Area. This is applicable only in
Maharashtra. This is charged on the final invoice
value.
For example, material supplied from Dolvi to
Kalmeshwar and vice versa.
Entry tax shall be maintained as a condition

type, and will be maintained at transaction level.
(A)
6.0.4 Sub process Scope: Maintenance of Agreements
6.0.4.1
Customer
Material
Information
6.0.4.2
Commission to
consignment
agent.
Customers description of a material and specified

values of characteristics of a particular material
specific to a customer should be maintained in
customer material.
Customer specific information on a particular product
should be captured in the system so that during
transactions the data of the material specific to the
customer can be transferred to the transaction.
Commissions to consignment agents are to be paid

retroactively as rebates over a period of time.
Customer-Specific Material related information

shall be stored in the system.
Customer Material Number, Customer Material
Description, delivery priority, partial delivery,
maximum no of partial deliveries & deliverytolerances shall be stored.
Rebate agreements shall be maintained for

paying commissions to consignment agents over
a period of time.
(A)
(A)
Page 34 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Commissions to few Commission agent are to be

paid retroactively as rebates over a period of time.
Commission to
6.0.4.3
Commission
agent.
Agents
Region
Commission
PSL Impex
Western
1%
Murari
South
1%
Chao Agency
North
0.4% in SIP &
IMIL, 0.25% in
HR
Saini Associates North
1%
For Chandigarh & some parts of Ludhiana the agent is
Chao, and for rest of north is Saini Associates.
Rebate agreements shall be maintained for

paying commissions to specified commission
agents over a period of time.
In case of exports, the commission is paid
directly and determined in a condition type which
will create a liability in the system.
(A)
In case of Export the commission is paid directly on

the basis of shipment.
6.0.4.4
Contracts with
customers.
Contracts with customers for supply of materials,

services etc should be stored in the system.
Contracts shall be maintained in the system for

quantity, value, services, rentals etc with
reference to which release orders shall be
created while supplying to the customers.
(A)
6.0.5 Sub Process Scope: Maintenance of credit Master Record
6.0.5.1
Credit limit
maintenance
Credit limit should be maintained for a customer so

that system should trigger or block the transaction if
the credit exceed beyond the given permissible limit.
This should be removed only by an authorised
person. Both in terms of value and number of days.
Value tolerance should be allowed.
Credit limit shall be maintained in SAP for

customer for a particular credit control area,
which will be compared with the customers
outstanding while processing transactions.
In centralized credit management that is credit
management at group level, one credit control
area is assign to all the company codes so that
when a customer buys from more than one
company code, his credit exposure is evaluated
at group level.
In case of hierarchy nodes, credit limit will be
maintained at group level covering all the nodes
for a given customer.
(A)
Assigning of
time period
check with
credit limit of
customer is not
available in
standard
system ( F )
Page 35 Of 361
6.0.5.2
Processes
in Sales
Customer
maintenance
on the basis of
risk

suggested by CVS IT
Customers should be segregated on the basis of
their commercial risks through evaluation of their
past business records.
Customers shall be segregated into high risk,

medium risk, low risk and new customers in
credit master record of the customer. This risk
category will eventually determine the type of
automatic credit check to be conducted by the
system along with the document credit group
and the credit control area while processing a
transaction for that particular customer.
Gaps/Comments
(A)
The following are the type of automatic credit

check available in the standard sap R/3 system.
Static credit check: The customers credit

limit is compared with the sum of all open
sales orders, open deliveries, open billing
documents and open billing documents which
have already been passed onto accounting
but not paid by the customer.
Dynamic credit check: The customers

credit limit is compared with the sum of all
open sales orders, open deliveries, open
billing documents and open billing
documents which have already been passed
onto accounting but not paid by the
customer. In addition the dynamic credit limit
check specifies a horizon period. While
calculating sum of the values of all open
sales orders, the system does not consider
those open items in the sales orders which
have a delivery date beyond the horizon
period.
Critical fields: The system will reinstitute

a credit check if certain credit sensitive
fields, like payment terms are changed in the
transaction from there original values in the
master records.
Review date: the credit check is

performed only on specified dates and items
Page 36 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
processed after the review date are being

considered.
Open Items: This is the ratio of all open

items, which are over due by a certain
number of days to the customers balance.
Maximum document value: here one

value is specified which if exceeded in the
transaction the system will react with
warning or error message.
Oldest open Item: here we specify

number of days. If the oldest of all the open
items exceed this number of days, then
system will react with warning or error
message.
User specific Credit check.

Assigning of time period check with
credit limit of customer is not available in
standard system.
6.0.6 Sub process Scope: Maintenance of Other Master Records

6.0.6.1
Terms of
Payment
Various Payment terms as per customer requirement

should be maintained in the system.
1.
Following are the Payment Terms required in SAP.
100% Advance
Against Proforma Invoice
X% advance. Balance against proforma invoice

before delivery.
Letter of Credit.
LC Awaited
Financial Arrangements are awaited

( In case of Kalmeshwar If payment term is
financial arrangement is awaited then
Various terms of payments shall be

maintained in the SAP (Tr.Code OBB8). This
shall be attached to customer master data. It
will be applicable during transaction and shall
be changed at transaction level.
2.
The various financial documents will be

created and allocated to the sales document
in the billing screen, so that the system can
track the financial documents value
utilisation as per transactions.
3.
The possibility of tracking in case of Barter,

part interest paid and part interest free,
credit balance, X% advance. Balance against
(A) /
3 - (E)
Page 37 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
document should be block for production as

well as delivery)
Interest Free Credit for [number of days] Days
Part period to attract interest and part without

interest.
Against Despatch (Despatch Documents)
Against Delivery (against receipt of material at
proforma invoice before delivery ,bank

guarantee, Against Credit Balance,
performance guarantee, LC Awaited, clean
bill discounting, Open credit with interest and
financial arrangements awaited shall be
explored with major modification.
customer site/ works.)
Barter
Against Credit Balance
Post Dated Cheques
Hundi discounting by Party under his own

Limits.
Against Bank Guarantee.
Clean Bill Discount.
Open credit with interest.
Open credit.
4.
Approval process for retrograding payment

terms shall be possible.
1.
CT2/CT3 form shall be maintained in the

excise form of Add on CIN functionality.
All retrograding payment terms are to be approved

by competent authority.
CT2 / CT3 master should be maintained in the

system.
6.0.6.2
CT2 / CT3
CT2/CT3 excise exemption form, which is to remove

the excisable goods/material with out payment of
duty if the material is getting used in the
manufacturing of material, which is dutiable.
Forms shall be maintained under tax codes in

SAP.
2.
3.
It is not possible to maintain value wise

tracking of material removed against
particular form in Standard SAP. Shall be
done using ABAP functionality.
(A) / (C)
Excise duty shall be nil if the material is

removed under CT2 / CT3 form. Excise
invoice shall be generated with nil excise
duty.
Page 38 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Incoterms are terms of sales and passing the risk

of delivery.
Following incoterms shall be maintained in SAP:
6.0.6.3
Incoterms
Various internationally accredited terms of sales like

Ex-works FOR, FOB, CFR, etc. should be maintained
in the system for each customer.
EXW - Ex Works
FOR - Free on Road
FCA - Free Carriage and Freight
FOB - Free On Board
CFR - Cost and Freight
CIF - Cost, Insurance and Freight
C&F Cost and Freight
(A)
Incoterms shall be specified in the customer

master record from where it should be copied
into transactions.
Incoterms are used to determine the freight.
Prices are re-determined on the basis of
Incoterms.
Any additional incoterms shall be maintained as
per requirement.
6.0.6.4
Batch Search
Strategy
Depending on pre defined conditions the system

should be able to search for specific batches from
among many batches.
On the basis of dependencies, selection criteria

such as characteristics values (Grade, Width,
Thickness) Allocation Number, Status, production
date, form of the material, material colour, top
colour, bottom colour, of the material which
would specify at material master level
classification), and sort rules (sequence by which
batches are sort out in the list), specific batches
shall be selected by the system.
(A)
In search strategy values are defined according

to which system find the batches.
This can be maintained at Quotation level for
NCO, Sales order level and Delivery level.
Page 39 Of 361
6.0.6.5
6.0.6.6
Processes
in Sales
Bank
Guarantee
Master,
Performance
Guarantee
Master &
Bonds
TDC Master

suggested by CVS IT
Bank Guarantee master & Performance Guarantee

master should be maintained in the system with the
validity. The above can be received from a customer
or could be given to the customer as part of
submitting a tender. Performance guarantee given to
the customer should also be recorded in the system
generally done in case of railways. The bank
guarantee submitted should have details of the
project or the Tender details for railways for which
the bank guarantee has been submitted.
System should give status for expiry of bank
guarantee also (with advance reminders) so that
customers can be asked to return the bank
guarantees.
Gaps/Comments
Bank guarantees, which are classified in to two

types:
Those given to customer
Taken by customer (performance

guarantee).
Shall be maintained in payment guarantee

customer document.
( A & C)
Separate component shall be developed to

maintain and track bank Guarantee and other
payment guarantee documents like LC, Hundi,
and PDC etc. will be covered in TR module
(Process ID 3.7).
LC MASTER to be maintain in the system
LC details to be maintained in payment

guarantee option under foreign trade.
All the Technical Delivery Conditions of a particular

material grade should be maintained in SAP.
TDC shall be covered in QM HSM( Process ID

9.2)
(A)
Cost Extra /matrix and related shall be covered

in CO. ( Process ID )
( A)
Vendor Master shall be covered in MM module

(Process ID 7.1.3).
(A)
The cost extra / cost matrix should be maintained in

the system.
Cost : (CR/GPGC/CCS)
6.0.6.7
Cost Extra /
Cost Matrix
The total cost of production , interest & depreciation

& expenses for transportation to loading port
Cost extra : (HR)
Cost of production & other expenses over & above
one basic grade.
6.0.6.8
Vendor Master
Vendors such as, Freight forwarders, inspection

agencies etc to be maintained in the system
Page 40 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
6. To-Be Business Processes

6.1 Direct Sales (OEM/OAU, Projects, Trade, Assortment and Sale of By-Products):
6.1.1 Sales Plan / Marketing Plan
6.1.1
Sales Plan
(A)
1.
Yearly, Half Yearly, Quarterly, Monthly & weekly

Business Plan should be prepared for all the
products based on the Corporate Plan.
2. The Monthly Plan should be based on
Customer, Quantity, Material, Grade, Width,
range, Thickness range, Target Price.
3. For sales planning forecasting should be made
available.
4. Based on the monthly business plan rolling plan
should be created and based on rolling plan
order booking plan should be created and
subsequently the weekly plan day wise despatch
plan, daily collection plan and branch targets
should be derived.
5. While making sales plan following should be
considered:
I. Quantities planned against existing
orders in hand and to be processed
during the next month which the system
it self can derive from the delivery
schedule of existing orders.
II. Quantities planned against the on-going
negotiations with the various customers,
for which manual input to be given by
marketing.
III. Quantities planned against expected
orders from various customers based on
their past requirement, help for which to
be triggered from SAP only. Sales
forecasting should be used for this
purpose.
Final Monthly Sales Plan and subsequent modified
versions to be stored to monitor compliance.
1.
Yearly Sales Plan shall be prepared using

Long Term Planning function in Production
Planning.
2. Half yearly, Quarterly, Sales Plan shall be
prepared by breaking down the Yearly Sales
Plan.
3. In Long Term Planning, the plan shall be
prepared using the standard info structure
S076.
4. Monthly, Weekly & Daily Planning shall be
prepared using Flexible Planning in Sales &
Operation Planning. Here the planning shall
be done in self-defined info structure and
hence more flexible.
5. Monthly Sales Plan shall be prepared in the
SAP R/3 system using Flexible Planning in
Sales & Operations Planning Component.
Planning Hierarchy shall be defined as
follows:
a)
Sales Organization
b)
Distribution Channel
c)
Division
d)
Material etc.
6. Consistent Planning Method shall be used.
7. Aggregation & Desegregation features shall
be provided.
8. Plan shall be segment wise, customer wise,
grade wise, width wise quantities to be sold
and the expected NSR for each item.
9. Sales plan shall be modified as per the
market and business situation.
10. Expected NSR shall also be indicated for the
purpose of working out the budgeted
Page 41 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
In case of Kalmeshwar sales plans are made on
the basis of order booked and order booking
plan. Where as rolling plan is made as per the
customers tentative requirement referencing
customers previous orders (sales history) and
their purchase plan.
Process flow documentation to be given for Full sales
Plan cycle.
This activity will not applicable for Assortment.
Against the plans the actual performance (like
planned qty, planned NSR, actual NSR etc) should be
made available through analysis reports.
Gaps/Comments
contribution and profitability.

11. On the basis of sales plan, production plan
shall be made.
12. Linking of sales plan with profitability
analysis and demand management shall be
done.
13. Process flow documentation for sales plan
shall be given.
14. Reports shall be available in SAP to show the
planned vis--vis actual performance.
6.1.2 Sales Activities

6.1.2.1
Sales Activities
Following Sales activities performed by Marketing

Personnel across ISPAT group should be maintained
in SAP R/3 system for direct sale:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Sales Visit
Sales Letter
Telephone Call
Participation in Seminars/exhibitions
Advertising in Magazines
Campaign Management
All the KAM (Key Account Managers) and customer

service sales person should prepare a day wise
customer visit plan for the month at the end of every
month for the next month.
This Visit Plan document should be Month wise

Product wise (proposed division wise)
HR products
DRI Products
Pig Iron Products
CR Products
GP Products
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Standard SAP supports maintenance of

following sales activities: Sales Calls,
Telephone Calls & Sales Letters.
The Above Sales activities shall be
maintained in the SAP R/3 system and also
follow up activities shall be performed by
setting the copy-control feature for the next
activity to be performed at the desired date.
Visit plans and tracking of the same is
possible with ABAP/4 development.
Sales persons are to be created as partner
functions and their personnel nos are to be
entered in the sales plan against the said
partner functions.
The dates with holidays may be maintained
as a calendar under global settings.
The reasons for visit shall be maintained .
System shall give the address and other
relevant details of the customer on filling the
customer code.
Purpose of visit shall be recorded in the visit
plan.
Report will be generated on the basis of dates
1, 2,4-8, 10, 12,13

(A)
3 ,9 11( c)
Incorporation of
Sales Activities like
Participation in
Seminars/exhibition
s, Advertising in
Magazines &
Campaign
Management not
possible. (H)
Page 42 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
CCS Products
10.
The visit plan document should contain the following.
Sales person Code (to be given as input and

system should reflect the relevant details) All
the sales employees should be pre defined in
this field or this should be linked with HR
module.
All the dates in a above given month should be
listed with indicator for holidays (e.g. Sundays,
Company Holiday, national holidays, Second
fourth Saturdays).
Selection of customer codes against each
dates (by selecting the codes the system
should give relevant details like destination,
contact address)
Purpose of visit (should be pre defined as
given below)
a. For business development
b. Complaint settlement
c. Material inspection
d. Payment collection
e. For collecting order / order follow up /
discussions on order placed
f. Sales support
g. Account / order reconciliation
h. Plant visit
i. Participation in tender finalisation
j. Product presentation/campaign
11.
12.
13.
Gaps/Comments
or on the basis of products for each planned/

unplanned visit vis--vis visit plan.
The customer code shall be entered in the
visit plan which will give the address and
other contact details from the master data.
The freezing of plan after a particular date
shall be achieved through ABAP
developments.
After the visit the sales person shall enter
the details of the visit as a follow-up activity
of the visit plan using the standard sales
support .
Reason for visit shall be entered in the sales
activity while MOM with the customer and
other relevant details shall be stored in text
of the sales activity.
There might be cases of visits Planned but not

visited, visited but not planned & planned and not
visited. On this, proper reports should be available
like the total visits planned on a given date by all
sales persons for a particular / all products.
After a particular date (to be specified) of every
month the planned visit documents should get free
Page 43 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
zed so that no changes can be made for the visits

planned for that month and a single authority is
should be given the change option of that
documents. Or this freezing control should be given
to a single authority from whose user id it should be
locked for changes and the document can be
changed from this user id only.
Visits can be to Customers (Business Partner)
corporate office or branch or plant or to godown.
A product wise single sheet report show the entire
visit plans made in a month. This should have the
dates in the month, all the sales employees and the
customer names.
After the Customer Visit by the sales person, the
sales person should prepare a detail Customer Visit
Report which should be made available in SAP. In the
beginning while creating the Visit Report, after giving
the sales employee code and the month the system
should list out all the planned visits for which visit
reports are not referenced of that sales employee for
that month and any one visit plan document can be
referenced for the visit report and if it is a unplanned
visit (for which visit plan is not made) system allow
to create a new visit report without referencing the
visit plan document. Based on this system should
decide whether it is a planned visit or unplanned visit
and this status should be shown in the document.
Check to be given to reference a visit plan

document to a single visit report.
All the details of referenced visit plan

document should be copied into the visit
report.
If it is the unplanned then system should allow

creating the visit report. The details mentioned
above for visit plan should be made available
here.
Page 44 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
If it is to attend customer complaint the

system should ask for the complaint document
which is to be referenced to this type of
customer visit reports.
The content of the Visit report should dependent on

the reason for the customer visit.
The details other than the copied details of the visit
plan document of Customer Visit as follows.
Outcome of the Visit, A short description of MOM
(Minutes of Meeting) with the Customer visited,
Market Information, Competitors activity in
customers area. Feedback from the Customers
about our material, service and on commercial
transactions & Proposed Action Plan for the future.
And once the document is saved it should be
forwarded to all concerned to their lotus notes by
SAP.
6.1.2.2
Sales Activity
Planning
Referencing and copying of visit plan to visit report

should be strictly followed so as to get the
compliance of plan and actual visits. If more than
one sales person visits a customer together then
system should accept one visit report document for
all the visited sales persons.
This activity will not applicable for Assortment
Provision for Planning Sales Activities is required.
(A)
1.
2.
3.
First, the Marketing person shall identify the

Sales Prospect and maintain the
corresponding master data in the SAP R/3
system, if not maintained already through
Master Data Maintenance
The Sales Activities component of Sales &
Distribution supports creation of additional
activities types. Hence Planning Activities
shall also be created as Activity Types. The
Marketing person shall plan the activity by
using these activity types.
Follow up Activities for these planned
Page 45 Of 361
6.1.2.3
6.1.2.4
Processes
in Sales
Recording
Sales Activity
Sales
Promotions

suggested by CVS IT
Recording of All Sales activities planned &

unplanned, should be provided.
Organizing the sending of promotional gifts or

product information shall be done on the SAP
system. Direct Mailers to the sales prospects shall be
sent. Product presentation and seminars should be
recorded and handled through SAP.
This activity will not applicable for Assortment

activities shall be the actual activities For
e.g.: for a sales visit plan the follow up
activity shall be sales call.
1. Sales Activities shall be booked with reference
to the Activity Plan.
2. Unplanned Activities shall be booked without
reference.
3. All activities like sales visit (call), telephone
call, sales letter shall be recorded with the
following details: (not limited to)
i) Order Probability (as gauged by the
Marketing Personnel)
ii) Status of the call
iii) Follow up Activity
iv) Conversation with the Customer etc.
1. Sales Promotions feature of Sales Activities
component shall be used to achieve the
same.
2. The Marketing person shall initiate a Direct
Mailing campaign either with or without a
follow-up activity.
3. Also, collective generation of mails to a list of
customers shall be sent if required using the
Sales Promotion Type Collectively Generated
Sales Activities.
Gaps/Comments
(A)
For sending the

mails to customers,
Integration with
ISPAT mail system
is required. This
aspect is out of
scope of the
Software Services
Agreement.(H)
6.1.3 Inquiry Processing

6.1.3
6.1.3.1
Inquiry
Processing
Inquiry receipt
All inquires which are received from customer (might

be through telephone, letter, visit, internet, fax)
should be recorded by the Marketing Person in the
system.
Tender Inquiry received from Govt sectors like
Railways, BHEL, Petron etc should be captured in the
system.
Inquiry processing will be applicable to all other

than assortment sale.
1.
The Marketing Person shall create
inquiries for materials that already exist in
the system.
Whether ISPAT is currently manufacturing a
material with a combination of particular
characteristics shall be known by executing a
search in the system. (Using transaction
CL31)
If the Material is available then the Inquiry
shall be created in the system.
2.
Standard features for tender is not
available in SAP system. Each customer has
It is not possible
to develop tender
in SAP system.
(2-H)
Page 46 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
its own format of tender and need lot

supporting documents. Developing customer
specific format of tender for each individual
customer is not possible.
For each tender enquiry normal enquiry shall
be generated in system with maximum
possible details. Text field should be used to
enter maximum possible data.
6.1.3.2
Processing
Capability
Confirmation
Process
1. The marketing person should be able to determine

with the help of the system, whether the
material requested by customer has already
been manufactured within production capability
scope.
2. If no TDC has been found for that material, then
the Inquiry has to be passed on to the Quality
Department for confirmation in SAP.
3. If Quality Department confirms the availability,
then a TDC should be created if not available in
the system and should be passed on to the
Marketing Person.
4. The Marketing Person shall pass on the TDC to the
Costing Department for Price Determination in
case of Kalmeshwar.
5. If Quality cannot confirm the availability of the
material, then the QC should suggest an
alternate material, which suits the customers
end application, with the help of the system. The
developed grade / the suggested alternate
material should be entered in the inquiry.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Using CL31 transaction it is possible to find

out whether TDC for material enquired by
customer is available or not. If it is not
available then through Document
management system of SAP marketing shall
create a document mentioning required
material specification. QC will refer the
document and create the TDC and enter in
the system in the form of another
document .Now with the help of this
document new material master record shall
be created which shall be used to create
inquiry.
Other Alternative is to create a self-defined
info structure in Quality Management
Information System and maintain the TDCs.
If the material is not available, then the
Marketing person shall create an Inquiry with
the material which is the nearest to customer
material specifications.
This material shall be found by CL31 search.
Now, this Inquiry shall be sent to quality with
a note requesting for the quality
specifications expected by the customer.
If Quality Department can match the
expectations, then it shall create those new
characteristic values on the SAP R/3 system,
change the Inquiry accordingly and then
release it to Marketing.
If the Quality cannot match the expectations,
then the Inquiry can either be rejected or an
alternative material shall be proposed
(A)
There are other
means of
maintaining these
technical
conditions but
the most suitable
means would be
finalized during
the configuration
phase.
Page 47 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
8.
1.
6.1.3.3
Delivery Date
Confirmation
Process
2.
3.
The Marketing person should be able to get the

Tentative Delivery Date from the system directly
whether it is a new TDC or an existing TDC.
The Delivery Date calculation should consider the
following: stock in hand, planned inward
movement of stock and planned outward
movement of stock etc.
Alternatively marketing can quote the standard
delivery period for inquired material referencing
TDC.
1.
6.1.3.4
6.1.3.5
Inquiry
Creation
Inquiry Change
The Inquiry should be created with the following

fields: Customer Code (Customer Master to be
created, if not existing), Grade (any steel grade),
End User Application, Material specifications,
Tolerances, Payment terms, Delivery terms,
Quantity and rate, Delivery Requirement dates,
Mode of Inquiry received, sales employee who is
handling the particular segment / customer.
2. The Inquiry should be sent automatically to
Production & QM though SAP Mail / Lotus Notes
wherever the TDC is not available.
3. Sufficient space should be provided for remarks
from PP / QM users.
4. The Marketing Person should be able to scan and
attach some important documents to Inquiry, if
required.
5. Message should be flashed for queries
unattended for more than a specific period.
6. Proper status should be available in the inquiry
like quotation sent, the order is received, inquiry
is regretted etc.
7. Enquiry analysis should be done periodically.
System should give an option to change any aspect
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Gaps/Comments
depending on the customers application.

In case a new material has to be created,
then the Master Creation Cell should be
duly notified for creation/extension of the
material
Availability Check (ATP Check) is done at this
Stage wherein the system will transfer the
requirement to PP without any reservations
and determines if the delivery shall be made
on the requested delivery date , checking
stock in hand, planned inward and outward
(A)
movement of stock.
In case it cannot confirm availability based on
the above, it confirms a date based on the
replenishment lead time specified in the
material masters MRP screen.
Marketing Person can create the Inquiry with
all details about Customer & material,
Payment Terms, Expected Delivery Date, and
Validity Period for Inquiry etc.
The Inquiry shall be sent to Production & QM
users using SAP Mail by using Workflow. If
Lotus Notes has to be used then apart from
Implementing Workflow, SAP R/3 system has
to be integrated with Lotus Notes Mail Server.
Texts in Inquiry shall be used to record the
comments from PP and QM Users
Attachment of scanned documents to Inquiry
is possible.
A report shall be generated by the system,
which shall display all inquiries for which
there are no follow up activity for a specific
period.
Enquiry analysis should be done periodically.
For all enquiries report should be generated
periodically showing the status and reasons
for short closure.
Customer, Validity Period for the Inquiry,
2. Lotus Notes
Integration with
SAP R/3 system
and
Implementation
of Workflow. (H
Not in Scope) so
sending the
inquiry to
production and
QM is not
possible.
(A)
Page 48 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
of Customer Inquiry like Material specifications etc.
6.1.3.6
Inquiry
Deletion
Gaps/Comments
Required Delivery Date etc. shall be changed

using the Inquiry-Change Option.
Deletion of an item in Inquiry or the whole
(A)
enquiry shall be available in the standard system.
6.1.4 Discounts & Rebates for Making Quotation

1.
While creating quotation following discounts have

to be available on the system for CR/CC/CG:
Quality Discount (Off Standard / Secondary
Products)
Quantity Discount (based on volumes for a
specific period different slabs of discounts
exists based on volumes)
Special Cash Discount
Width Discounts (for non standard widths)
6.1.4
Quotation given for above products and for a

particular size, grade or lot is net of all above
mentioned discounts.
Discounts &
Rebates
2.
6.1.4.1
Discounts
before sale
1.
Discounts shall be maintained using a

discount condition type in the SAP R/3
system. The values will be maintained on the
basis of characteristic values for the
particular material.
2.
Manual Discount Condition types shall not be

possible i.e. insertion of a discount condition
type in a sales document like quotation,
(A)
order or billing etc. shall not be made
possible, even though the functionality is
available.
Rebate condition types may be maintained
within a validity period from which accruals
are to be posted for retroactive payment.
If price itself is net of all discounts then there
is no need to maintained condition records for
discounts.
Rebate Agreements should be maintained for

customers for a specific period in the SAP R/3
system.
3.
Following are the discounts for HR/DRI/PI:
4.
Per PO
Specific to material , rate, location
Total sales over a period of time
Freight Subsidy
Price difference discount
Commission
Discounts which are maintained in the quotation are
Discounts before sale.
Types of the discounts are :
Cash Discount.
Turn over Discount
Quantity Discount
1.
2.
3.
Customer-Specific discount conditions shall (A)

Material specific Discounts conditions shall be
maintained wherever required.
Customer-Material specific conditions shall be
maintained wherever required.
Page 49 Of 361
6.1.4.2
Processes
in Sales
Discounts
during sale

suggested by CVS IT
Rebate Etc.
All discounts should be maintained in the system.
Various Discounts are given to customers during
sales and are adjusted in the invoice itself. Types of
discounts given to customers are :
Cash Discount.
Off-Width Discount
Special Discount ( to some of loyal trade

customer )
SD is given in some of the depots

occasionally.
All discounts should be maintained in SAP.
6.1.4.3
Rebates
Many times discounts are given for a specific period

after sales. These discounts are :
Monthly /Qtrly/Yearly Off take Rebate
Turnover Discount
Quantity Discount (Trade & OEM customers &

on the base of monthly off take.)
Over Billing Discount
Quality Discount
Special Discount/Rebate
Freight Subsidy Discount
Width discount (for non standard width)
Special Cash discount.
Quarterly Quantity discount
QQD is given in case of Guwahati and

Kolkata depot.
Purchase order wise.
These discounts are passed on to customer at the

end of specific period or sale. Which are in the form
of credit notes.
All discounts should be maintained in the SAP and
should be given in the form of credit note.
Gaps/Comments
4.
These discount conditions shall be active from

inquiry stage.
1.
Quality Discounts & Off-Width Discounts

come under this category.
Discount condition values for off-standard
specifications shall be maintained in the
system before hand.
The system shall pickup the discounts
(A)
automatically based on the characteristics of
the material that is being picked up during
delivery.
This discount condition shall be active in
Billing.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Rebates shall cover all Discounts given

(A)
retroactively, which are based on sales
volumes quantities & volumes.
Ideally, all rebate agreements shall be
maintained in the SAP R/3 system before the
Rebate is announced.
Even other wise, retroactive rebate
agreements shall be maintained on a later
date.
Whenever a Rebate is being declared
condition records shall be maintained for
specific customer or material or customermaterial combination.
The Rebate agreement shall consider all the
billing documents invoices, credit memos &
debit memos.
Issuing a credit memo to the customer for
the accumulated rebate total shall do the
final settlement. The Credit memo shall be
issued with reference to billing document.
For Rebate agreements with long periods,
ISPAT shall have the option to post the
accruals in the intermittent period
Page 50 Of 361
6.1.4.4
Processes
in Sales
Special Cash
Discounts

suggested by CVS IT
Cash discounts are given to customer as a incentive

for early or advance payment.
Special Cash discount can only be given when
payment terms entered is 100% advance or cash
payment terms.
Gaps/Comments
automatically so that the accumulated value

of a rebate is recorded for accounting
purposes
Cash Discount shall be maintained as condition
record which shall be linked with payment terms.
Cash discount shall be activated on the basis of
payment terms. This discount is applicable when
the customer settles his dues within a specific
period.
6.1.5 Quotation Processing

6.1.5.1
Quotation
Creation
1.
Quotation should be created with or without

reference to an Inquiry with validity period.
2. Quotation shall be created for new materials only
after getting confirmation from Quality
Department.
3. Quotation shall be released to customer only
after being approved by the designated
authority.
4. Multiple Quotations should be possible against a
single Inquiry.
5. There should be provision for entering the details
of negotiations that occurred with the customer
The Sales Price entered in the quotation should never
go below the Net Sales Realization Value and if it
goes below the value the quotation should be
blocked. It should get released only by higher
authorisation.
All the standard technical specifications should get
copied into the quotation fro the TDC master.
In case of negative contribution the quotation should
be approved by competent authority for further
processing. Credit Limit check needs to be done here.
In case of project, while entering the accessories, it
should be entered in multiple of original coil width
and system check should be there. In case only
accessories are there, non check is required
Quotation should be sent to customer through mail
with the TDC.
1.
Ideally, Quotation should be created with

( A)
reference to an Inquiry with validity period.
2. For new materials, Inquiries are created
10- H (Work flow is
temporarily using the material, which
out of scope.)
matches the specifications of the customer
the most.
3. Then the status of the Inquiry shall be
changed as Under Quality Approval using
the Rejection Reason in Inquiry.
4. Now, follow-up action is not possible on the
Inquiry. Tracking of the quotations given to
same customer for same product by other
region/ branch shall be done using ABAP
report.
5. Quality Personnel can remove the Indicator
once the processing capability for that
particular material is confirmed.
6. Now Marketing Person can create the
Quotation after confirmation with Costing
Department.
7. Payment terms shall be finalized at this
level.
8. If Payment Guarantees are involved in
payment terms, the details shall be
maintained in the Quotation under Payment
Terms.
9. Ideally, the instruments in Payment
Guarantees should be created at this
juncture and referred in the final quotation.
10. Approval procedure can not be mapped since
Page 51 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Pricing should be derived on the basis of following

factors:
Material cost
Competitor product price
Market Trend and Industry meeting

In case of Kalmeshwar prices for the products should
be calculated on the basis of input characteristics like
Thickness, width, Zinc, Grade, Hardness, product
type, Skin Pass, Paint type , Guard Film , coating
specification ,etc.
Price confirmation PCM is issued to all branches/
Depots and consignment agents by CMO for every
beginning of the month. This PCM is for billing
purpose. Discounts to be given (quality, quantity,
and cash, special) are mentioned in the PCM. Billing
prices & discount should not be lower than the PCM
prices.
Gaps/Comments
workflow is not covered under scope of

agreement.
11. Against a single Inquiry, multiple quotations
shall be created until the customer accepts
the quotation.
12. The details of the negotiations shall be
entered using the Texts in Quotation.
13. In case the quotation does not mature to a
firm order, the quotation shall be short
closed assigning a reason for rejection to the
items.
14. Pricing shall be carried out on the basis of
pricing condition record which shall be
determined on the base of material
characteristics, customer etc.
15. In case of projects separate BOM shall be
maintained with required components and
the pricing shall be determined on the basis
of condition record maintained for all the
components attached in BOM.
16. Other details such as terms and condition
and technical details of the project quotation
shall be maintained in header and Item texts
of quotation.
6.1.5.2
Quotation
Amendment
Quotation amendment should be made possible.

The quotation number should be same but appended
with A (Amendment). Storage and releasing process
should be same as above. Amended quotation shall
always be referred along with original quotation.
Quotation analysis to be done periodically.
17. Old prices shall be applicable to all open

documents and shall be changed, if required.
18. Condition records shall be changed or
maintained on the basis of approved prices.
Amendment in Quotation shall be managed by
creating a new quotation with reference to the
earlier quotation. All the quotations with
reference to a quotation shall be viewed as
document-flow.
Quotation analysis should be done periodically.
For all quotation report should be generated
periodically showing the status and reasons for
Suffix A shall be
attached by
having an
external number
range for
quotations which
is not at all
possible since the
Page 52 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
short closure.
Gaps/Comments
volume of
quotations is too
high to manage
the numbering
externally (G- Not
possible)
6.1.6 Payment Guarantees Process

6.1.6
Payment
Guarantees
Process
1.
2.
3.
All the LCs, which are received from customers,

1.
should be entered in SAP and linked with the
sales order against which deliveries to the
2.
customer to be made.
The LC master should reflect the available
amount and the open sales orders against it.
And all the preceding documents like Hundi;
Debit Note should be referenced from this
master record and the invoice details.
3.
The LC details should be entered as a master 4.

data in SAP. This master data should be
linked with the sales order and option should
5.
be there to link more than one LC master to
a single material item in a sales order. Check
should be done by system not to create the
sales order of value more than the LC
available value. In the invoices and the Lorry
Receipt copy the LC details should get
printed.
The LC available value should be calculated

6.
based on the LC value, Usance period,
7.
interest free days, despatches against the
LC, pending sales orders for despatch.
8.
Provision should be made to link n number
of internally generated LC Master numbers. If
a material item is of 100mt and a earlier LC
9.
balance is for only 20mt and a fresh LC is
master is created in which 500mt can be
despatched. So both the LC masters should
10.
be able to link to that same material item
and for the first 20mt despatches the system
should use the first LC number.
ISPAT uses Letter of Credit as a Payment

( A)
Guarantee Instrument for all sales
Letter of Credit shall be maintained using
Bank Guarantee,
Payment Guarantees feature of Sales &
Hundi and PDC
Distribution. This shall be in the form of
Transactions shall be
financial document. The LC master will reflect developed using
the available amount and the open sales
ABAP if standard
orders against it
functionality is not
LC value and dates shall be maintained here. sufficient (C)
This financial document shall be attached
11- (G)
when a sales order is being created in the
26 (F)
system.
Number of sales orders against a LC shall be
monitored in the SAP system. Since more
than one LC cannot be allocated to the same
item in the sales order, then the item has to
be manually split in order to allocate more
than one LC. Accordingly system will
generate individual billing documents on the
split items.
Hundi Transactions shall be handling at AR.
Credit note shall be handling as similar as
advance payment.
If the standard functionality doesnt satisfy
the requirements, then an application in
ABAP shall be developed for LC management.
No. of LC received against particular PO and
value utilised and balanced shall be tracked
with the help of ABAP report.
System gives the details of LC used against
particular invoiced and also gives the balance
(unutilised) value. Other details like Value of
Page 53 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
The LC master codes should be able to give

in the access sequence to determine which
LC is to be utilised first and after completing
the first one then only it should use the
second one as per the access sequence.
The LC masters can be able to link at header
level to all items in the sales order.
System should not allow issuing an invoice
for a material of a material item or of a
different item containing more than one LC
Master Number. And in this case two
different invoices should be created.
If the value of a single coil / packet is more
than the LC available value then it should use
the next LC as per the access sequence, or if
subsequent LC is not available then the
system should not allow to create the
invoice.
For a sales order having payment terms as
LC the system should only allow to select the
LC master numbers rather than manually
entering, and while selecting, the system
should list out all the LC master numbers
(only in which available amount is available,
here the minimum available amount should
be specified, say, for HR it should be 2lacs)
against the payer (financier) of the sales
order.
Once the LC master numbers are listed with
that the system should show the
corresponding bank LC Numbers and the LC
dates with the available amount in the LC.
If the payment term is against Letter of
Credit then only system should ask for /
allow selecting the LC numbers.
While linking a LC master to a sales order
the system should check the following
criterias and then only proceed other wise it
should give the error by giving the
appropriate messages.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Gaps/Comments
pending sales order against the LC shall be

obtained through ABAP report.
Linking multiple LC s through access
sequence to determine the available LCs
whose values may fulfil the value of the sales
order not possible.
The LC number has to be entered at the item
level of the sales order in the billing screen.
The system shall check the LC no against the
payer in the sales order and give a message
in case the sales order value fall short of the
LC value.
Credit limit check shall be conducted against
the payment term LC Awaited followed by
production & delivery block if the customer
disqualifies for the same.
LC No shall be given at header level and shall
be link with all items at item level.
In case of LC payment terms system shall
allow user to select LC No. (Payment
document) from the list of available LC.
Credit limit check shall be conducted for
payment terms financial arrangements
awaited and block the sales order. Which
shall be released manually if would like to
dispatch the material.
If available amount of LC selected is smaller
than the value of material system shall flash
the warning but there shall be no provision
for selecting another LC automatically.
Checking last schedule line date with last
shipment date of LC shall not possible.
System shall allow assigning the LC to new
sales order when same is already assigned to
other sales order.
System shall not flash prior intimation for LC
being expired. A report shall be generated
and run to know the expiration date(7 days in
advance) of LC.
A report shall be generated to get small
leftover balances. Small leftover balance LC
Page 54 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
a.
Payer codes : if not matching system

should give a message like payers are
mismatching
b. Available amount in the LC master: if
the available amount is smaller than the
value of the material item system should
give a message like LC available amount
is not sufficient, please select another
subsequent LC and the cursor should
prompt to the field where the next LC
master number is to be selected. And if
any other LC are not selected then
system should prompt the cursor at the
last schedule line quantity, system
should calculate the allowed quantity
against the available amount of the LC
and system should give the available LC
value and the quantity as error saying
that this much of value is available and
this much quantity acceptable against it.
c. Last date of last range of customer
requirement dates / schedule line and
the sales order validity should be less
than the last date of shipment date in
the LC master.
If a sales order contains the payment term
LC awaited, there should be a option of
despatching the material through the credit
limit check. But in the billing documents /
invoices it should be taken as letter of credit
payment terms, and when the actual LC is
received the already despatched invoices
should be able to include in the Hundi for
discounting under that LC.
If a sales order contains the payment term
financial arrangements awaited system
should not allow any further documents
against this particular material item / sales
order. For despatches against this the
payment terms has to be changed and
23.
24.
25.
26.
Gaps/Comments
shall be short closed and shall be informed to

customer through SAP mail.
System shall give details of no. of LC received
against each PO and also utilised and balance
amount.
System shall give detail invoice wise value
consumed of particular LC and available
balance amount of that LC.
Checklist for maintenance of critical fields in
the L/c shall be made available.
L/Cs balances of a particular customer to be
correlated with stock list for making delivery
order (stock allocation to be done as per L/C
balances) shall be explored.
Page 55 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
despatches can be done through credit limit

check.
Bank Guarantee in this the bank guarantee
details should be entered in the sales order
and the track of despatches should be done
here and system should not allow despatches
of value more than the bank guarantee
value.
Provision of L/c checklist in SAP before going to the

actual terms of L/c.
If an attempt is made to issue a new order

acceptance against the same L/C the system
should accept the same with earlier pending
order acceptance treated as closed.
There should be checks in the system for

validity of the L/C and system should flash
prior intimation for L/Cs being expired.
(Normally 7 Days in advance).
Small L/C balance leftover after completion of

order to be reflected by system so that parties
can be informed for short closure. L/C is
treated as blocked and is not shown in live
online system. All short closed L/C should be
informed to the respective customers
mentioning L/C Ref #, L/C date and L/C
balance.
L/Cs balances of a particular customer to be
correlated with stock list for making delivery
order (stock allocation to be done as per L/C
balances).
System should give details of LC received
against each PO and also give the details of LC
used and balance value as well as LC numbers.
Following are the fields which should be

required in LC master :
Page 56 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Company
LC Type ( Usance / Sight)
Bank LC No.
LC Opening Date, Last Shipment Date,
Last date of Negotiation, LC expiry
date payer.
LC bank details (Opening Bank,
Negotiating bank, Advising Bank)
Currency
LC Amount
Interest Rate
Interest free period
Total Usance period
Bank Charges
Quantity and Value tolerance.
Once the billing is started the master

should get updated automatically giving the
invoiced value and available value. In the LC
master the system should calculate and show
the following values :
a. Value of despatches under the LC.
b. Value of pending sales orders against
the LC.
c. And the available amount for despatch
in the LC.
6.1.7 Contracts
6.1.7.1
Contracts
6.1.8
Scheduling
Agreement/
Sales Order
Customer contracts should be available in the

system to capture various contracts with the
customer.
Depending upon the nature of contract,

quantity, value, service, rate etc types of
contracts may be created in the standard
system.
(A )
6.1.8 Scheduling Agreement /Sales Order Processing & Execution

Scheduling agreement /Sales order combines the
functions of transferring requirement to PP and
triggering delivery once the stock is available.
Currently scheduling agreements are being used to
Allocation of stock shall be done in scheduling

agreement after production. When multiple /
single sales order will reference the same
Page 57 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
transfer the requirement to PP while the sales
order created with reference to scheduling
agreement triggers the delivery.
Gaps/Comments
scheduling agreement, the stock allocated

against the scheduling agreement has to be
(A)
manually distributed / allocated (batch wise) to
various SO for delivery. Material allocated against
sales order can only be despatched. This means
the stock against which sales order is available
will be allocated against the sales order and the
stock for which sales order is not available then
it will be shown against the scheduling
agreement. Once the stock is transferred from
scheduling agreement to sales order, the stock
will be converted into dispatch able stock. A
report will be customized which will list out the
Balance to Roll, Despatch able Stock, Stock (C)
waiting for Sales Order, etc.
The Scheduling agreement /sales order is a
contractual agreement between a ISPAT and a
customer (sold-to-party) about delivering
products or providing a service for defined
prices, quantities and times. Scheduling
agreement shall be used to transfer the
requirement to PP. To meet customer
requirements PP shall plan production on the
basis of schedule line of SA.
In sales order processing, the system
implements various functions:
The system checks whether the material is
available for the requested delivery date and if
necessary, transfers the requirements to
materials planning. Shipping deadlines and
shipping points are determined in delivery
scheduling.
Once the material is manufactured and made
available in unrestricted use stock, delivery shall
be created with reference to sales order. Apart,
while processing sales order the system can
perform other basic functions like material
configuration, pricing, delivery scheduling,
transportation scheduling, shipping point & route
determination, output determination, partner
Page 58 Of 361
6.1.8.1
Processes
in Sales
Scheduling
Agreement/
Sales Order
Creation

suggested by CVS IT
Customer may give a letter of intent or PO for

planning of substrate, paint types and shades for
production of the material.
Sales order/ scheduling agreement should be created
with / without reference to a quotation.
Control parameters for a scheduling agreement

should be given at Scheduling Agreement
header level and item level. Like this whatever
parameters are given at header level should
get copied to all items at item level in a
scheduling agreement. At the item level if at
all any changes to be done to the parameters
the system should allow to do it. And
everywhere else the system should refer to the
parameters of the particular item only (like for
invoicing).
The following fields should be made available to

sales order document.
Customer Purchase Order Number and Date of

Purchase Order of the Customer
Validity of the document (valid from date and

valid to date)
Material wise, quantity wise customers

Delivery Requirement Dates in Range.
Print Grade should be mandatory entered by

the user, on the basis of which the grade to be
printed should be available via a pop menu
Test certificate would be printed, offered by
Gaps/Comments
determination, text determination, etc giving

the user the automatic processing functionality
of these basic functions.
In case of changes in the rates of taxes and
duties for open sales orders, the system shall
allow new pricing to be carried out.
Report of open orders shall be available using
ABAP functionality where an item may be closed
By assigning a reason for rejection.
1. Ideally a scheduling Agreement should be
(A / C)
created with reference to quotation and
Sales Order should be created with reference
to a Scheduling Agreement.
2. All material details and commercial terms
shall be copied from quotation or will be
allowed to change while creating Scheduling
agreement / sales order.
3. The Customer Purchase Order Number &
Date fields shall be available for entry.
4. The validity period of the Scheduling
Agreement and Sales Order shall be
maintained in the system.
5. Scheduling agreement shall allow the
characteristics values of the material to be
entered in range.
6. If the production capacity is not sufficient to
produce specified material with in a given
schedule time then, the system will
reschedule and confirm the dates.
7. Sales order shall be printed on the basis of
output determination which is assign to the
Customer/ document type/ printer.
8. Multiple characteristic values shall be
maintained in the sales order so that the
same functionality shall be used for pricing,
producing and allocating the material.
9. Minimum order quantity maintained in the
material master record shall be used to
determine the minimum qty and rounding
the ordered qty in multiples of the sales unit.
10. Characteristics tolerance is maintained at
Page 59 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
the system as maintained in the TDC / Grade

master for that particular grade there should
11.
be a blank long text option where the one time
grade can be entered by selecting that and
irrespective of the value it should get printed
in the Test Certificate and in the excise invoice.
Once option should be given to select the ISI
logo and by selecting it the ISI logo should get
printed in the test certificate.
Delivery Plant, item category
12.
For all scheduling agreements the output
document types should be predefined in the
system and by default it should be copied so
13.
that at transaction level it is not necessary to
select it manually.
14.
Shipping marks - The data required for
printing of labels like PO No, Coils No, Grade
width thickness etc, are to be captured and
printed for Exports orders.
Following to be taken care in order document1.
2.
3.
4.
Only Technically and Commercially Clear

customers orders to be booked in system.
System will validate whether a requirement of
the customer is technically and commercially
clear.
System to allow order creation for material,
which can be, processed as per TDC/ production
capabilities only. Checks to be done on thickness
and tolerances for a particular grade and width.
Tolerances to be checked as per capability.
Specific coil weight, crown, camber, ID to be
checked with respect to capabilities.
Clear delivery schedule item wise (size wise) and
required quantity wise to be there in order. Entry
of delivery schedule to be mandatory.
No changes should be allowed, if the system has
started processing of order for production
planning. Amendment in orders should be allowed
only after cancellation/ amendments of
Gaps/Comments
customer master classification screen

At the time of the processing the sales order
the system shall carry out pricing to calculate
the contribution credit check to calculate the
credit exposure, verify the material for sales
status and product attributes values of
characteristics of the material in the sales
order with the corresponding values
maintained in the material master records.
Copying of data from the header level to the
item level is SAP standard feature.
The fields required are standards in SAP.
The provision for entering print grades for
printing Test Certificates along with ISI Logo
as maintained in the text boxes in the sales
order shall be provided with ABAP/4.
15. The output types for the transactions shall be

defined so that the output may be generated
by the system automatically as an
application update. However the user has to
select the communication methods like name
of printer, no of copies required etc.
16. Thickness, width, length, edge properties,
centre slit, zinc coating, colour, guard film etc
shall be maintained as characteristics.
17. If order is booked for NCO material then
material shall be allocated to particular sales
order and shall be blocked for further
booking.
18. Incompletition procedure shall ensure the
presence of technical and commercial data in
the sales order.
19. System shall check the values of
characteristics entered in the sales order
from their allowed values in TDC
Page 60 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
subsequent documents by PPC on advice of

Marketing.
Reason of each amendment in order to be
recorded in System.
System to check NSR of material being booked
in order, if the same is defined by Marketing and
approved by competent authority.
System should not allow the order with a
delivery week where the spare capacity is not
available. It should only be allowed after change
of delivery schedule of some of existing orders.
Entry of Customer Class and Customer Group to
be mandatory.
NCO orders to be triggered from NCO stock only.
Marketing user to be able to make the NCO
orders by selecting the material in stock for
which requirement is received from the
customers. This will reduce possibility of any
error in preparation of orders and stock against
these orders will not required to be allocated, as
it will automatically get allocated on selection of
material during preparation of order document.
Once a order is booked for NCO material, then
that material (as per the batch) should be
allocated to that sales order and material (batch)
should be blocked for further booking.
NCO stock list should be available to all branches
and depots.
10. System to ensure that only the material, which is

declared as NCO is selected in orders for NCO.
11. In case of Narrow slits, which are generated and
declared as NCO, The same procedure of order
booking through selection from stock to be
followed. However as per present scenario due
to practical problem in handing and despatch of
narrow slits as per allocated ID numbers, slits
are not being allocated against NCO orders. This
issue is vital and would be discussed along with
other important issues, accordingly the
Gaps/Comments
20. Changes in sales order shall not be permitted

once production order is made against a
sales order.
21. The pricing screen of the order shall calculate
the NSR.
22. System will perform an ATP check in the
order to determine the material availability
date.
23. In case of NCO the availability check shall be
performed on the basis of stock in hand.
24. Sales order shall be created with reference to
a scheduling agreement.
25. Sales order shall trigger the delivery of the
material as Scheduling Agreement shall
trigger the production. By control of item
completion, more than one sales order may
be creasted with reference to a scheduling
agreement.
26. Changes shall not be allowed in a sales
order after the generation of invoice. In case
of multiple sales orders referencing a single
scheduling agreement, the sales order
quantity may be increased to the scheduling
agreement quantity and reduced to the
already despatched quantity.
27. Sales order with the payment terms LC
awaited will perform a credit limit check and
if the document disqualifies in it, then further
processing will not be allowed.
28. The appropriate output type shall be
maintained in the system for sales orders
which will be defaulted by the system for
generation of output.
29. The system will not fix the quantity and
delivery date requested by the customer so
that in case the material is available earlier
than the requested date, the deliveries can
be processed. This can be ensured in the
standard system by choosing the delivery
proposal option in the Availability Control;
screen of the sales order.
Page 61 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
procedure to be finalized, after clearance from
operations and marketing.
Sales Order should be a Delivery Order to Logistics
to despatch the allocated material against a
Scheduling Agreement. It should be created only by
referencing a scheduling agreement and all the
details of the scheduling agreement should be copied
to the sales order.
Option should be kept open to create more than

one sales orders by referencing a single
scheduling agreement provided total quantity
referenced should not exceed the quantity of the
material item of the scheduling agreement.
Option should be given to create a sales order by

referencing more than one scheduling
agreements provided the sold to party of the
scheduling agreements are the same.
While referencing a scheduling agreement option

should be given to select the material items with
quantity to be referenced.
Once the first invoice is generated against a
Gaps/Comments
30. Sales orders failing in credit limit check shall

be blocked for further processing unless
released by competent authority.
31. In case of Kalmeshwar material a make to
order scenario will apply where the order will
trigger a planned order and then a
production order. Availability check will be
performed to confirm the availability of the
material in NCO.
32. Depending upon material codification, if the
customers requirement covers a range of
width and thickness then alternative
materials to be entered to cover the entire
range of width and thickness desired by the
customer.
33. Requested delivery date in schedule lines of
sales order and scheduling agreement should
be fixed dates. No range values can be
incorporated here.
material item in the sales order system should not
allow any changes other than quantity to that

particular material item. In this the quantity can
be increased to the extent of the quantity of the
material in the scheduling agreement and it can
be reduced only to the extent of despatched
quantity.
System should not allow to create a sales order
with the payment term as further transactions
like gate in , delivery etc if the payment terms
are financial arrangements awaited / lc is
awaited against that particular material item.
System should allow the following parameters to

amend like,
Ship to Party, Delivery Party
Payment terms
Transporters
Page 62 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Quantity
Print Grade
Delivery Terms
If a sales order contains the payment term LC
awaited, there should be a option of despatching the
material through the credit limit check. But in the
billing documents / invoices it should be taken as
letter of credit payment terms, and when the actual
LC is received the already despatched invoices
should be able to include in the hundi for discounting
under that LC.
If a sales order contains the payment term financial
arrangements awaited system should not allow any
further documents against this particular material
item / sales order. For despatches against this the
payment terms has to be changed and despatches
can be done through credit limit check
For all sales orders the output document types
should be predefined in the system and by default it
should be copied so that at transaction level it is not
necessary to select it manually.
System should not allow any despatches prior to the
customer requirement dates and if at all to be done
for this there should be option like pre despatches
can be done. After only selecting this option system
should allow the despatches.
For all the Sales Orders which are having payment
terms other than Letter of Credit credit check
should be done by the system, this check should be
carried out while saving and if the credit check is
cleared then only the system should save the
document, other wise it should park the document,
which means the system should not allow to the
despatches against the document. When the
customer account is credited then the system should
release the document automatically provided it
clears the credit limit check. The parked documents
(for documents for which credit limit check is failed)
can be released manually. This authorisation should
be given to the user id of the key person, from
Page 63 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
whose login in only this can be released.

In case of Kalmeshwar sales order should be booked
for MTO against customer PO. If material is urgent
then It is checked with available NCO stock. If same
is available or any deviation is there in material
same is confirmed with customer and order is
booked in MTO category. In such case NCO stock
should be converted to MTO stock by PPIC. In case
of NCO nonprime the rate are negotiated with
customer and SO is prepared for NON prime should
be prepared for that Non Prime Material made to
stock category.
System should allow entering a range of width and
thickness range of the product during order creation.
Material allocation should be possible in case of NCO
material in the sales order stock shown in stock
report should be either allocated to work order or
NCO stock.
In case of narrow slit the allocation should be on the
basis of lot quantity.
1.
2.
1.
6.1.8.2
Partner
Allocations
2.
3.
The following fields should be made available to

sales order document - Customer code (for SP,
SH, PY, BY)
System should support allocation of more than
one Transporter.
Consignment Agent , commission agent, C & F
agent should be maintained as partner function
3.
4.
At the time of creation of Sales Order, the

Marketing person shall enter the Sold-toParty
The system shall automatically pop-up a list
of ship-to-parties for selection, if more than
one are defined for the sold-to-party.
Transporters also shall be assigned to the
Sales Order using the Partners Allocation
function. More than one transporter shall be
allocated against one Partner function in the
sales order.
Partner function such as Special Stock
partner of the customer , Commission agent
and C & F agent shall be maintained in
Customer master from where it is copied in
to sales document,
(A)
Page 64 Of 361
6
6.1.8.3
Processes
in Sales
Material
Specification
Entry

suggested by CVS IT
For HR (MTO) Product scheduling agreement,
Grade (This should only be selected from the

available TDC Master List)
Width, Thickness, Length (only for material

type sheets, plates, chequered plates) to be
declared (The system should only accept the
values as per the range mentioned in the
Grade Master / TDC master) (as per the
customer Purchase Order)
Width, Thickness and Length should also be

able to give in ranges like material of any
width between 1200MM to 1500MM.
Option should be given to enter a optional

grade.
Type of Material
Mill Coil only (the Width mentioned above

should be Mill Width only)
Slit Coil only (in this centre slit / side slit

should be mentioned) (the Width mentioned
above should be Slit Width only). In slit edge
orders once the mill coils are produced for
slitting against the order then the output qty
from slitting should be shown in WIP and the
bal to roll / supply quantity should be
calculated by excluding the output quantity of
the slitting.
Mill Coil / Slit Coil (the above mentioned width

should be Mill Width and for Slit edge the
width should be specified) (in this centre slit /
side slit should be mentioned)
Sheets
Plates
Chequered Coils
Chequered Plates

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Gaps/Comments
In the Sales Order, Material

(A)
characteristics/specifications shall be entered
using classification feature.
The values for these characteristics shall be
restricted to those maintained in the Material
Master Classification.
Delivery Tolerances shall be provided as per
pre-determined percentage of the total order
quantity.
Using CL31 transaction it is possible to find
out whether TDC for material enquired by
customer is available or not. If it is not
available then through Document
management system of SAP marketing shall
create a document mentioning required
material specification. QC will refer the
document and create the TDC and enter in
the system in the form of another
document .Now with the help of this
document new material master record shall
be created which shall be used to create
inquiry.
Using the IS: ML functionality the system will
allow copying the values of characteristics
from one item to no of other items.
The values of all characteristics shall be
maintained in the material master.
This is a standard functionality of PP and the
WIP output qty should be shown against the
scheduling agreement till the time the FG
comes to stock.
Tolerances
Minimum Thickness Tolerance
Maximum Thickness Tolerance
Minimum Width Tolerance (if the type of

Page 65 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
material is Mill Coil / Slit Coil, option of giving

tolerances for both edges should be given)
Maximum Width Tolerance (if the type of
material is Mill Coil / Slit Coil, option of giving
tolerances for both edges should be given)
The above tolerances should be for following
nominal thickness / width to be rolled.
Nominal thickness to be rolled
Width to be rolled
Length to be rolled (for material type sheets,
plates and chequered plates only)
Minimum Length Tolerance
Maximum Length Tolerance
Specific Weight Minimum (by this system
should calculate the minimum coil weight)
should not accept the out of range value,
which is defined in the Grade.
Specific Weight - Maximum (by this system
should calculate the maximum coil weight)
should not accept the out of range value,
which is defined in the Grade.
Packet Weight minimum (for material type
sheets, plates, chequered plates only, by this
system should calculate minimum coil weight)
Packet weight maximum (for material type
sheets, plates, chequered plates only, by this
system should calculate maximum coil weight)
The thickness tolerances and the specific /
packet weights should be done mandatory for
MTO scheduling agreement. For others the
system should propose the standard values as
per the TDC master.
All the chemical and mechanical properties
should be made available here as per the
TDC / Grade Master.
Aiming of CHEMISRTY Composition as per
customers requirement (say, in TDC carbon
max is 0.4% but customer requests to
Page 66 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
maintain the same at 0.3% max). Against

each chemical property there should be a
option for entering Aim Chemistry Value. By
default the system should give this value as
per the TDC / Grade Master and changes to
this should be allowed and changed values
should be highlighted with BOLD and with a
different colour
Option should be given to select Material Inspection
Required or not. By default the system should take
Inspection not required and this can be changed to
Inspection required. And if required Third Party
Inspection or Inspection by customer should be
specified. After the production against this order the
material should be under Hold for Customer / Third
Party Inspection. After the inspection QC dept
should clear the material. Then only it should be
despatched.
For HR free stock material scheduling agreement,
Grade (This should only be selected from the

available TDC Master List)
Width, Thickness (The system should only

accept the values as per the range mentioned
in the Grade Master / TDC master)
Types of Material
Mill Coil
Slit Coil
Sheets
Plates
Chequered Coils
Chequered Plates
Thickness, Width, length and quantity

tolerance
By giving the above material details the system
should list out all the coils which are available for
selling and here we should be able to assign /
allocate / select the coil numbers to that particular
material.
Page 67 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
For DRI / Pig Iron Product sales order no

specifications are required.
Quantity: For all products and all types of sales

provision to be made to enter total quantity for
a particular material and further this quantity
should be bifurcated by the Customer
requirement dates (Schedule Lines). For HR
Made to Stock (NCO) material, by default
system should propose a single customer
requirement date on the default date for the
entire material quantity. This can be changed
manually. And for HR MTO products it should
be done mandatory. Provision should be made
to select N number of customer requirement
dates. Once the delivery requirements are
given then the system should not allow to
change the total quantity of the material item,
the quantity can be changed against the
customer requirement dates and as per the
customer requirement dates the system should
calculate the total material quantity and should
update the same in the total material quantity.
And the system should be able to take these
customers requirement dates in the range
format. (Say, a customer requires 100MT
between 20th to 25th, and another 100MT
between 30th to 15th of Dec 02).
The last date of last schedule line should be
within the validity of the scheduling
agreement.
For HR MTO materials this dates should be
considered while releasing production order
and system should not allow any production
and allocation prior to these dates and if at all
any prior production or allocation of material to
be done a option should be provided against
each schedule line like Pre production can be
done. Only after selecting this option system
should allow the production / allocation of
material.
Page 68 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Quantity Tolerance- This should be in % and system

should calculate the value in terms of Tonnage.
(Some flexibility should be given to the material item
quantity so that excess allocated material shall be
despatched without amending the order quantity and
the order quantity will be unchanged.) (System
should not allow the value, which is greater than the
minimum coil weight.) for ex. If the order quantity is
100MT, coil weight is 20 22MT and quantity
tolerance is 5% (system should not accept a
tolerance above 20%), and total stock available
against this is 104MT. So maximum of 105MT shall
be despatched against a order quantity of 100MT
and all the allocated 104MT will get despatched
without changing the order quantity. Quantity
tolerance should be maintained at item level, header
level & lot level and the tolerance at individual item
level should not cumulatively exceed the tolerance at
the header level.
In case Of CRM/CCS/CGL OEM and OAU :- Sales
order should be booked on the basis of PO
mentioning Customer details delivery details, terms
of payments:
Product type (like coil , plain sheet ),

Material grade like ( EDD ( Extra Deep
Drawing ),DD ( Deep Drawing, D ( Drawing
Grade ) )
End application: Fabrication, Panel, Auto
Industry. Washing M/C, Refrigerator , Coolers,
white goods etc
Temper ( Annealed, Medium , Hard)
Zinc Coating: Grams per Square Metre.(in
case of CGL)
Size : Thickness x width x length (length not
asked for coil form)
Tolerances in thickness and width
Page 69 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments

should not accept the out of range value which
is defined in the Grade and maximum,
Mechanical and chemical properties
Base Metal thickness mm: (With Tolerance
desired) This is optional field
Thickness: Total Coated Thickness mm.
Size : width x length (length not asked for coil
form)
Thickness: Total Coated Thickness mm. ( In
case Of CCS)
Colour: Top:
Finish: Gloss / Semi Gloss /
Matt; Top Paint Type: Primer, RMP; HDP, SMP,
PVDF;
Colour: Bottom:
Finish: Gloss / Semi Gloss
/ Matt; Paint Type: Primer, RMP; HDP/SDP,
SMP, PVDF; Bottom Type: Alkyd, Polyester.
RMP : Regular Modified Paint
HDP/SDP: High Durable Polyester; Super
Durable Polyester;
SMP: Silicon Modified Paint
PVDF: Poly Vinyl Di Fluoride
Top/Bottom: For a new shade development QA
approval is required. Accordingly new code
shall be given by QA dept. and entry is done.
Guard film - (yes/No) in case of CCL.
In case Of CRM/CCS/CGL Project :- In case of

project Other than customer details sales order
should be booked with following details regarding
material :
Product Type: Corrugated, Profile, Accessories
In case of Accessories: Form (Ridge, Louver,

Corner, Flashing, Barge Board, North Light
Curve, Apron)
Material Grade
End Application ( Roofing/ Cladding)

Page 70 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Temper: Medium, Hard.

Zinc Coating: Grams per Square Metre. (120,
150, 180, 220, 275)
Base Metal thickness mm: (With Tolerance
desired) This is optional field
Size mm : Thickness x width x length (length
not asked for coil form)
Tolerances in thickness, width, length
should not accept the out of range value which
is defined in the Grade.
Specific Weight - Maximum (by this system
should calculate the maximum coil weight)
All the chemical and mechanical properties
In addition to above following characteristics

should be considered in CCS :
Colour: Top:
Finish: Gloss / Semi Gloss /
Matt; Top Paint Type: Primer, RMP; HDP, SMP,
PVDF;
Colour: Bottom:
Finish: Gloss / Semi Gloss
/ Matt; Paint Type: Primer, RMP; HDP/SDP,
SMP, PVDF; Bottom Type: Alkyd, Polyester.
RMP : Regular Modified Paint
HDP/SDP: High Durable Polyester; Super
Durable Polyester;
SMP: Silicon Modified Paint
PVDF: Poly Vinyl Di Fluoride
Top/Bottom: For a new shade development QA
approval is required. Accordingly new code
shall be given by QA dept. and entry is done.
Guard film - (yes/No) in case of CCL.

For any order system should allow the copying of
values of characteristics from one item to no. of
other items with provisions for change.
Planning for paints and guard films to take place
Page 71 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
through reorder point planning.
1.
2.
1.
6.1.8.4
Availability
Check &
Delivery Date
Determination
System should give delivery date for the

material entered against the customer
requirement dates.
2. System should confirm the customer requested
delivery date taking into consideration the
capacity planning system.
3. Depending upon the transaction the system
should also reserve the quantity in MRP.
4. If expected delivery date is not fulfilled, it should
be reviewed periodically.
3.
4.
6.1.8.5
Terms &
Conditions
1.
Delivery terms should be defaulted from the

Customer Master
2. Payment Terms should be defaulted from the
Customer Master
3. Letter of Credit / Bank Guarantee with LC Usage:
a) If the payment term is against Letter of Credit
then only system should ask for / allow to
1.
2.
3.
Customer required delivery dates and

delivery quantities are captured as schedule
lines per item in the documents like enquiry,
quotation, sales order etc. The requirements
are automatically transferred from the
schedule line to MRP. An availability check is
conducted by the system once the
requirements are transferred.
Availability Check shall be done wherein the
system determines if the delivery shall be
made on the requested delivery date by
checking the planned the inwards and
outward movement of the goods with or
without the replenishment lead time. In case
it cannot confirm availability based on the
(A)
above, it confirms a date based on the
4 (C)
capacity planning.
Depending upon the transaction, the system
should reserve the quantity in MRP so that
no other schedule line can access that
quantity. For example, if the transaction is an
enquiry, only the requirements are to be
passed on for availability check but no
reservation is to take place because
customer has not yet confirmed his
willingness to buy the material. In case of a
sales order when customer has already
placed his PO, then reservations should take
place.
Report shall be generated for revised delivery
date against particular orders.
Information stored in the Shipping view of
(A / C)
Sales Data in customer master shall be
As of now, System
defaulted.
supports allocation
Payment Terms stored in the Accounting
of LC per line item
view of Company Code Data shall be
in the Sales Order
defaulted from the Customer Master.
Letter of Credit Usage:
Page 72 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT

a.
select the LC numbers.

b) The system should only allow selecting the LC
master numbers rather than manually
entering, and while selecting, the system
should list out all the LC master numbers.
c) Provision should be made to link number of
internally generated LC Master Numbers. If a
material item is of 100mt and a earlier LC
balance is for only 20mt and a fresh LC is
master is created in which 500mt shall be
despatched. So both the LC masters should be
able to link to that same material item and for
the first 20mt despatches the system should
use the first LC number.
d) In case two LCs exist for the same item, then
two different invoices should be created.
e) If the value of a single coil is more than the LC
available value then it should use the next LC
as per the access sequence, or if subsequent
LC is not available then the system should not
allow creating the delivery/invoice.
f) If the LC specifies a debit note for the interest
period as per the LD clause, the same should
be incorporated in the LC master. LC value
available for despatch = Actual LC value
Debit note value for interest amount.
g) Bank Guarantee should also be maintained as
a LC.
h) Blocked deliveries to be shown in delivery due
list.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
6.1.8.6
Pricing, Taxes
& Discounts
1.
Basic Price (this price should be picked up from 1.

the Price List Master and manual changes shall
be done here, period wise reports should be
made available for deviation of actual price with
the price list price)
Gaps/Comments
If payment terms refer to LC, then the

system shall show in the incompletion
log to enter the LC number (Financial
document) in Sales Order. If the LC
number is not entered by the user then
depending on the status group, the
system will not allow further processing
of the sales order.
LCs shall be selected out of a list for
allocation to an item of sales order or it
can allocate at the header level i.e. for
the whole sales order.
If one LC is not sufficient to cover an
item, then the item shall be manually
split into more items depending on the
LCs available.
First the items are to be split manually in
the sales order so that LC nos can be
allocated to each (since it is not possible
to allocate two LC nos to the same item
in the sales order so the item should be
split). Accordingly billing split will take
place.
When the order value is more than LC
value allocated to it, then the system
shall not allow further processing of the
order.
The squaring off interest burden on
account of late delivery is not available
as a standard functionality.
Bank guarantee shall be maintained as a
financial document in payment
guarantee.
The possibility to show Blocked deliveries
in delivery due list shall be possible.

Basic Price which is the selling price for a
particular material excluding discount, taxes,
freight etc shall be maintained as a condition
type and shall be picked up from the value
assigned to the condition type for that
1-4 , 6 (A)
7 & 8 (C & H).
Work flow is out of
scope.
Page 73 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
2.
Excise (Excise should be applicable to all items in

pricing for all the sales other than CT2 sales.)
3. Sales Tax (full Provision should be made for the
applicability of the sales tax including all types of
sales tax forms.)
4. Freight (this should be made mandatory for
delivery terms as Pre Paid, and should be
suppressed if To Pay). The freight should be
picked up from the freight master.
2.
5. All types of discounts which are defined in
Discounts / Rebates should not allow blank fields
as per the type of sales and by default system
3.
should ask the value and system should accept
zero value. For the types of discounts as per the
type of sales order like,
TOD / QD for all NCO sales
Other discounts
Freight Rebate.
6. There should be a means for calculating the Net
Sales Realisation which is achieved by selling
price less of all discounts, rebates, taxes and
freight and commission. The net sales realisation
should not fall below the minimum floor price
decided by CMO, otherwise approval from
competent authority is required.
7. Provision should be there to give discount to part
quantity of the same material in the sales order.
Price confirmation & approval ( Kalmeshwar )
Price confirmation PCM is issued to all branches/
Depots and consignment agents by CMO for every
beginning of the month. This PCM is for billing
purpose. Discounts to be given (quality, quantity,
and cash, special) are mentioned in the PCM.
Discounts given to be customer specific. Billing
prices & discount should not be lower than the PCM
prices.
PCM includes :
PCM No.
Gaps/Comments
material. Values shall be maintained for even

customer-material combination. In case of
changes in the rates of taxes and duties for
open sales orders, the system shall allow new
pricing to be carried out. Report of open orders
shall be available using ABAP functionality
where an item may be closed by assigning a
reason for rejection.
For Sale from factory, Excise for a material is
picked up from the value assigned to the
chapter-id to which the material is assigned.
Tax codes and tax jurisdiction codes(created
and entered in the customer master record)
created for a particular country determines the
amount of sales tax (local or central). The tax
jurisdiction code is integrated with FI to give
the levels of taxes- whether two levels, that is
central and local or more levels are required.
The FI tax code will be used which will be
created for a particular country and tax
jurisdiction code. This is done as follows:
a. If the Region of Sending Plant & Region of
Ship to Party (Region in Customer
Master) is same, then Local Sales Tax is
applicable. The value is picked up from
the Local Sales tax condition type, which
is assigned a value for that combination
of Region of Sending Plant & region of
Ship-to-Party.
b. If the Region of Sending Plant & Region of
Ship to Party (Region in Customer
Master) is different, then Central Sales
Tax is applicable. The value is picked up
from the Central Sales tax condition
type, which is assigned a value for that
combination of Region of Sending Plant &
region of Ship-to-Party.
c. Also, if the customer produces a Sales tax
concession Form then the Sales Tax shall
be calculated as per the form(e.g. C
Form).
Page 74 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Month:
Sr. No.
Price Ex-Depot for Galvanized Plain-Coils
(Annealed /Hard) & Galvanized corrugated sheets.
Prices mentioned are Ex-Depot inclusive of Excise
Duty, Freight and sales Tax (Local billing). Price is
net of cash discount. Other local levies (Octroi
charges) are charged extra.
For Sheet/Packets Rs.XYZ/-is charged extra on
above prices.
Vice versa if Sheet Price are given then; for Coils
Rs.XYZ/- is less than PCM.
Quality Discount for Grade ; P2, S1, S2 and D
Special Cash discount if any.
Quantity discount mentioned for different slabs.
CCS Pricing
In OEM / OAU and project sector normally price is
fixed for monthly basis and is revised periodically
looking to the fluctuation risen international
market of basic steel i.e. HR, CR & CCS.
There are many cases when pricing approval is
required e.g. Special pricing approval is required for
the lot of material which is slow moving and laying
at depot .In this case approval is taken from CMO for
that material mentioning packet number, weight of
the packet, number of days it has been lying at
depot.
Open sales order shall be created for this material
which may be on the name of customer or dummy
customer and same should be forwarded to higher
authority for pricing approval till that time that a
sales order should be in block state and no delivery
should be created for the same till the approval is
received from higher authority. Packet No. shall be
picked from the stock and price (for which approval
is required) is filled against each packet. It does not
affect the sale of other material (Other than the
4.
Freight Value shall be calculated out as per

the Incoterms maintained in the Customer
Master, which are defaulted into the Sales
Order.
5.
Disallowance of Blank fields for

Discounts/Rebates Condition Types shall be
covered by marking the subject condition
types as mandatory so that if values are not
maintained then system would give an error.
Condition types shall be maintained for each
of the types of discounts so that the system
automatically proposes the discounts in the
sales order with provisions for manual
changes. These discounts will be copied onto
the billing document by selecting the
appropriate pricing type indicator in the copy
control rules at the item level.
In the pricing screen the system shall
calculate the Net Sales Realisation by
subtracting all discounts, rebates, taxes,
freight etc from the base price. Also
Minimum Floor Price shall be maintained in
the system which should be subtracted from
the NSR. If the result is negative, workflow
shall be sent to competent authority for
approval.
Pricing approval format shall be developed
using ABAP functionality and same shall be
sent for approval using work flow. Or Sales
order with dummy customer and required
prices of a material (for which approval is
asked) shall be created and sent for approval
through Sap mail. Till the time approval for
the price asked is not given SO shall be
blocked and released by competent authority
after approval. Sales Order will not have last
reference price of customer. Alternatively
price approval document shall be created in
desired format (with created SA/SO number,
6.
7.
8.
Gaps/Comments
Page 75 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
special lot for which price approval is sought), which

goes as per the latest price confirmation .
System should also reflect the delay in execution of
order because of approval.
Price approval is also taken if special prices are
required; which is customer specific (new / existing)
or segment wise i.e. OEM, OAU, and Projects etc.
Price approval format is as follows :
Price approval format CRM/CGL/CCS ( OEM

/Trade/Projects):
Gaps/Comments
Customer Name, last reference price, list

price, payment terms) and same shall be
sent for approval through SAP mail.
9.
BDC shall be created to upload revised prices

In the price list.
It shall be possible to give discount to part

quantity of the same material.
Price confirmation / Price List A combination to
be defined based on characteristics and price
matrix for stock transfer and billing to customer,
shall be incorporated in the system.
Branch:
Branch In charge:
Price approval Note ref: IIL/Br.Name/Sr.No
Date: System date & time
Depot closing stock Qty: To be picked from system
( in case of product base approval)
Requested approval Quantity: (in case of product
base approval).
Sizes: To be from Quotation/ Depot Stock ( In case
OEM/OAU/Projects)
Grades: To be picked from quotation/Depot stock( In
case OEM/OAU/Projects)
Total Qty (Mt): ( In case OEM/OAU/Projects)
Product type: Sheet / Coil
Colour: ( in Case of CCS)
Colour Type: ( in Case of CCS)
Type of price approval: Discount / Price Reduction
Discount:
Quantity Discount: Rs.
/-PMT on
MT;
Rs.
/-PMT on
MT
Cash Discount: Rs.
/- PMT for
days payment;
Rs.
/- PMT for
days payment.
Width: Rs.
/- PMT on
mm; Rs.
/-PMT on
Page 76 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
mm
Special Discount: Rs. /- PMT Remarks:
Price Reduction:
Thk: Annealed/Hard Coil/Sheet/GC Current
PCM**
Price asked Difference
Reason for Price approval:
Market Scenario:
Remarks:
If all material characteristics of the ordered

material is same as previously supplied material
then last price is the key factor for deciding price
of any existing regular customer. If a material
characteristic varies then also last ordered price
should consider as base for calculating/flashing
new price.
If the Purchase order price is lower than list
price then price approval is required or
Purchase order price is equal to or more than
list price and less than last reference price then
also price approval is required.
If quality parameters for new work order is
different than last price of customer than last
price is referred as index to fix extra/reduction
cost for new order.
Price approval note can be sent to CMO by branch

head only. CMO is the only authorisation for price
approval. After review of price approval note sent by
Branch and subsequent discussion (if required), CMO
may approve the price note as it is and approval is
given to respective branch. Accordingly branch can
confirm terms and prices to customer.
Or else CMO can amend the rebate. Amended prices
and payment terms are reflected in the approval
note and accordingly informed to customer.
Page 77 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Or else Price approval Note can be kept in pending

mode, not accepted (rejected).
Whole process should be online, i.e. branch/depot
must get online feedback regarding release of
order/approval or not. After receipt of orders, while
making work order, this price approval note has to
be referred in work order. Without this CMO cant
release work order to PPIC and shall be kept as
pending (In case price is lower than listed price).
If the person who is going to get approval from
higher level is not present then it will go to one step
upper level so that delay can be avoided. When CMO
gives it the clearance then automatically work order
number is generated and summary is maintained
month wise. In case of LC payment terms the OA
should be faxed or email to the customer. In case of
Job work order the work order number should be
such that it clearly indicates that this is a job work
order. All commercial & technical terms should be
clear in purchase order. The work order should
appear on the Invoice number.
Price confirmation / Price List A combination to be
defined based on characteristics and price matrix for
stock transfer and billing to customer.
6.1.8.7
Credit Check
1.
2.
For all the scheduling agreements and sales

orders which are having payment terms other
than Letter of Credit / LC awaited credit check
should be done by the system, this check should
be carried out while saving and if the credit
check is cleared then only the system should
save the document, other wise it should park the
document, which means the system should not
allow to produce the material and despatches
against the document and this should be
eliminated using the higher authority.
When the customer account is credited then the
1.
2.
3.
While Sales Order is being created, the

system shall calculate the total credit
exposure and percentage of credit limit used.
If the payment terms are LC or LC awaited
the credit check shall not be done.
Otherwise, if the exposure is more than that
of the credit limit of the customer, then the
sales order shall be blocked. The
requirements will be passe3d on to the MRP
from the schedule lines but no reservations
will take place, so that material cannot be
produced against the order. Delivery can also
(A)
Page 78 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
3.
4.
system should release the document

automatically provided it clears the credit limit
check.
The parked documents (for documents for which
credit limit check is failed) shall be released
manually.
This authorisation should be given to the user id
of the key person, from whose login in only this
shall be released.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Once the order is booked in the system, following

follow-up actions should happen immediately:
1.
6.1.8.8
Follow-up
Actions
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.1.8.9
Scheduling
Agreement /
Sales Order
Amendment
An Order Acceptance to the customer as an

acceptance of the customers order for supplying
the material this can take place only after
confirmation from PPIC.
A Work Order to PP / Plant to produce the
material.
A Delivery Order to Logistics to deliver the
material to customer.
A Proforma Invoice to customer to make the
payments against the Proforma.
Order Acceptance is sent to party/customer for
opening of LC.
Scheduling Agreement should be changed or

amended with required changes.
Gaps/Comments
be blocked for such sales orders. The credit

limit will be maintained for all the company
codes, i.e. centralised credit management
will be used where all company codes are to
be assigned to one credit control area.
No requirements shall be transferred to
Production.
A program to remove delivery blocks in a
sales order shall be scheduled periodically so
that the blocks are removed when customer
account is credited.
Also, if required, authorised persons shall
release the delivery blocks.
In case of Service Orders / Order based
Billing, Billing blocks shall be provided.
The SAP R/3 system does the following activities

automatically on processing the Sales Order:
1. A Requirement is created in the system for
Production, if the material is not in stock.
2. If the material is in stock, then a reservation
is made for that material in MRP.
3. The system automatically proposes the
material availability date for each schedule
line.
4. Transmitting Order Acceptance / Proforma
Invoice to Customer shall be done by emailing / Printing etc
A button shall be provided in the scheduling

agreement by which the user can directly copy
the scheduling agreements data into a sales
order.
(A)
( A)
Scheduling agreement with the material

specifications should be able to amend at any time
even after releasing the Production Order and the
Production planning.
The system should allow determining the position of
Page 79 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
opening orders for a month through generation of

reports. The reports should be available retroactively
also.
In case material is produced above the required qty
and the excess qty crosses the over delivery
tolerance, the system should allow amending the
ordered qty accordingly. Alternatively, if the ordered
qty is not to be increased, a new order may be
created to accommodate the excess qty.
Sales Order
6.1.8.10
Deletion
6.1.8.11 Order
Cancellation
The Sales order can be cancelled because of
Party doesnt want the material (requirement

diverted).
In case of Project orders Project is

cancelled on which party has released the
purchase order.
Delay in delivery from Ispat side.
Deletion of an item in sales order or whole of the

sales order without subsequent reference
(A)
documents shall be available in the standard
system.
Provision of order cancellation at various stages
of order processing is available in SAP.
(A)
1.
2.
sales / work order cancellation provision to be given

at various order processing stages like:
3.
4.
Receipt of P.O If advance is deposited then it

will return back to the customer and close the
transaction.
Raw material planning: - Inform PPIC not to
produce the material. In case of Job work if raw
material procurement is in transit then it can be
returned back to the supplier. Alternatively
material if produced use for other customer by
informing marketing to book this type of order.
Issuance of work order: - Check whether the
material is manufactured or not. If it is not
manufactured then immediately inform to PPIC
not to produce the material. If it is manufactured
then search for another customer or work order
or divert the material.
Before Delivery.(Order shall be cancelled

directly in SAP).
Before Billing and after Excise invoice
creation/ Utilization.( cancel the excise
invoice and delivery, then SAP will allow to
cancel the order).
Before Billing.(cancel the delivery, then SAP
will allow to cancel the order).
After Billing. (cancel the billing, excise
invoice, delivery documents and then SAP
will allow to cancel the Order).
Page 80 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Raw material production: - stop further

production & divert the material to other party.
The material is transferred to Depot & then
customer has cancelled the order: - Then search
for the other alternative customer.
Provision for Order cancellation at the following

stages of Order processing & Execution should be
available in the SAP R/3 system:
Scheduling agreement / sales order should be closed
by selecting the reason for closing the order in the
system. After the validity period the system should
treat all the open documents as closed and system
should assign the reason as validity is expired.
Some material items and / or full scheduling
agreement / sales order should be able to close.
1. Before Delivery
2. Before Billing and After Excise Invoice Creation /
Utilization
3. Before Billing
4. Before Billing and After Excise Invoice Creation /
Utilization
5. After Billing
6.1.8.12 Back Order
Processing
On the last day / first day of each month the Pending

Work Order Detail report should be executed in SAP
system. From that report the Scheduling
Agreements which are to be carried forward (to be
supplied in the next month) to the next month or
cancelled are decided.
Then the orders that are decided to be cancelled
should be closed in SAP using the following reason
for closing and this flag should be given to each
material in a scheduling agreement or to the full
scheduling agreement.
Not to be carried
over to next month.
By giving this flag system should not allow further
Back orders are the order whose order materials ( A)

cannot be confirmed due to unavailability or
material shortages.
List of the sales order for back order processing
shall be done using Sap standard Functionality.
System provides the list of the relevant
information for each corresponding sales
document (for example, the first delivery date,
order quantity, confirmed quantity, and open
quantity) on the basis given selection criteria.
Back Order processing shall be done by selecting
a material and sales order and then choose Edit
Backorders.
After ATP and MRP system process the order and
confirms the new scheduling date.
Page 81 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
production and allocation against this particular
material / scheduling agreement and material
already allocated should not get de allocated. The
system should copy the flag into the corresponding
sales order and the already allocated material can be
delivered and system should not allow any further
deliveries.
If some quantity has to be reduced and some
quantity to be carried over to the next month, then
the reduction quantity should be given and system
should reduce the ordered material quantity to that
extent and the reason for reduction should be given.
If a sales order is already issued then the same
should be updated by the system.
Gaps/Comments
A report will be generated on certain dates of a

month showing open order positions. Decision
will be taken on the basis of the report as to
which scheduling agreements are to be serviced
and which are to be cancelled.
6.1.9 Delivery
Despatch Plan
1.
Despatch plan should be prepared on the basis of

availability of material, Sales order schedule
lines, availability of transporters, and To-Pay,
Pre-Paid basis to the transporters. And the
same should be available while preparing gate
entry. The same should be plant wise, material
wise, state wise, and zone wise and transporter
wise.
2.
The expected material quantities from production

planning should be informed to customer and
transporter. Despatch plan should be informed to
Transporters and customers. If the material is
confirmed by production/QA for dispatch then
dispatch plan for the despatch able material
should passed on to transporters through e-mail,
fax etc.
6.1.9.1
3.
Weight/quantity allocation for available

transporters in the sales order should be
provided.
4.
Weight/quantity allocation against customer for
1.
Delivery scheduling and transportation

scheduling shall be done by which the
system using backward / forward scheduling
will determine the pick/pack date, loading
date, transportation scheduling date, goods
issue date, delivery date for each schedule
line of the sales order.
2.
The delivery scheduling and transportation

scheduling shall be informed to customers &
transporter with the help of output
determination.
3.
Allocation of quantity to the transporter shall

not be possible because for one sales order
there might be more than one transporter,
one transporter may lift more than one sales
orders material. One truck may lift more
than one sales order materials and more
than one type of material. In the same time
we can not control the logistics activities on
the base of allotted weight to transporter,
since material Weighment varies and it can
(C)
Page 82 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
available transporters should be maintained and
controlled at the time of gate entry.
5. A provision should be there to despatch priority
material maintained by marketing or PPC and
same should be displayed in despatch plan.
6. Actual despatch against plan should be mailed to
each customer and transporter at the end of the
day. This should be done automatically. Manual
selection of customer and transporter should be
provided
7. The production plan should be also be displayed
at the given time, so that the planning for
dispatches and transport can be planned
accordingly.
8. In case of SIP and IMIL product, dispatch
planning is subjected to material clearance from
plant control or production department, so while
taking production in SAP it should be taken for
reserve category and after confirming to HSM,
part of this production should be transfer to
unrestricted use for the dispatch purpose.The
despatch able (saleable to external customers)
quantities of SIP and IMIL products to be viewed
in stock separately from total stock.
9. Zone wise performance report in terms of
quantity should be made available for
transporter and customer separately with
reference to above dispatch planning report. This
may be circulated to every customer and
transporter every day.( plan v/s actual despatch
should be circulated to for each customer and
transporter at the end of every day
automatically- with provision to select specific
transporter and customer)
6.1.9.2
Gate Entry of
Empty Vehicle
1.
Details of all commercial vehicles coming

into the premises for transportation of material
should be recorded in the SAP R/3 system.
Gaps/Comments
not be fixed.
4.
Component shall be developed to map this

functionality through ABAP/4.
5.
Dispatch priority for a material shall be

maintained at the sales order text and same
shall be displayed / printed in the despatch
plan.
6.
Customer / transport wise despatch against

actual plan should be prepared using ABAP
functionality and same shall be mailed/
faxed to selected customer through output
determination.
Production plan given in the form of report
for all or particular sales order for specific or
all materials trough ABAP report.
A Report Shall be generated through ABAP
functionality.
A report shall be generated for planned and
actual despatch for each transporter and
mail or fax to selected transporters
/customers through output determination.
7.
8.
9.
1.
Vehicle Entry into ISPAT premises shall

be managed on SAP by Gate Entry & Gate
( C)
Out developed through ABAP functionality. (5 )e, f (G)
Page 83 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Provision for entering the Sales Order

Number (against which the material is being
loaded into the vehicle), Transporters name and
the vehicle number should be made available in
the system.
If the customer having specific requirement on
the base of unloading capacity (Ex: 5 Mt or 10
Mt) same should be maintained in the sales
order and controlled at gate entry and final wt.
While making gate entry along with the sales
order number and available transporters system
should popup with available materials, balance
Qty, sold to party name, ship to party and allow
user to select the same.
Empty vehicles reporting date and list should

be maintained
Blacklist vehicles data should be maintained
and controlled through system.
While making gate entry following points should
be covered :
a. Different gate entry number ranges for

different plants should be provided.
b. Vehicle number should in alphanumeric

with no special characters like */-\|,
c. LR number should be maintained at gate

entry for sales returns and same should be
used for material receipt conformation.
d. System should not allow gate entry for
blocked/ hold orders.
e. Repeated vehicles Weighment should be
monitored and controlled. System should
pop up message if tare weight of vehicle
exceeds 300kgs than any of earlier tare
weight for same vehicle.
f. There should be some provision to upload
data in SAP, in case data is maintained in
legacy system during power cuts &
network failure.

2.
3.
4.
Gaps/Comments
Sales Order Number, Vehicle No. and

Transporter name shall be enter while
making gate entry for a vehicle and same
shall be use to print as a Gate Pass using
ABAP script and a copy shall be given to the
Transporter.
Customer specific requirement for specific
capacity vehicle shall be maintained in item
text of sales order and same shall be
displayed as a report.
Gate entry system will allow user to select
Available Sales orders, Transporters,
Materials, Ship to party.
5.
6.
A separate table shall be prepared.

Blocked list vehicles data shall be
maintained through a different table.
7.
While making gate entry following

functionality shall be followed:
a. A separate number range shall be
maintained for gate entry at each
plant.
b. Through data validation, special
characters in vehicle number shall be
avoided.
c. L.R. Number shall be maintained in
Shipment in case of gate entry of sales
return material.
d. System shall not allow the gate entry
of blocked / hold orders, this shall be
handled through ABAP functionality.
e. Since the system performance get
effect to make this process for each
and every vehicle, mapping shall not
be possible. A report shall be prepared
to monitor the vehicles.
f. Sap standard functionality doesnt
allow uploading data from legacy
system- there should not be more than
one live system for one process.
g.
Deliverys shall be clubbed at the stage

Page 84 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
g. If multiple materials against multiple
deliverys are loaded in single vehicle then

system should provide net wt. for each
material.
h. System should also provide a facility to get
Weighment of any material without gate
entry and without reference to any sales
document.
i. Provision for Deletion and reweighment
before PGI
j. Loading point should be entered.
k. Coils should be selected.
l. If LR number is not available against the
selected Transporter and shipping point
then system should restrict for further
Transaction
m. If any gate entry is done against any sales
order / purchase order, any change in that
sales order should not be allowed to
marketing till preparation of invoice. (With
respect to logistics point of view).
6.
For any gate entry against pre paid
material, check should provided so that the
vehicle should not be allowed to gate in if not
having contract of that particular transporter
against the customer mentioned in SO. Also
system should also inform the marketing for non
availability of transport agreement in system.
6.1.9.3
Empty Vehicle
Weighment
Tare weight of empty truck is taken at the weigh

bridge and should get capture in the system and also
time should get capture in the system. Hard copy of
tare wt. slip is taken out and handed over to the
Transporter.
1.
System should popup a message if the
vehicle reaches to weighbridge after 15 minutes
(can be variable) from gate entry.(Not for HR
coils)
2. There should be Provision for entering
Weighbridge number at weighbridge.
6.
of shipment multiple deliverys,

multiple Weighment, total Weighment
can be displayed.
h. A Component shall be developed
through ABAP.
i. Capture and delete options shall be
provided
j. A separate field shall be provided for
storing loading point in the shipment.
k. Batches shall not determine at the time
of gate entry.
l. Trigger shall be developed for the
same.
m. Once the material produced against
sales order then automatically sales
order shall be blocked for changes and
deletion.
System will allow only those
transporters which were maintained the sales
order. In case of multiple sales orders system
shall determine the common transporters.
Checking of Transporter Condition records
while gate entry shall not be possible.
(C/G)
The tare weight of the vehicle is recorded and a
Weighment Note is issued to the Vehicle Driver.
This shall be handled using ABAP/4 development.
1. System shall pop up message at the time of
gate out, if vehicle reached to weighbridge
after allowed time. This shall be handle
trough ABAP functionality.
2. Separate field for weighbridge number shall
be incorporated through ABAP in shipping
screen.
Page 85 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
3.
4.
5.
6.1.9.4
Delivery Order
Creation &
Picking
Two Gross and Tare weighment provision should

be provided.
Before making delivery for any product except
mill coil and wider slit coil, it must be ensure
(lock) that tare weight is performed against that
vehicle.
As one vehicle is reporting more than one time in
a shift (and the net weight is only the reference
weight for drafting), Provision should be there to
make tare weight only once in a shift for
particular vehicle to avoid more movement of
vehicles at weigh bridge.
Load carrying capacity of the vehicle should be

checked before making the Delivery. Ideally, if the
load carrying capacity of the vehicle is less than the
weight of the material for which Delivery is being
prepared, then the system should issue a Warning
message.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
During the creation of delivery order, the following

activities are to be performed:
Picking: Coil No. to be despatched against a

particular order are to be chosen during
delivery creation. D.O. can also be created
packet/coil wise.
Packing: This is a part of the production
process and not done as part of delivery.
Issue:
In S.O maximum four transporters are allowed but
practically more than four transporters can do a
delivery for a single sales order. In this condition
frequent changes are done for transporter code in
Sales Order as per vehicle reporting which should be
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Gaps/Comments
Addition fields should be incorporated in the

shipment files to store Gross, Tare
weighments and net weighment.
Tare weighment is not a mandatory for all
vehicles. But if vehicle goes without tare
weighment (other than mill coil and wider slit
coil), so tare weight field shall be blank and
no delivery shall be performed.
Weighbridge software is a interface to SAP
which shall not allow for taking second
Weighment without first Weighment.
Delivery is created with reference to the

Sales Order.
In case of Make to Order scenario, the stock
is already allocated and appears in the
delivery when it is being created.
In case of Make to Stock, the person who is
allocating the stock shall use batch search
strategy to find the materials, which batch
the customer specifications and chose them
for Picking.
If the transporter in the Sales Order which
defaults into the delivery and the transporter
in the Gate Pass is different, then provision
to change the transporter shall be made
available.
During Delivery, all items, which are due for
delivery in the Sales Order, are defaulted.
After the delivery is made, it shall be printed
and given to the Driver of the vehicle.
The delivery note contains material
specifications, partner details, gate entry
number etc.
Picking is the first stage in delivery where
1-5 , 8,d - (A)

6,7,a-c,e-h - ( C )
Page 86 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
eliminated. In this case if the material is distributed

to all transporter in any proportion, then it is very
difficult to make a trace of dispatches against each
transporter for distributed quantity.
a ) Vehicle should reach logistics within 20 minutes
(variable) after gate entry (time) for HR coil
otherwise system should ask for reason.
b ) Only gate entry number/ shipment number with
sales order No. should be supplied for creating
delivery
c ) Truck number, transporter, net weight, container
No, Container seal should appear while creating
delivery.
d ) Provision should be there to create delivery
against more than one sales order
e ) Modification of SO number, Truck number,
Transporter should be provided till gate out.(in
shipment).
f ) Different number ranges for delivery should be
maintained on the base of plant
g ) Road permit data should be maintained for
individual customers. If permits not available
System should pope up the message Road
permits Required / not available at gate entry
level and Delivery level
h ) Container despatches, container number and
seal number should be maintained in delivery
while picking and should appear in invoice
document.
i ) Loading Points and Loading point capacity should
be maintained. On the base of loading point
capacity vehicles inwards should be controlled.
6.1.9.5
Loading
6.1.9.6
Final
Different types of material are loaded at different

places hence all the loading points have to be
identified in the system.
Before Issuing the goods for Billing, the vehicle is
Gaps/Comments
the material is staged in right quality and

quantity and made ready for delivery. This
can be done during delivery creation in the
picking screen by choosing the coil numbers
against delivery. The storage location is the
picking location.
Issue:
This issue can be addressed by using the
Shipping function of Logistics Execution.
a ) One trigger shall be prepared in ABAP at
the time of Gate out.
b ) Separate screen shall be prepared
through ABAP. Delivery shall be created
through standard Tr. VL01N. And the
same delivery number shall be attached
to shipment/Gate entry number.
c ) Standard screen shall be modified with
shipment number, Truck number, Gate
entry number
d ) Through standard transaction (VL10)
e ) Shipment shall be changed any time. But
controlling is Issue.
f)
Different number ranges shall be
maintained.
g ) Separate table shall be provided and the
functionality shall be mapped through
ABAP.
h ) Container number and container owned
by shall be stored in gate entry screen
and seal shall be stored in item text of
delivery.
i ) Same shall be done through ABAP
functionality.
All loading points shall be maintained and used

at the point of loading in delivery. The loading
points are assigned to shipping points..
The Final weight of the vehicle (Gross Weight) is
( A)
ABAP Development
Page 87 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
again weighed.
6.1.9.7
Weighment
Final weighment should be captured by the system.
Post Goods
Issue
If there is a difference in the weight which is

mentioned in the delivery and the actual weight, then
manual adjustments of weight have to be made in
the stock.
Before billing posting of goods issue should be done,
which will update the stock.
recorded and a Weighment Note is issued to the

Vehicle Driver. This shall be accomplished by
ABAP/4 development.
1.
2.
I. Time between creation of delivery and PGI for

HR coils should not be more than 40 minutes if
so reason should be maintained.
II. From invoice time to gate out time should be
with in 20 minutes other wise system should ask
for reason.
III.
If HR coil is silted and during actual weighment it

has noticed that slit coil weight is different from
system wt. (it is not as per the actual wt.), then
the difference of weight should be updated
against other secondary by-product of the same
coil to match the mill coil weight with its byproduct weight.( weight tally ).
IV. Delivery performance (scheduled delivery date

and actual delivery date) details should be made
available in the system.
V. Entering of Loading point and Loading person

number should be made available in the
system.
3.
When the goods live the shipping point

function of the shipping dept is considered to
be completed. If the weights mentioned in
the delivery and those from the weighbridge
match then PGI shall be executed.
If there are differences, then either we have
to carry out picking again for the entire
weight or we have to reduce the delivery
weight to match the picked weight. This can
be ensured by assigning a confirmation
requirement to the shipping point. In case of
under delivery or over delivery tolerances
specified in the material master record or
customer-material info record, the same
shall be considered by the system.
The system will update the following records
during PGI :
The stock quantities and the

stock values will be updated ;
the requirement of the customer will no

longer be a part of the Stock
Requirement List(MD04);
When goods issue is posted, stock values

are updated automatically in financial
accounting in the stock account and the
stock changes account.
The valuation of the material and the

changes in the inventory value which
result from goods issue posting are
-(C)
1,2 (A)
I,II&IV ( C )
III- Change of Wt is
not possible. ( G )
Page 88 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
described in the MM Valuation

documentation;
When goods issue is posted, the system

automatically updates the goods issue
status in all sales and distribution
documents accordingly.
As soon as goods issue is posted, the

delivery is included in the work list for
billing and can be invoiced.
I. Trigger should be developed through ABAP

II. Trigger should be developed through ABAP
and data shall be updated at the time of gate
out
III. Change of Wt is not possible.
IV. Report shall be generated on the basis on
scheduled delivery date and actual delivery
date.
V. Entering of Loading point provision shall be
given at the time of gate entry, loading
person name shall be entered in delivery
text.
6.1.10 Billing
6.1.10.1 Excise Invoice
Generation /
Selection
1.
Excise invoice shall be generated

automatically or manually after generation of
billing document.
To generate excise invoice billing type is
assign to delivery type.
Or can be generated manually using J1II
Transaction (with reference to billing.)
(A)
Page 89 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT

2.
RG1 register (A Finish Good stock Register)

shall get updated after PGI and RT12
(Monthly Return Register) shall get updated
after generation & posting of excise invoice.
3.
Excise invoice is printed with the help

of output determination corresponds to the
no. of pre-printed stationary.
4.
Following account entries shall be

passed :
Gaps/Comments
Excise Duty paid account Dr

Excise duty payable account Cr
6.1.10.2 Commercial
Invoice
Creation Billing
Road Permit Forms 31 to be integrated with Billing on

SAP.
1.
2.
I. Different LR number ranges for all plants should

be maintained with respect to Transporter LR
Details.
II. Provision for Cancel the invoice should be
provided. After cancellation of invoice, cancelled
invoice LR number should make use for next
vehicle.
III. Freight should be derived on the base of
Transporter, Customer, Destination/Unloading
point, type of material, material, Qty.
3.
4.
I.
IV. In case of material despatched through barges it

should be possible that instead of generating II.
single invoice for each vehicle, single invoice
should be prepared for complete barge quantity
by referring draft quantity with total weight III.
quantity , so provision must be there to get the
total W.B.quanity and Barge Drafting Survey
IV.
and invoice can be prepared.
V. Report should be available for total weight of
vehicles and drafting quantity.
V.
Billing shall be created using the standard

SAP functionality.
Invoicing shall correspond to the numbers of
the pre-printed stationary where ever
required.
Customer Account gets debited and sales
revenue accounts, Sales Tax Recovered from
customer A/C get credited.
Following documents shall be printed from
the SAP R/3 system:
Invoice to Customer
Lorry Receipt
Test Certificate
Separate application shall be developed for
maintaining LR details.
Invoice shall be cancelled using Standard
SAP functionality. Automatic updating of LR
table shall be done through ABAP.
A condition technique and condition records
shall be maintained on the base of transport
contract.
Invoice shall be generated through standard
transaction VF01
Report shall be developed on the base of
material documents and header text details
1-3 - ( A )
4(C)
Integration of
Road Permits at a
broad level
requires an
application to be
developed in
ABAP/4.
(Bar Code
Labelling is out of
scope) (H)
(A / C)
Page 90 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
VI. Billing wise and orderwise profitability to be

automatically determined by the system.
6.1.10.3
Reversal of
Excise Invoice
The Excise invoice should be able to be reversed

without changing the billing document.

through ABAP.
VI. Bill wise and order wise profitability shall be
shown in the system using the condition type
VPRS in the pricing screen of the documents.
Sap standard functionality allow to cancel the
excise invoice without changing the billing
document
Through the Excise invoice J/V (transaction J1IH)
excise invoice shall be cancelled. This shall
reverse the Excise duty accounted for.
There should be a provision to cancel the excise

invoice, due to problems in Logistics, clerical
mistakes or on any circumstances.
Cancellation of
6.1.10.4
excise Invoice
1.
2.
3.
6.1.10.5 Gate out
4.
For Gate out, only vehicle number/shipment

number should be supplied.
Provision should be there to make out empty
vehicle and reason should be specified
If any vehicle passes through road weigh bridge,
then at the time of gate out all the invoices should
be tallied for total weight with net weight of weigh
bridge and if any discrepancy , vehicle should not
allowed to gate out (Tolerance should be allowed
for + / - 50kg against 10 MT).
Gap between Invoice preparation time and gateout time should be less that 15(Variable) minutes
other wise system should ask for reason
Gaps/Comments
1.
2.
3.
4.
Gate out screen with required fields shall be

done through ABAP.
Separate field for reason shall be incorporated
in shipment.
System displays when there is any difference
between net weighment and total invoice
weighment.
Implementing this functionality is possible
through ABAP.
(A)
(A)
( C)
6.1.11 Credit Management

Fixing Credit
6.1.11.1
Limit
Calculating
6.1.11.2 Credit
Exposure
6.1.11.3
Performing
Credit Check
The credit limit check should be done at sales order

level and delivery level.
Credit Limits shall be fixed and maintained in the

Customer Master in the Credit Control Date View.
Credit Exposure for a customer is calculated in
the following manner:
Value of Due and Over Due Payments + Value of
Billing Documents not released to Accounting +
Value of Unbilled deliveries + Value of open sales
orders + Value of Special GL Transactions
Credit Check shall be performed at the order level
or delivery level.
(A)
(A)
(A)
6.1.12 Customer Complaint Processing

Page 91 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
6.1.12.1 Receipt of
Customer
Complaint

suggested by CVS IT
Following types of Customer complaints should be
maintained in the Sap system:
1. Quality Problem
2. Shortages in Delivery
3. Excess in Delivery
4. Material Damage in Transit
5. Logistics Not as per PO terms
Complaint should be entered on the sold to party;
The liability and the credit should be given to the
payer of that invoice which is referenced to a
complaint.
Customer Code by referencing the packet
number /coil no / invoice no the system should
give the sold to party, payer and the ship to
party and the complaint should be registered
in the name of sold to party.
Division
Nature of complaint
Customer Group.
The validity of the complaint should be confirmed in
the SAP system by either after entering the coil
number or the invoice number and either of these
fields should be made mandatory. Once the coil
number or invoice number is fed then the system
should give the following details.
Packet number / Coil no / invoice details

(either of the one which has not been entered,
coil weight for HR products.
Truck no, price, delivery terms, transporter,

Internal quality inspection report.
Production date and date of despatch.

System should check the invoice / coil no/ packet
number details with the customer code which given
while creating the complaint document. If matching
then only should proceed other wise should give
error giving a message like this coil no / invoice no
is not pertaining to the said customer.
Gaps/Comments
Customer Complaints shall be recorded in the

(A)
system with the following reason codes:
QA Quality Problem
SD Shortage in Delivery
ED Excess in Delivery
DM Damaged Material
LO Logistical Issues
For a Quality Problem, the customer shall raise a
Quality Notification through Internet. If the
customer does not have access, the Marketing
Person shall create the Quality Notification with
reference to a sales document and with details of
the problem.
All other problems shall be sorted out though
Debit Note / Credit Note
Using transaction code MB5B the delivery
document no can be identified. From the invoice
no the user can find the batch nos. and coil no
along with the sold to party and other relevant
details.
Once the complaint is settled then for
commercial settlement, a credit memo request
may be created with reference to the original
invoice. With reference to the credit memo
request a credit memo shall be created.
To record the complaint and verify the same

against actual requirement of the customer in
case of various natures of complaints such as
short supplies, deviation in chemistry, deviation
in mechanical properties etc, a complaint
settlement document shall be created wherein
the user can enter the actual values of
parameters as reported by the customer against
the values derived in the company. The system
will verify the values reported by the customer
Page 92 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
The fields available for recording the complaint may
be based on the complaint.
Different types of complaints can be as under
Quantity Complaint
Quality Complaint
Commercial Complaint
Non-receipt of material.
Others (Logistics)
Gaps/Comments
against the actual values and give the

discrepancies.
Complaints types should be predefined in the system

so that sorting is possible as per that. The required
data entry fields should be given as per the type of
complaint. For DRI and Pig iron products following
are some of the complaint types.
Low Fe Metallization
Powder
Weight Shortage
For the above the system should ask for the
complaint quantity.
One coil / invoice may have more than one nature of
complaints.
The KAM & Customer services person responsible for
resolving the complaint should be defined in SAP at
the customer master level. One person may also be
nominated from the Quality Assurance department
by Quality Assurance for resolving the complaint and
the complaint attending persons should be selected
by QC chief and recorded in the complaint document.
After entering the complaint every complaint should
have a distinct identification number and sorting
should be possible based on any of the above
mentioned fields or a combination of any of the
above.
It may be decided by the individual key account
managers if a visit is required and there should be a
flag for indicating the same.
Multiple visits and multiple minutes of meeting
Page 93 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
should be captured. The MOM should be scanned.

File note, credit note and debit note to be generated
in the system.
1.
6.1.12.2
Quality
Notification
6.1.12.3 Complaint
Settlements
All quality complaints to be recorded and notified to

the Quality Department immediately
Immediately after saving the complaint document in
the SAP, the same should go to the Customer
services dept ID and to QA user id either by SAP mail
or to their lotus note id.
Nodal agency for registering and monitoring the
complaints shall be with Marketing CMO.
Provisions for settling the Complaints in the following

ways on the SAP R/3 system should be provided;
1. Free Deliveries
2. Credit Note
3. Debit Note
In SAP region wise following complaint settlement
time should be defined.
From complaint registration to visit
Visit to entering the settlement value and

quantity in the complaint document
Settlement entry to creating a file note

Region wise table of time to be specified
If the next process is not happening then a reminder
messages (how many, and is it every day / weekly)
should be sent to the Customer services & QS dept.
If no process is taken place after the last reminder,
then a message should be forwarded saying that a
complaint is pending for settlement of that customer
for so many days (system should calculate the days
from which is pending) with the latest status. If
visited a visit report should be created by referencing
2.
By web-enabling the SAP R/3 system, the

customers shall login using Internet
Transaction Server / Web Application Server
and create Quality Notification with reference
to the Sales Document. Or KAM should
create quality notification with reference to
sales order.
All details of the Problems in Quality shall be
entered here. Any other details of the
complaints shall be maintained in the
description text of subject view of
notification.
Customer Complaints shall be resolved on the

SAP R/3 system depending upon the situation in
the following ways:
The sales document in question shall be blocked
first. After Complaint Analysis, one of the
following shall be done:
Returns
Free Delivery
Subsequent Free Delivery

If the material cannot be returned then
commercial settlement shall be made.
1.
A workflow is required to fully implement the

customer complaint handling/settlement
cycle.
2.
Visit reports shall be maintained in SAP for

customer complaints using the sales activity
type sales call mentioning complaint
settlement as the reason. MOM and other
necessary details of the visit shall be
maintained in text fields in the sales activity.
(A)
(A)
1 (H)
Page 94 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
the complaint document.

In the complaint document provision should be made
to enter the compensation in terms of value and
quantity against which the complaint has been
accepted. Here provision should be done for
recording the comments of dept heads.
System should have the following status flags, which
are to be manually selected.
Visit required
Complaint is rejected
Customer has withdrawn the complaint
Material was not available for inspection

In the complaint document system should show the
following status of that complaint.
Visit is not done if visit required flag is

selected and visit report is not referenced.
Visit done and commercial settlement is to be

done if visit report is referenced to the
complaint document
Commercial settlement has been done if the

settlement value / quantity are entered
File note is created if a file note is

referenced by the complaint
Credit note issued if a credit note is issued

against a file note which is referenced by a
complaint.
After this referencing the complaint or a number of
complaints can make the debit note. There should an
option of copying the coil wise details with the
complaint into the debit note with the claim for every
coil or there should be a consolidated figure stating
the amount of claim made against a number of
complaints.
The file note may then be made by referencing the
debit note The system should compare the quantity
settled with the quantity of the file note. If it is more
then the same should not be accepted.
Then a credit note should be issued based on the file
Page 95 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
note made after approval from DIC else if the same

is not acceptable then a valid reason may be given
for the same for not accepting the file note. Also the
complaint status should be settled.
The complaint status may be available for various
stages like if it is at visit stage, debit note stage, at
file note stage, at credit note stage. Also a Segment
wise / customer wise / complaint wise status of
complaints settled and that pending for settlement
should be available. Segment wise Overall status of
complaints settled and that pending for settlement.
Once a complaint has been settled then the same
should be communicated to heads of caster/ mill
operations/steel melting shop/quality & logistics if
required. Corrective & preventive action taken to see
that the complaint is not repeated in future should
be given by QA in system and a feedback on the
same should be given to the customer. The value
wise report to be generated to this extent.
Customer complaint handling/settlement cycle to be
fully implemented.
6.1.12.4 Customer
Returns (Sales
Return)
Provision for return of material from customers and

subsequent settlement should be available on the
system.
In case sales return material the following procedure
to be followed for plant:
i.
The material to be received at gate

with a letter from the party and duty paying
documents
ii.
Without the above the goods should
not be allowed to enter the factory premises.
iii.
The goods then goes to the logistics
for reversing the entries.
iv.
The excise department then takes the
cenvat credit in cenvate register and transfers it
to RG1.
1.
Returns shall be handled on the SAP system

in the following way:
A return order is created with / without
reference to the Sales Order or Invoice on
which material is send to customer.
A Billing block shall be maintained in the
Returns Order.
On receiving the returned material, a
returns delivery shall be created and Post
Goods Issue is performed which brings back
the stock into any one of the following
(ISPATs) stock.
2.
3.
4.
Block stock returns
Unrestricted use stock
Quality Inspection Stock
Block Stock
(A)
Page 96 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
5.
In case sales return material the following procedure
to be followed for Depot:
1.
2.
3.
6.1.12.5
Free of Charge
Delivery
Free of Charge
6.1.12.6 Subsequent
Delivery
6.1.12.7 Debit Memo
The material to be received

at godown with a letter from the party and/or
duty paying documents/delivery challan.
Without the above the
goods should not be allowed.
This should modify the
stock of depot after the goods receipt.
Provision for sending material at no cost to the

customer should be made with reference to the
complaint raised by the customer.
In cases of material shortage in the earlier delivery, if

ISPAT decides to send additional material at no
additional charges, such provision should be
available.
In cases of excess material despatch in the earlier

delivery, if ISPAT decides to recover the differential
value from the customer, then ISPAT should be able
to raise a debit note.
In Cases where the prices were wrongly quoted less,
a debit memo should be provided.
The debit note should be raised for :
6.
7.
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
2.
Gaps/Comments
If the complaint is proven genuine, to

approve the complaint, the billing block shall
be released else a rejection indicator shall be
initiated.
If the customer returns only some of the
material, a credit memo shall be created for
even the full amount. Alternatively, a partial
credit memo shall be created for certain
items even if the customer returns the entire
quantity, by reducing him quantity in the
Return Order to the quantity to be credited.
The Customer shall be a supplied
replacement goods by entering a reason for
rejection for the appropriate items in the
return order. Then a free of charge
subsequent delivery with reference to the
return order shall be created to send the
replacement goods to the customer.
A sales document with the order type Free
of charge deliveries shall be created and
subsequently a delivery shall be made.
A billing document with only taxes and duties
like excise shall be made and sent along with
the material to the customer.
A sales document with the order type Free
of charge subsequent deliveries shall be
created with reference to an order and
subsequently a delivery shall be made.
A billing document with only taxes and duties
like excise shall be made and sent along with
the material to the customer.
A debit memo request shall be created
whenever ISPAT intends to recover the
material value from the customer.
The debit memo request would trigger a
billing document in which the differential
value is mentioned along with the taxes and
duties.
(A)
(A)
1 , 2 ,4 & 5(A)
3 (H)
Page 97 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.1.12.8 Credit Memo
1.
2.
3.
Rate variance
Delay payment interest,
Sales tax and/or Excise Duty (Less payment)
Conversion charges
Bank charges for out station cheques
Interest
Services conducted for the customers
Letter of credit interest charges &
Others.
Customer debit note creation
should be through SAP.
Factory, Branches, Depots
should be able to track the customer receivables
other than sales invoice and raise the debit notes
through SAP.
Pre-audit from auditors, which
are, being done manually should be through SAP
workflow.
Posting of the debit notes to
customer and GL accounts after the approval
from auditors should be automatic.
Debit note No.,s should be
separate for each division and branch office.
In cases of material shortage in the earlier
delivery, if ISPAT decides to reimburse the
differential value to the customer, then ISPAT
should be able to raise a credit note.
In cases where the excess prices are charged,
freight paid by customer on the behalf of Ispat or
partial delivery a credit memo should be
provided.
Provision should be to record the details of debit
note on us. And the same should be linked to the
file note.
File note to be issued for the settlement value of
the complaint and based on that a credit note to
be issued with higher authorisation profile.
For all above credit notes customer has to raised
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
Gaps/Comments
Automatic audit of debit notes through work

flow is not possible as work flow is out of
scope.
Automatic posting of debit notes shall be
possible.
Separate Number ranges shall be maintained
for branch wise credit notes.
A credit memo request shall be created

whenever ISPAT intends to reimburse the
value of material in shortage to the
customer.
The credit memo request would trigger a
billing document in which the differential
value is mentioned along with the taxes and
duties.
(A)
Page 98 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
debit note on Ispat.
6.1.13 Administrative Customer Services

1.
Administrative
6.1.13.1 Customer
Services
Provision should be made to record the visits of

the representative of the customer to ISPAT
offices. All details Related to customer, purpose
of visit, Employee to whom the visitor wants to
meet, date and time should be maintained.
2. In absence of responsible sales person, the same
should be mailed to sales person.
If a customer wants to visit our office or our plant
their visit details / arrangement requests to HRD, this
should be done in SAP.
It is possible to record the visits by creating sales

activity types for Customer Visits.
Mailing is possible between users of Sap R/3
system
Requests for Room and Catering Service shall be
provided
(A)
6.1.14 Customer Service
6.1.14.1
Customer
Service
Call centre concept.

When a customer dials a particular telephone number
the response should be automated.
For example, after connecting, customer should give
the customer code and the password, if the customer
dials 1, then system should give the despatch details,
if 2, then it should give the production details and so
on.
All the information about the customers order like
production, stock, despatch should be made available
to the customer through system.
Not possible in SAP

(H)
Through Email the customers order status and

other relevant details will be known to customers.
(A)
6.1.15 Others
1.
Other logistic
6.1.15.1
process
6.1.15.2 Job work( Out

Bound )
1.
While loading the coil if it has noticed that the

coil is damaged (during handling) or not
despachable, in such case there should be
provision in the system that no delivery should
be created for this coil. It should be kept in hold
state in unrestricted stock itself. No further gate
entry should be allowed against this material.
For job work despatches, purchase order
should be issued by marketing or PPC with
reference to sales order by marketing, on the
basis of this document material should be rolled
and allocated.
Material shall be shifted to restricted use using

material transfer functionality. Once material is in
restricted stock will not consider for dispatch
plan. And not allowed for further gate entry.
This process shall be handled through MM module
( Process ID 7.2.7 )
(A / C)
(A)
Page 99 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Gaps/Comments
For gate entry of job work following details

are required. Purchase order number, After
executing this number system should
automatically shows transporters incorporated in
that purchase order with availability of material,
type of material with details, item wise material
balance (if more than one vehicle is reported),
purchase order quantity, quantity balance, plant
for which order is created and processor name
and destination where material is to deliver
(Material unloading point ).
For JOB WORK dispatches, gate entry
system should be almost same as for semi
finished / finished products only.
57F4 document is prepared ( along with LR
) according to PO in which processor name,
nature of processing, no. of days up to which
material has to return to plant should be
entered. Remaining data like tariff head, material
price / rate should be taken from material
master.
After gate entry vehicle should go to weigh
bridge for tare weight, delivery will be created
for Job work.
For release of vehicle following details in
574 format should be prepared along with ISPAT
printed LR.
For receipt of material, after reporting of
vehicle, documents should be checked by
logistics person and according to it gate entry
should done. The reference document for gate
entry may be original purchase order for job
work or sales order issued from marketing or
any other- to be elaborated.
In gate entry, challan number should be
entered by logistic person which should give the
despatch details of material and customer. This
should include material description, date of
despatch, processor details. LR number should
be supplied separately which is received with
Page 100 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
material.
One field should be supplied if any remark
has to enter.
9.
After gate entry, vehicle should go to

weigh bridge for gross weight. After gross
weight, a material unloading note should be
issued by logistics to unloading person. After
unloading the unloading person sends vehicle to
road weigh bride for tare weight. The data
should be collected by logistics,. According to net
weight from weight bridge ( if it is not in range of
supplied product, same should be specified ),
material receipt should be given in form of LR
( ISPAT generated) ( procedure awaited ).
Material receipt should be given on the basis of
road weigh bridge weight or by despatched
material weight whichever is less. If deviation
between these two weights lies between 50 kg
then receipt should be given on invoice weight.
10.
For gate out of this empty vehicle, after
executing vehicle number , details against LR /
57F4 should appear and should be the job work
despatch, job work pending, job work receipt
should be maintain in system and available in
report form.
11.
For gate out of sales return material and
for job work return material, ISPAT prepared LR
is given to release the vehicle.
6.1.15.2 Material
Supplied to IIL
Service
Centres
Outside The
Dolvi Plant
For the outside service centre, material transfer

should be performed by STOCK TRANSFER method.
1.
2.
Customer order should be booked on Dolvi plant

as Scheduling Agreement.
If it is in Slit Edge / narrow width, PPC decides
whether to slit the material at our outside slitters
or in house.
Material supply to outside service centres (own

by Ispat) shall be done through stock transfer as
same as other stock transfers.
1. When it is not decided whether slitting will
be done at Dolvi or the material has to be
sent to Taloja , then first a scheduling
agreement will be created by marketing
mentioning Dolvi as manufacturing plant.
(A)
Page 101 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Mill coils are produced as per the production plan

of PPC and the width of the mill coils are also
decided by PPC.
If the total quantity of the order is slitted at Dolvi
then, it is as same as direct sales in SD.
If PPC decides to slit all material / part quantity
at our outside slitter, then the mill coils should be
transferred to our outside slitters as per the
slitting programme of PPC.
After the allocation of slitted material to the
customer, it should be dispatched to customer as
the other sales.
Only one Scheduling Agreement should be
created in SAP for the above cycle. More than
one sales order can be created for dispatches
from Dolvi and Taloja.
On the basis of stock transfer/sales order document,

material is send to different service centres. After
unloading of the material, receipt should be given by
logistics or excise person to HSM plant (INVOICE
ACKNWLEDGEMENT). Production program (WIP
program) should be issued by PPC to that service
centre. Service centre should check the capability of
production against this program, if possible to
produce, program should be accepted by logistics or
it should be rejected by giving the reason
These service centres are hired by ISPAT and direct
dispatch is done by ISPAT invoice, only changing the
plant address (The address of service centre should
be the plant address with separate registration to
central excise) and invoice serial number.
In case of material send to Taloja fore further
processing, there should be link between the stock
transfer order from Dolvi to Taloja and delivery from
Taloja to end customer.
2.
3.
4.
Gaps/Comments
Subsequently if it is decided that Taloja will

slit the material, then, item qty will be
reduced to the extent of being manufactured
at Dolvi and a second item will be created
with the same material and a different item
category in the same SA keeping the
requested delivery date and pricing same as
the first item. The second item category will
trigger a purchase requisition and then
subsequently a purchase order shall be
created mentioning the supplying plant as
HSM and receiving plant as Taloja. This
purchase order will generate a planned order
for 900 mm and the BOM will consist of one
or more alternative materials or alternative
item categories all of which will be set for
external procurement.
On MRP run at HSM , process order will be
generated for the wider width material for the
subject PO . Once the wider width material is
produced, it will be delivered to Taloja against
the same stock transport order.
GR will take place at Taloja against the same
stock transport order and subsequently the
wider width material will be slitted at Taloja.
Multiple SO can be created for both the
delivering plants by referencing the same
scheduling agreement.
Material supplied to external service centres shall

be covered under Job work ( MM Process ID 7.2.7
).
Other activities related to QM and production
shall be handled by QM and PP module.
Page 102 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
6.2 Depot Sales, Commission Agent:

6.2.1.1
Sales Plan
As same as Direct Sale
As same as Direct
Sale

6.2.2.1
6.2.2.2
6.2.2.3
6.2.2.4
Sales Activities
Sales Activity
Planning
Recording
Sales Activity
Sales
Promotions
As same as Direct
Sale
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
As same as Direct
Sale
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-

6.2.3.1
6.2.3.2
6.2.3.3
6.2.3.4
6.2.3.5
6.2.3.6
Inquiry receipt
Processing
Capability
Confirmation
Process
Delivery Date
Confirmation
Process
Inquiry
Creation
Inquiry Change
Inquiry
Deletion

6.2.4
6.2.4.1
6.2.4.2
Discounts &
Rebates
Discounts
before sale
Discounts
during sale
As same as Direct
Sale
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
Page 103 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
6.2.4.3
Rebate
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
6.2.4.4
Special Cash
Discounts
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
6.2.5 Quotation
6.2.5.1
6.2.5.2
Quotation
Creation
Quotation
Amendment

6.2.6.1
Payment
Guarantees
process
As same as Direct
Sale
6.2.7 Sales Order Processing & Execution

6.2.7.1
6.2.7.2
6.2.7.3
6.2.7.4
6.2.7.5
6.2.7.6
Sales Order
Sales Order
Creation
Partner
Allocations
Material
Specification
Entry
Availability
Check &
Delivery Date
Determination
Terms &
Conditions

-DO-

-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
Pricing, Taxes
& Discounts
-DOIn case of Trade the price confirmation given by CMO

if followed
-DO-
6.2.7.8
Credit Check
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
Follow-up
Actions
Sales Order
6.2.7.10
Amendment
6.2.7.11 Sales Order
-DO-DO-DO-
-DO-
6.2.7.7
6.2.7.9
As same as Direct
Sale
-DO-DO-
-DO-DO-DO-DOPage 104 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
Deletion
Order
6.2.7.12
Cancellation
Depot Indent
6.2.7.13 (Purchase
Order )

suggested by CVS IT

There should be provision of Indent entry for Trade
indents for CR, GP /GC in SAP at branch level which
will be finally released by CMO to PPIC. This is the
base for formal Sales Plan for next month, released
to PPIC. PPIC then decides the production hour
available, plant capacity, product mix for maximum
productivity. It is forwarded to costing and is revert
back to PPIC & CMO.
Depot sends the indent by 20the of every month to
CMO for the material required for next month On the
basis of the indent CMO prepares a rolling plan which
is forwarded to PPIC on the next day. The PPIC then
perusals the conditions at factory with other
department and confirms the status of the rolling
plan to CMO, which is then forwarded to depots and
the final indent is then raised.
There should be provision to enter the end customer
for whom material is being transferred to the depot.
In case of secondary products, there should be
manual indenting by depots.
Depot Indent shall be maintained in the form of

Purchase Order. This shall be used to order the
material at Depot.
In case of manual indenting in case of
secondary products, CMO will convert the
manual indents to Purchase requisition and
subsequently to stock transport order.
Provision to enter customer reference in stock
transport order as partner shall be possible.
Stock transfer shall be covered in MM module
( Process ID 7.2.6)
Gaps/Comments
-DO-
(A)
6.2.8 Delivery for Stock Transfer
6.2.8.1
Despatch Plan
6.2.8.2
Gate Entry
System
Empty Vehicle
Weighment
Delivery Order
Creation &
6.2.8.3
6.2.8.4
As same as Direct
Sale
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
Delivery shall be created as similar Direct sale

( but with reference to STO/ PO)
-DO-
Page 105 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Picking for
stock transfer
6.2.8.5
6.2.8.6
6.2.8.7
Loading
Final
Weighment
Post Goods
Issue
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
6.2.9 Stock Transfer Challan/ Material Receipt Note
6.2.9.1
Stock Transfer
Invoice
(Challan )
6.2.9.2
Gate out
6.2.9.3
Material
Receipt
1. Excise Invoice along with stock transfer shall

be done from Factory using Add-On CIN
functionality.
2. For stock transfer to depot Stock transfer
challan shall be generated in system.
3. RG1 and RT12 entries shall be updated
automatically.
4. In case of Stock transfer no sales tax will be
charged (based on tax code).
5. Accounting entries shall be passed in the
name of depot.
6. Stock transfer approval from CMO through
work flow is out of scope.
Covered in MM module ( Process ID
7.2.6.5)
Material is transferred from manufacturing plant

to depots.
In case of inter depot stock transfer approval
work flow is required from CMO.
Same as Direct sale

1.
2.
Material receipt note should be prepared/

generated for the material transferred from
Plant/ Depot to Depot
If the material is received in damaged condition,
it is acknowledged in the LR and transit damage
to be informed to plant and commercial Deptt.
For all transit damages, local insurance is asked
for survey. Based on the survey report the
insurance claim is lodged. A report is needed for
all the insurance claims filed for all damages
depot wise, and their status thereon. The
documents needed for lodging the claim.
Duplicate copy meant for transport, and LR is
Same as Direct sale

1.
Material receipt shall be done in SAP and

shall be handled through MM module.
2.
The receiving Depot shall receive the

material using Goods Receipt function and
capture the Excise Invoice.
3.
Until the material is received by the other

plant, it is shown as stock-in-transit (two
step posting).
Transit damage will be handled through MM
and FI.
RG 23 D register entry shall be updated.
4.
5.
(A)
Same as Direct Sale

(A)
Page 106 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
3.
Gaps/Comments
needed.
If the duplicate copy is not made available then
the first information report is to be lodge with
local Police. In any case the original LR is must
without which the claim cannot be lodge.
6.2.10 Delivery & Billing from Depot

6.2.10.1 Despatch Plan
As same as Direct
Sale
1.
Gate Entry &

6.2.10.2 Gate Out
system
6.2.10.3
6.2.10.4
6.2.10.5
6.2.10.6
6.2.10.7
6.2.10.8
Empty Vehicle
Weighment
Delivery Order
Creation &
Picking
Loading
Final
Weighment
Post Goods
Issue
Excise Invoice
Generation /
Selection
Details of all commercial vehicles coming into the

premises for transportation of material should be
recorded in the SAP R/3 system.
2. Provision for entering the Sales Order Number
against which the material is being loaded into
the vehicle, Transporters who has sent the
vehicle and the vehicle number should be made.
3. For Gate out, only vehicle number/shipment
number should be supplied.
Gate entry and Gate Out system will be

maintained the same way as that of factory
Gate in and Gate out system. Will be handled
through shipping and ABAP Functionality.
( C)
As same as Direct
Sale
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
1.
2.

automatically or manually after generation of
billing document.
To generate excise invoice billing type is
assign to delivery type.
Or can be generated manually using J1II
Transaction (with reference to billing.)
(A )
RG23 D register (A Finish Good stock

Page 107 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Register at Depot) shall get updated after

PGI and RT12 (Monthly Return Register)
Shall get updated after generation & posting
of excise invoice.
3.
Commercial
Invoice
6.2.10.9
Creation Billing
6.2.10.1
L.R.Preparation
0
6.2.10.1 Cancellation of
1
excise Invoice
Excise invoice is printed with the help

of output determination corresponds to the
As same as Direct
Sale
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-

Fixing Credit
Limit
Calculating
6.2.11.2 Credit
Exposure
Performing
6.2.11.3
Credit Check
6.2.11.1
As same as
Direct Sale
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-

Receipt of
6.2.12.1 Customer
Complaint
Quality
6.2.12.2
Notification
Complaint
6.2.12.3
Settlements
Customer
6.2.12.4 Returns (Sales
Returns)
Free of Charge
6.2.12.5
Delivery
As same as Direct
Sale
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
Page 108 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Free of Charge
6.2.12.6 Subsequent
Delivery
6.2.12.7 Debit Memo
Gaps/Comments
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-DO-
-DO-DO-
-DO-DO-
6.3 Consignment Agent:

6.3.1.1
Sales Plan
Same as direct sales.
Same as direct
sales.

6.3.2.1
6.3.2.2
6.3.2.3
6.3.2.4
Sales Activities
Sales Activity
Planning
Recording
Sales Activity
Sales
Promotions
Same as direct sales. (This is performed on the end

customer.)
Same as direct
sales.
Same as direct
sales.
Same as direct
sales.
Same as direct
sales.

6.3.3.1
6.3.3.2
6.3.3.3
6.3.3.4
6.3.3.5
Inquiry receipt
Processing
Capability
Confirmation
Process
Delivery Date
Confirmation
Process
Inquiry
Creation
Same as direct sales (with respect to end customer)
Same as direct sales. (with respect to end

customer)
Same as direct
sales.
Same as direct sales. (with respect to end customer)
Same as direct sales. (with respect to end

customer)
Same as direct
sales.
Same as direct
sales.
The inquiry should be created in case of new material

requested by end customer to which the consignment
agent is assigned.
Inquiry Change System should give an option to change any aspect of

Customer Inquiry like Material specifications etc.
Inquiry shall be generated on consignment agent

for a new material requested by the end
customer.
The process is similar to direct sales.
Customer, Validity Period for the Inquiry,
Customer Purchase Order details, Required
Same as direct
sales.
(A)
Page 109 Of 361
6.3.3.6
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Delivery Date etc. shall be changed using the

Inquiry-Change Option.
Deletion of an item in Inquiry without subsequent
reference documents shall be available in the
standard system.
Inquiry
Deletion
(A)
6.3.4 Discounts & Rebates for making Quotation

6.3.4
6.3.4.1
6.3.4.2
6.3.4.3
6.3.4.4
Discounts &
Rebates
Discounts
before sale
Discounts
during sale
Rebate
Special Cash
Discounts
As same as Direct sales
As same as Direct Sales.
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)

6.3.5.1
6.3.5.2
Quotation
Creation
Quotation
Amendment
As same as Direct
Sales.
As same as Direct
Sales.

6.3.6.1
Payment
Guarantees
process
As same as Direct
Sales.
6.3.7.1
Consignment
Fill Up
6.3.7.2
Delivery
Sales Order should be created by IIL on the

consignment agent for transferring the material to the
consignment agent. Delivery will be created from the
Sales Order but no billing will be done. Only excise
invoice will be generated.
Delivery should be created with reference to the Sales

Order mentioned above for delivering the material to
Consignment agents shall be treated as

customer.
Consignment Fill Up Order on the Consignment
Agent shall be created using a separate
document type. The transaction is relevant for
delivery but not for pricing and billing. The
relevant quantity is removed from the regular
stock of the business and added to the special
stock of the Consignment Agent. The valuated
stock of the business remains the same.
Standard delivery with picking, packing and
goods issue shall be created with reference to the
(A)
(A)
Page 110 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
the Consignment Agent. Picking, Packing and Posting
Goods Issue should be done.
6.3.7.3
Billing
Billing document will not be generated as the

ownership of the material is still with IIL. Excise
invoice shall be created as excisable goods are being
removed from plant.
6.3.7.4
Consignment
Issue
Sales order will be created for transferring the material

from consignment agent to the end customer. Delivery
will be created from the CA to the end customer and
finally billing will be done .
6.3.7.5
Delivery
Delivery will be created from the CA to the end

customer.
6.3.7.6
Billing
Commercial invoice should be created on the CA
6.3.7.7
Availability
Check &
Delivery Date
Determination
consignment fill up order.

The transaction is not relevant for pricing and
billing. Excise invoice shall be created as
excisable goods are being removed from the
plant.
6.3.7.8
6.3.7.9
Terms &
Conditions
Pricing, Taxes
& Discounts
2.
Delivery terms should be defaulted from the

Customer Master
Payment Terms should be defaulted from the
Customer Master
Commission will be paid to consignment agent on

actual sale. i.e. sale made to end customer.
Other terms will be as same as direct sale
(A)
Sales Order or the Consignment Issue Order shall

be created on the End Customer using a separate
document type. The transaction is relevant for
delivery, pricing and billing. The relevant quantity
is removed from the special stock of the
Consignment Agent as well as from the valuated
stock of the business. In other words the
ownership of the stock now passes on to the
Consignment Agent. The regular stock of the
business remains the same.
Standard delivery will be created from the CA to
the end customer
As the transaction is relevant for billing due to
change in the ownership of the material to the
CA, commercial invoice will be created on the CA.
(A)
(A)

1.
1.
Gaps/Comments
2.
1.
(A)
Information stored in the Shipping view of

Sales Data in customer master shall be
defaulted.
Payment Terms stored in the Accounting
view of Company Code Data shall be
defaulted from the Customer Master.
Commission shall be paid to consignment

(A)
agent. Condition record for commission to be
paid to consignment agent shall be
maintained.
(A)
Page 111 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
2.
6.3.7.10 Credit Check
Follow-up
Actions
Sales Order
6.3.7.12
Amendment
Sales Order
6.3.7.13
Deletion
Order
6.3.7.14
Cancellation
6.3.7.11
Taxes and excise shall be same as direct

sales.
Same as direct sales (applicable on consignment
Agent).
Same as direct sales (applicable on consignment
Agent).
(A)
Same as direct sale.
(A)
(A)
Same as direct sales(applicable on consignment

Agent).
Same as direct sales(applicable on consignment
Agent).
(A)
(A)
Page 112 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
6.4 Scrap Sales (Production Scrap):

6.4.1.1
Payment
Guarantees
Process
6.4.2.1
Contracts
6.4.3.1
Sales Order
6.4.2 Contracts
6.4.3.2
6.4.3.3
6.4.3.4
6.4.3.5
6.4.3.6
6.4.3.7
6.4.3.8
6.4.3.9
Sales Order
Creation
Partner
Allocations
Material
Specification
Entry
Availability
Check &
Delivery Date
Determination
Terms &
Conditions
Pricing, Taxes
& Discounts
Credit Check
Follow-up
Actions
Amendment
Deletion
6.4.3.12 Order
Cancellation
-DO-
Same as direct
sales.
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-DO-
6.4.4 Delivery
Page 113 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
6.4.4.2 Gate Entry

System
6.4.4.3 Empty Vehicle
Weighment
6.4.4.4 Delivery Order
Creation &
Picking
6.4.4.5 Loading
6.4.4.6 Final
Weighment
6.4.4.7 Post Goods
Issue

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Same as direct
sales.
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
6.4.5 Billing
Generation /
Selection
6.4.5.2 Commercial
Invoice Creation
- Billing
6.4.5.3 Cancellation of
excise Invoice
6.4.5.4
Gate out
-DO-
-DO-
Same as direct
sales.
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-

Receipt of
Customer
Complaint
6.4.6.2 Quality
Notification
6.4.6.3 Complaint
Settlements
6.4.6.4 Customer
Returns (Sales
Returns)
6.4.6.1
As same as Direct
Sale
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
Page 114 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
6.4.6.5 Free of Charge

Delivery
6.4.6.6 Free of Charge
Subsequent
Delivery
6.4.6.7 Debit Memo
6.4.6.8 Credit Memo

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-DO-
-DO-DO-
-DO-DO-
Page 115 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
6.5 Govt. companies / PSUs (Railways):

Quotation
6.5.1.1
Creation
A Tender bid document should be submit to the

railway authorities on the base of tender.
Since the formalities for preparing the tender

bid documents based on Statutory rules and
( H)
regulations of railway authorities, this scenario
shall not be covered.

Payment
6.5.2.1 Guarantees
Process
In case of Railway sales there is no payment

guarantee given against LC or PDC or Bank
Guarantee is given for this sale.
----
6.5.3 Contracts
6.5.3.1 Contracts
Same as direct Sales

6.5.4
6.5.4.1
6.5.4.2
6.5.4.3
6.5.4.4
6.5.4.5
6.5.4.6
Sales Order
Sales Order
Creation
Partner
Allocations
Material
Specification
Entry
Availability
Check &
Delivery Date
Determination
Terms &
Conditions
Pricing, Taxes &
Discounts
6.5.4.7 Follow-up
Same as direct
Sales
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DOPrices of all bidders at which the earlier tender was

awarded should be available on system.
-DO-
-DO-DOIt shall not be possible to give prices of all bidder Earlier bid prices
at which earlier tender was awarded.
shall not possible.
-DO-DOPage 116 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
Actions
Sales Order
6.5.4.8
Amendment
Sales Order
6.5.4.9
Deletion
Order
6.5.4.10
Cancellation

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
6.5.5 Delivery
6.5.5.1
Despatch Plan
6.5.5.2 Gate Entry

System
Weighment
Delivery Order
6.5.5.4
Creation &
Picking
6.5.5.5
Loading
6.5.5.6
Final Weighment
6.5.5.7 Post Goods

Issue
Same as direct
Sales
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
6.5.6 Billing
Excise Invoice
6.5.6.1 Generation /
Selection
Commercial
6.5.6.2 Invoice Creation
Billing
6.5.6.3 L.R.Preparation
Same as direct
Sales
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-

Fixing Credit
6.5.7.1
Limit
Calculating
6.5.7.2
Credit Exposure

-DO-

-DO-
Same as direct
Sales
-DOPage 117 Of 361
6.5.7.3
Processes
in Sales
Performing
Credit Check

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-

Receipt of
6.5.8.1 Customer
Complaint
Quality
6.5.8.2
Notification
Complaint
6.5.8.3
Settlements
Customer
6.5.8.4 Returns(Sales
Return)
Free of Charge
Delivery
Free of Charge
6.5.8.6 Subsequent
Delivery
6.5.8.7 Debit Memo
6.5.8.8 Credit Memo
6.5.8.5
Same as direct
Sales
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DOReturn sales order should be mandatory referenced to

the original invoice.
-DOSystem shall not allow to generate return sales

order without reference to (previous) original
invoice.
(A)
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-DO-
-DO-DO-
-DO-DO-
Page 118 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
6.6 Barter Sales:

6.6.1.1 Inquiry receipt
6.6.1.2
6.6.1.3
6.6.1.4
6.6.1.5
6.6.1.6
Processing
Capability
Confirmation
Process
Delivery Date
Confirmation
Process
Inquiry Creation
Inquiry Change
Inquiry Deletion
Same as direct
Sales
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-DO-DO-
-DO-DO-DO-
-DO-DO-DO-

Quotation
6.6.2.1
Creation
Quotation
6.6.2.2
Amendment

-DO-

-DO-
Same as direct
Sales
-DO-

6.6.3
6.6.3.1
6.6.3.2
6.6.3.3
6.6.3.4
6.6.3.5
6.6.3.6
Sales Order
Sales Order
Creation
Partner
Allocations
Material
Specification
Entry
Availability
Check &
Delivery Date
Determination
Pricing, Taxes &
Discounts
Sales Order
Amendment
Same as direct
Sales
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
Page 119 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
Sales Order
Deletion
Order
6.6.3.8
Cancellation
6.6.3.7

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
6.6.4 Delivery
Gate Entry
System
Empty Vehicle
6.6.4.3
Weighment
Delivery Order
6.6.4.4 Creation &
Picking
6.6.4.5 Loading
6.6.4.2
6.6.4.6 Final Weighment

Post Goods
6.6.4.7
Issue
Same as direct
Sales
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
6.6.5 Billing
Excise Invoice
Selection
Commercial
- Billing
Same as direct
Sales
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-

Receipt of
6.6.6.1 Customer
Complaint
Quality
6.6.6.2
Notification
Complaint
6.6.6.3
Settlements
Customer
6.6.6.4
Returns
Same as direct
Sales
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
Page 120 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
6.7 Auction Sales:

Payment
6.7.1.1 Guarantees
process
Same as direct
Sales

6.7.2
6.7.2.1
6.7.2.2
6.7.2.3
6.7.2.4
6.7.2.5
6.7.2.6
6.7.2.7
6.7.2.8
6.7.2.9
6.7.2.1
0
Sales Order
Sales Order
Creation
Partner
Allocations
Material
Specification
Entry
Terms &
Conditions
Pricing, Taxes &
Discounts
Credit Check
Follow-up
Actions
Sales Order
Amendment
Sales Order
Deletion
Order
Cancellation
Same as direct
Sales
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
6.7.3 Delivery
6.7.3.2 Gate Entry
System
Weighment
Same as direct
Sales
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
Page 121 Of 361
6.7.3.4
6.7.3.5
6.7.3.6
6.7.3.7
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Delivery Order
Creation &
Picking
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
Loading
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
Final Weighment
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
Post Goods Issue
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
6.7.4 Billing
Excise Invoice
Selection
Commercial
- Billing
Same as direct
Sales
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-

Fixing Credit
Limit
Calculating
6.7.5.2
Credit Exposure
Performing
6.7.5.3
Credit Check
6.7.5.1
Same as direct
Sales
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-

6.7.6.1
6.7.6.2
6.7.6.3
6.7.6.4
6.7.6.5
Receipt of
Customer
Complaint
Quality
Notification
Complaint
Settlements
Customer
Returns
Free of Charge
Delivery
Same as direct
Sales
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
Page 122 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
Free of Charge
6.7.6.6 Subsequent
Delivery
6.7.6.7 Debit Memo
6.7.6.8 Credit Memo

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-DO-
-DO-DO-
-DO-DO-
Page 123 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
6.8 Free Samples:

6.8.1.1 Sales Activities
6.8.1.2
Recording Sales
Activity
-DO-
-DO-
Same as direct
Sales
-DO-

Inquiry
6.8.2.1
Processing
Same as
direct Sales

6.8.3
6.8.3.1
6.8.3.2
6.8.3.3
6.8.3.4
6.8.3.5
6.8.3.6
6.8.3.7
6.8.3.8
6.8.3.9
Sales Order
Creation
Partner
Allocations
Material
Specification
Entry
Availability Check
& Delivery Date
Determination
Terms &
Conditions
Pricing, Taxes &
Discounts
Follow-up Actions
Sales Order
Amendment
Sales Order
Deletion
Order
Cancellation
In case of free sample approval is taken from

CMO in a prescribed format.
Same as direct Sales.

Price approval format (which shall be used in
direct sale shall be used for free sample
approval.
Same as direct
Sales
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
6.8.4 Delivery
Same as direct
Page 124 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Sales
6.8.4.2 Gate Entry

System
Weighment
Creation &
Picking
6.8.4.5 Loading
6.8.4.6 Final Weighment
6.8.4.7 Post Goods
Issue
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-DO-
-DO-DO-
-DO-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
6.8.5 Billing
Excise Invoice
Selection
Commercial
6.8.5.2 Invoice Creation Billing
Same as direct
Sales
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
Page 125 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
6.9

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Third Party Sale:

6.9.1.1
Sales Plan
Same as direct
Sales
Same as direct
Sales

6.9.2.1
6.9.2.2
6.9.2.3
Sales Activities
Sales Activity
Planning
Recording Sales
Activity
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-

6.9.3.1
Inquiry receipt
6.9.3.2
Processing
Capability
Confirmation
Process

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
This is to determine whether a third party is

required to cater a customers requirement or
IIL is by itself capable of fulfilling the
requirement.
The marketing person should be able to
determine with the help of the system,
whether the material requested by customer
has already been manufactured.
If no earlier history has been found for that
material, then the Inquiry has to be passed on
to the Quality Department for confirmation.
If Quality Department confirms the non
availability, then a TDC should be created in
the system and should be passed on to the
Marketing Person.
The Marketing Person shall pass on the TDC to
the Costing Department for Price
Determination.
If Quality cannot confirm the availability of the
material, then the Marketing person should
suggest an alternate material, which suits the
customers end application, with the help of the
Same as direct
Sales
Page 126 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
system.
In case of job work, QA decides whether the
specifications required by the customer may be
fulfilled by IIL or by some external agency.
Accordingly material is sent to the competent
agency for further processing. Example, material
of KLM sent for job work of North Light Curve to
Nagpur, Mumbai , Chennai etc. OR Hr mother coil
sent for further processing to various slitters like
Suhas, Uttam etc.
6.9.3.3
6.9.3.4
6.9.3.5
6.9.3.6
Delivery Date
Confirmation
Process
Inquiry Creation
Inquiry Change
Inquiry Deletion
-DO-DO-DO-
-DO-DO-DO-
Same as direct
Sales
-DO-DO-DO-

6.9.4
6.9.4.1
6.9.4.2
6.9.4.3
6.9.4.4
Discounts &
Rebates
Discounts before
sale
Discounts during
sale
Rebate
Special Cash
Discounts
Same as direct
Sales
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-

6.9.5.1
6.9.5.2
Quotation
Creation
Quotation
Amendment
-DO-
-DO-
Same as direct
Sales
-DO-

6.9.6.1
Payment
Guarantees
process

Page 127 Of 361
6
6.9.7.0
6.9.7.1
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Sales Order
Sales Order
Creation

Material is send for job work/processing and final
material ( out put material ) is received in to Ispat
stock with reference to job work / subcontracting
order.
1. Purchase order is created manually or through
MRP run or due to a Purchase Requisition
triggered by a Sales Order on the Output
Material.

1.
When the entire material is delivered directly

from the premises of the third party to the
end customer then Sales order shall be
created on the final customer on receipt of
P.O.
2.
After the sales order is processed; manual

change in the item category will result in the
generation of a purchase requisition with
reference to which a P.O. or service order
shall be created on the third party for
processing the material.
3.
A statistical GR shall be made to

acknowledge the completion of service by
the Service Provider for all the quantity. This
shall not update the stocks in the system
neither quantity nor value.
4.
When part of the material is consumed by

the third party and balance sold to customer,
two sales orders shall be created, one on the
final customer and another on the third
party. The sales order on the end customer
shall be handled in the same way as above,
while the second sales order will be made on
the third party for the quantity consumed by
him.
5.
The scrap generated in the process of

servicing of IIL material by the third party
may either be brought back to IIL through a
goods receipt and then sold like normal
scrap sales or it may be sold directly from
the third party premises and the value shall
be refunded to IIL by a credit memo.
2. A subcontracting order shall be created with

Service Provider as the vendor
3. Output Material is the material expected after
servicing by the vendor.
4. Input Materials are the components/items, which
are required for processing are send through
57F4 challan and goods are physically moved out
of ISPAT premises to vendors premises.
5. After the processing, Output Material is received
into ISPATs stock with reference to subcontracting order.
Gate entry, weighment, & gate out will be done as
similar to other material.
Narrow slit from Customers premises,
scenario:
1. Requirement is received in narrow width from a
customer (ex. 1015MM).
2. Material is to be supplied in Wider width (ex.
1555MM)
3. The customer requirement width (1015MM) and
the to-be supplied width (1555MM) should be
captured in the system.
4. The scheduling agreement / sales order of these
kind of sales should be able to distinguished
from other sales.
5. Sales / invoicing should be done for the supplied
width (1555MM).
6. In the accounting entry to customer should be
Gaps/Comments
Receipt of Serviced Material:
Page 128 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Case a: When all material is received by ISPAT

The whole quantity of output material is
received at ISPATs plant.
debited to the extent of the customers

requirement (1015MM) only and the balance
Case B: When all material is sold to customers
value (Width = Actual Rolling Width Customers
from the premises of the servicing vendor
requirement width) should be booked as the
A statistical GR shall be made to acknowledge
liability against that customer.
the completion of service by the Service
7. When the Customer bills us for the narrow slit
Provider for all the quantity. This shall not
material a PO should be created in the system,
update the stocks in the system neither
the consignee will be our narrow slit customer.
8. Goods receipt should be shown against the PO to
quantity not value.
the extent of Qty of narrow slit dispatched by
the customer to the narrow slit end customer.
Case C: When partial quantity is returned to
9. A Commercial invoice should be raised on narrow ISPAT and partial is sold to customers
slit customer to the narrow slit material (to the
Quantity to be sold is issued to sales order stock
extent of goods receipt) and the narrow slit
and remaining quantity is brought into Plant
customer account should be debited with the
stock from vendors stock.
invoice value and the liability of the customer
should be liquidated to that extent.
Narrow slit from Customers premises,
Pipe Scenario:
scenario:
1. Requirement is received for pipes from customer.
2. HR material is sold to Denholm as per that
Scheduling agreement and sales order shall be
required to produce the pipe.
created for 1555 mm on Uttam. On the basis of
3. The entire value of the HR sale should be
the sales order delivery and billing shall be made
considered as liability in the system.
to Uttam. The customer requirement width of 1015
4. Pipe produced by Denholm and billed on Ispat
mm shall be maintained as a characteristics of the
with the consignee as the pipe customer.
1555 mm width material. When Uttam will bill IIL
5. Purchase order should be raised and Pipe should then a purchase order shall be created in the
be shown as goods receipt.
system on Uttam for the end customers required
6. Commercial invoice should be raised to the
material mentioning the consignee as the ends
extent of the pipe received and liability reduced customer. Statistical GR shall be created against
to the extent of commercial invoice raised.
the PO when the material is delivered from Uttam
to end customer. Then commercial invoice shall be
raised on the end customer . The booking of
liabilities at each stage and corresponding
accounting entries are to be covered in FI module.
Same procedure shall be followed for pipes.
6.9.7.2
Partner
Allocations
Page 129 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
Material
Specification
Entry
Availability
Check &
6.9.7.4
Delivery Date
Determination
Terms &
6.9.7.5
Conditions
Pricing, Taxes
6.9.7.6
& Discounts
Follow-up
6.9.7.8
Actions
Sales Order
6.9.7.9
Amendment
Sales Order
6.9.7.10
Deletion
Order
6.9.7.11
Cancellation
6.9.7.3

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
6.9.8 Delivery to Processor

6.9.8.1
6.9.8.2
6.9.8.3
Gate Entry
Empty Vehicle
Weighment
Delivery Order
Creation &
Picking
If the material is not returned back after 180 days,

then marketing take a decision to bill this product
to customer. Direct excise invoice is created and
commercial invoice is generated.
Material Supplied To Processor on :

1.
Material supplied to Processor as a

sale .
Delivery of material is created as per the

end customers requirement with
reference to sales order.
Delivery is created as similar as direct

sale.
Excise and commercial invoice is created

as same as direct sale. or
2.
Material shall be send for job work to

service centres on Form 57F4 through MM
route and processed material will be return
(A)
Page 130 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
in another form ,which shall be the material

sent to customer. Material receipt shall be
done through MM.
6.9.8.4
6.9.8.5
6.9.8.6
6.9.8.7
Loading
Final
Weighment
Post Goods
Issue
L.R.Preparation
For material supplied & return back on

57 F4 RG1 stock entries shall be
updated.
No excise entries shall be passed for this
transaction.
If the material is not returned within 180
days then excise duty has to be debited
trough excise JV with reference to job
work document.
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
6.9.9 Delivery & Billing To Customer

6.9.9.1
Delivery To
Customer
Material is supplied to customer from job processor

premises.
1.
Material Supplied to Customer :

(A)
Finished product shall

be delivered to customer from
processors /third party premise on his
own excise invoice.
Whenever a material is
sold using the Third Party route a
statistical GR can be made (Not
Mandatory) and this creates entries in
GR/IR Clearing Account. This GR is
used in Invoice Verification, which is
further linked to billing document (bill
prepared for Customer). In this case
the excise invoice is supplied by the
third party vendor to the customer.
Commercial invoice
shall be send by processor to IIL for
Page 131 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
6.9.9.2
Commercial
Invoice
Creation Billing
Commercial invoiced should be raised for the

material supplied to the customer.-DO-
Gaps/Comments
processing charges.
Invoice verification
shall be done.
Commercial invoice shall be raised on the end

customer after invoice verification for the
quantity supplied by processor.
Commercial invoice shall attract only sales tax.
No excise shall be charged in the invoice.
( A)

Fixing Credit
6.9.10.1
Limit
Calculating
6.9.10.2 Credit
Exposure
Performing
6.9.10.3
Credit Check
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-

Receipt of
6.9.11.1 Customer
Complaint
6.9.11.2
6.9.11.3
6.9.11.4
6.9.11.5
6.9.11.6
6.9.11.7
6.9.11.8
Quality
Notification
Complaint
Settlements
Customer
Returns ( Sales
Return)
Free of Charge
Delivery
Free of Charge
Subsequent
Delivery
Debit Memo
Credit Memo
Same as direct
Sales
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-DO-
-DO-DO-
-DO-DO-
Page 132 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Page 133 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
6.10 Group Company

6.10.1. Sales Order
6.10.1.1 Stock transfer

Order
HR sales to Kalmeshwar Plant from Dolvi.

Treated as a normal domestic sale. Purchase
Order should be raised in SAP from
Kalmeshwar on IIL Dolvi.
In this particular sale all the requirements
should be entered in one document
(scheduling agreement and sales order). In
these documents the quantities which are to
be dispatched under the various parties should
be defined. After completing the defined
quantity system should automatically switch
over to another customer and the further
billing should be done in this party.
For ex. For month of Nov 02 Kalmeshwar
requirement is of 35000MT. And a single
scheduling agreement and sales order is
created for the whole quantity. In this the first
20000MT should be dispatched under Nemani,
The next 5000MT in maheep, 5000MT in
punsuni, 5000MT in posco. So against this
requirement whatever material goes first till
20000Mt should be billed to Nemani.
Immediately after completing the 20000MT,
system should switch over to the next party
i.e. maheep, and so on. Option to change the
quantity should be kept open, but not below
the already dispatched quantity.
In a month there should be only one document
should be there for their full requirement. In
that customer wise despatch quantities should
be specified covering the total requirement
from Kalmeshwar.
Hot Metal sale to HSM from IMIL. Sales Order
should prepared for lumsum quantity through
normal sales cycle. The control should be kept
by plant control and accounts
Sales HR from Dolvi plant to Kalmeshwar shall

be same as direct sales at existing market
price. (Sales to IIL-KLM )
( A)
Where as sales of IMiL products to IIL or vice

a versa shall be covered under
INTERCOMPANY SALES.
Same as Direct sales.
Customer master record shall be maintained

with sold to party, ship to party, payer and bill
to party. Multiple partners shall be maintained
for each of these partner functions.
Page 134 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Same As Direct Sales
Same As Direct Sales
Same As Direct
Sales
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
DRI supply from SIP to HSM. From SD point of

view no document is prepared. Stock transfer
should be done and that stock should be
treated as reserved stock on which sales order
cannot be prepared.
Sale of HSM finish goods to HSM. Treated as a

Finish goods regular sale.
For all the above a different document type for

sales order is required (as IIL group company
transactions)
( the process is applicable for sale from Dolvi to
Kalmeshwar and vice versa).
6.10.1.2 Material
Specification
Entry
6.10.1.3 Availability
Check &
Delivery Date
Determination
6.10.1.4 Pricing, Taxes
6.10.2. Delivery
6.10.2.2 Gate Entry
System
Weighment
Creation &
Picking
6.10.2.5 Loading
6.10.2.6 Final
Weighment
6.10.2.7 Post Goods
Issue
Same as direct
Sales
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
6.10.3 Billing
6.10.3.1 Excise &
Same as direct
Page 135 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
proforma and
sales tax
Generation /
Selection
6.10.3.3 Debit Memo

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Sales
-DO-DO-DO-
-DO-DO-DO-
-DO-DO-DO-

6.10.4.1
6.10.4.2
6.10.4.3
6.10.4.4
6.10.4.5
6.10.4.6
6.10.4.7
6.10.4.8
Receipt of
Customer
Complaint
Quality
Notification
Complaint
Settlements
Customer
Returns (Sales
Returns)
Free of Charge
Delivery
Free of Charge
Subsequent
Delivery
Debit Memo
Credit Memo
As same as
Direct Sale
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-
-DO-DO-
-DO-DO-
-DO-DO-
6.11 Captive Consumption (Stock Transfer):
Page 136 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
6.11.1 Stock Transport Order Processing & Execution

6.11.1.1 Sales
Transport
Order
Stock Transport order will be created with

reference to the PO/Indent of the receiving
plant/company through the MM route with
reference to which replenishment delivery has
to be created and billing to be created with
reference to the delivery. Shall be covered in
MM module ( Process ID 7.2.6)
(A)
6.11.1.2 Material
Specification
Entry
In the Stock Transport order, Material

characteristics/specifications shall be entered
using classification feature.
The values for these characteristics shall be
restricted to those maintained in the Material
Master Classification.
Delivery Tolerances shall be provided as per
pre-determined percentage of the total order
quantity.
(A)
6.11.1.3 Availability
Check &
Delivery Date
Determination
6.11.1.4 Pricing &,
Taxes

Same as direct
Sales
6.11.2 Delivery
Weighment
Creation &
Picking
6.11.2.3 Loading
6.11.2.4 Final
Weighment
6.11.2.5 Post Goods
Issue

(A)
There should be some provision to create a different

kind of delivery.
Delivery shall be created as same as direct

sales. Delivery document type shall be
different than direct sales delivery type.
Same as direct
Sales
Same as direct
Sales
Same as direct
Sales
6.11.3 Billing
Page 137 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT

Generation /
Selection
Excise Invoice should be generated with Zero
Excise Duty.

In case of captive consumption, Excise Invoice
shall be created same as direct sale Except
excise duty. Invoice shall be generated with
NIL excise duty.
In case of stock transfer stock transport
excise invoice shall be generated with
applicable excise duty.
RG1 & RT12 entry shall be updated, where as
in case of captive consumption only RG1 shall
be updated.
No other accounting entries shall be passed.
Gaps/Comments
(A)
Page 138 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
6.12 Direct Export Sales:

6.12.1.1 Sales Plan
Process should be done as domestic sales
This requirement shall be mapped similar to the

domestic sales
Same as direct
sales

Sales Activity
Planning
Recording
6.12.2.3
Sales Activity
Sales
6.12.2.4
Promotions
6.12.2.2

domestic sales
Same as direct
sales
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do - do -
- do - do -

Processing
Capability
6.12.3.2
Confirmation
Process
Delivery Date
6.12.3.3 Confirmation
Process
Inquiry
6.12.3.4
Creation
6.12.3.5 Inquiry Change
Inquiry
6.12.3.6
Deletion
- do - do - do -

6.12.4.1 Commission
Discounts
before sale
Discounts
6.12.4.3
during sale
6.12.4.2
Commission should be given on the base of invoiced

Quantity / value to the export commission Agents
- do -
Commission conditions records shall be

maintained and determined on the basis of
(A)
agent specific, Invoice value specific, order Qty
Specific, Customer wise, Country wise.
This requirement shall be mapped similar to the As same as direct
domestic sales
sale
- do -
- do -
Page 139 Of 361
6.12.4.4
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Special Cash
Discounts
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -

Quotation
6.12.5.1
Creation
Quotation
6.12.5.2
Amendment
6.12.6 Payment Guarantee Process

Payment
6.12.6.1 Guarantees
process
- do -
- do -
- do -
6.12.7 Export Sales Contracts

Export Sales
6.12.7.1
Contracts
do -
- do -
- do -

The proforma invoice is invoice which gives the
details of material and quantity to be shipped,
price, incoterms, terms of payment, price, and
the expiration date for the letter of credit and
the length of time needed for shipping.
Creating a proforma invoice shall be similar to
any billing document and shall be reference to
any of Sales document (SO, Quotation etc.).
6.12.8.1
Proforma
Invoice
Proforma invoice should be created. This shall be

used as a reference by the customer for opening LC.
This invoice shall not pass any excise or other

accounting entries. Also no statistical data
shall be created on the basis of pro forma
invoices.
( A)
This shall be used for issue of LC by the

customer.
Same as Direct sales

Page 140 Of 361
6.12.8.3
6.12.8.4
6.12.8.5
6.12.8.6
6.12.8.7
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
( Scheduling
agreement)
Sales Order &
Scheduling
agreement
Creation
Partner
Allocations
Material
Specification
Entry
Availability
Check &
Delivery Date
Determination
Terms &
Conditions
1.
2.
6.12.8.8
Pricing, Taxes
& Discounts
3.
4.
5.
Basic Price (this price should be picked up from

the Price List Master and manual changes shall
be done here, period wise reports should be
made available for deviation of actual price
with the price list price)
Excise (Excise should be applicable to all sales
other than under bond B1. a bond register
should be maintained)
Basic Price should be maintained in foreign
currency.
Sales Tax should not be applied.
There should be a means for calculating the
Net Sales Realisation which is achieved by
subtracting the minimum floor price from the
net sales price. If the NSR is negative,
approval for sales at the given price is to be
obtained from DIC(Marketing) or competent
level.
1.
Basic Price shall be maintained as a condition

2. Currency to be maintained in the customer
master record of the overseas customer.
3. Prices shall be maintained in foreign
currency.
1-4 & 6 (A)
4. No sale tax shall be applicable to this sale.
5 under exploration
Work Flow is not in a
scope.
5.
Condition type is to be maintained for
NSR which will pick up the cost price of the
subject material from costing and subtract
the same from the net sales price to
calculate the contribution, which if negative;
workflow will be generated for approval from
competent authority.
6.
Pricing will also affect on the basis
Incoterm i.e. FOB etc.
This requirement shall be mapped similar to the Same as direct sales
domestic sales
Page 141 Of 361
6.12.8.1
0
6.12.8.1
1
6.12.8.1
2
6.12.8.1
3
Processes
in Sales
Follow-up
Actions
Sales Order
Amendment
Sales Order
Deletion
Order
Cancellation
6.12.8.1 Preshipment
4
Documents

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
Following are the preshipment documents are

required and capture in SAP:
a)Performa Invoice
b) Packing List
c) Commercial Invoice
d) Shipping Bill
e) Certificate of Origin
f) Excise Certificate
g) Annexure
h) ARE -1
i) Scheme Documentation
j ) Advance License
There is no standard provision for Export

documents in SAP. This shall be done through
ABAP.
( C)
6.12.9 Generation Of Stock Transport Order & Delivery

Stock
6.12.9.1 Transport
Order
Gate Entry
System
Empty Vehicle
6.12.9.4
Weighment
6.12.9.3
Material should be transfer to port i.e. logical plant

as a stock transfer. Stock transfer order should be
created with reference to logical PO.
A stock transport order shall be created with

reference to logical PO on the Port (which is
logical plant) for the material to be transfer to
port.
STO shall be covered in MM Module ( Process ID
7.2.6).
Process should be done as domestic sales.
As same as direct
sale
domestic sales.
(A)
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
Page 142 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
Delivery Order
6.12.9.5 Creation &
Picking
6.12.9.6 Loading
Final
Weighment
Post Goods
6.12.9.8
Issue
6.12.9.7
Packing List &

6.12.9.9 Container
Packing List

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
(01-02%) Tolerance for DRI and PIG iron products,

05-10% tolerance for HSM products should be
provided.
Delivery shall be created with reference to STO.

Delivery tolerances shall be provided.
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
Packing list shall be prepared for the material.

Shall be done using ABAP functionality.
(C)
Export Packing List with reference to the Export

Sales Order no. should created in SAP. User will only
fill the Packet no/ Coil No and the gross weight which
he will get from the stock report.
Stock Transfer
6.12.9.1
Invoice
0
( Challan )
Stock transfer Invoice should be created for the

material to be transport to port for export.
6.12.9.1
L.R.Preparation
1
LR would be prepared by ISPAT on behalf of

Transporter to reduce Time. All Details would be
captured from Invoice.
6.12.9.1 Material
2
Receipt at Port
Same as Depot material Receipt
Stock transfer invoice shall be created with

reference to delivery for a material transfer to
port.
1.
Excise Invoice along with stock transfer
shall be done from Factory using Add-On
CIN functionality.
2.
For stock transfer to port Stock transfer
challan shall be generated in system.
3.
RG1 and RT12 entries shall be updated
automatically.
4.
In case of Stock transfer no sales tax
will be charged (based on tax code).
5.
If material is transfer under bond then
excise invoice shall be generated with zero
excise duty.
6.
No accounting entries shall be passed
for stock transfer invoice.
(A)
LR Shall be prepared by capturing Delivery and

Invoice Details.
(C)
Shall be treated same as depot material receipt.
(A)
6.12.10 Delivery ( From Port)

6.12.10. Delivery Order
Delivery shall be created for a material to be
(A)
Page 143 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
Creation

suggested by CVS IT
Delivery should be generated for a material to be

shipped to customer.
Gaps/Comments
shipped to export customer.

This shall be similar to Direct sales.
6.12.11 Billing
Commercial
6.12.11. Invoice
1
Creation Billing
6.12.11. Post Shipment

2
Documents
DEPB , DEEC
6.12.11. and OTHERs
3
Export benefit
schemes
Commercial invoice should be generated for the

material loaded in to the ship.
Following post shipment documents should be

capture in the system:
a) Post shipment Commercial Invoice
b) Post shipment Packing details
c) Post shipment Item wise list
d) Form SDF
e) Bank certificate of Export realization
f) DEPB/Factory Stuff
g) Shipping Bill
h) ARE 1 for endorsement
i) Bill of Lading
j) Mate receipt
Two times of Schemes Should be provided
Transferable
Non Transferable
1. In Transferable scheme the duty credit can be
utilized for import of various goods except
capital goods and can be sold in market at
premium
2. In Non Transferable scheme the duty credit
can be utilized. For import of various goods
except capital goods, and cannot be sold in
the market.
Commercial invoice shall be generated.

Bill of lading shall be used as reference for
generating commercial invoice.
(A)
Accounting entries shall be passed to respective
accounts.

documents in SAP. This is developed through
ABAP.
( C)
Not in Standard SAP . Shall be generated using

(C)
ABAP Functionality.
6.12.12 Export Diversion

Page 144 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
6.12.12. Export
1
Diversion

suggested by CVS IT
In case of failure of export of material due to some

reasons, either material is brought back to town or
sold in India on payment of duty.

Material which is not delivered to exporter shall
be diverted to other local /domestic customer
after completing excise legal formalities. Then
sale of this material is similar to normal sale
( i.e. delivery , billing ,excise invoice shall be
generated in the name of local / domestic
customers ).
Gaps/Comments
(A)

6.12.13. Fixing Credit
1
Limit
Calculating
6.12.13.
Credit
2
Exposure
6.12.13. Performing
3
Credit Check
This requirement shall be mapped similar to the As same as direct

domestic sales.
sales
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -

Receipt of
6.12.14.
Customer
1
Complaint
6.12.14. Quality
2
Notification
6.12.14. Complaint
3
Settlements
6.12.14. Customer
4
Returns
( Sales Return)

domestic sales.
As same as direct
sales
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -

system. In case of export diversion material will be
return to plant or will be sold to other customer
from port.
Returns shall be handled on the SAP system in

the following way:
1.
2.
3.

reference to the Sales Order or Invoice
against which the complaint is being made.
Returns Order.
Goods Issue is performed which brings
back into any one of the following
(ISPATs) stock.
As same as direct
sales
Block stock returns

Page 145 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
4.
5.
6.
6.12.14.
Debit Memo
5
6.12.14.
Credit Memo
6
Block Stock
Gaps/Comments

approve the complaint, the billing block
shall be released else a rejection indicator
shall be initiated.
material, a credit memo shall be created
for even the full amount. Alternatively, a
partial credit memo shall be created for
certain items even if the customer returns
the entire quantity, by reducing him
quantity in the Return Order to the
quantity to be credited.
The Customer shall be supplied
replacement goods by entering a reason
for rejection for the appropriate items in
the return order. Then a free of charge
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do
- do
6.13 Sales to Nepal and Bhutan Exports:

6.13.1.1 Sales Plan

domestic sales
As same as direct
sales

Page 146 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

Sales Activity
Planning
Recording
6.13.2.3
Sales Activity
Sales
6.13.2.4
Promotions
6.13.2.2

suggested by CVS IT

domestic sales
Gaps/Comments
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do - do -
- do - do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -

Processing
Capability
6.13.3.2
Confirmation
Process
Delivery Date
Process
Inquiry
6.13.3.4
Creation
Inquiry
6.13.3.6
Deletion
- do - do - do -

Quotation
6.13.4.1
Creation
Quotation
6.13.4.2
Amendment
6.13.5 Payment Guarantees process

Payment
6.13.5.1 Guarantees
process
do -
- do -
- do -
6.13.6 Export Sales Contracts

Export Sales
6.13.6.1
Contracts
- do -
- do -
- do -

6.13.7.1 Proforma
Same as Export Sale
Same as Export Sale
Same as Export Sale

Page 147 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
Invoice
Sales Order
6.13.7.2
( work order)
Sales Order
6.13.7.3
Creation
Partner
6.13.7.4
Allocations
Material
6.13.7.5 Specification
Entry
Availability
Check &
6.13.7.6
Delivery Date
Determination
Terms &
6.13.7.7
Conditions
& Discounts

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
.1 Basic Price (this price should be picked up

from the Price List Master and manual changes
shall be done here, period wise reports should
be made available for deviation of actual price
.2 Excise (Excise should be applicable to all sales
other than under bond exemption Sales.) the
duty amount should be transferred to the
respective country authorities.
.3 Basic Price should be maintained in foreign
currency.
4. There should be a means for calculating the
obtained from DIC (Marketing) or competent
level.
1.
1-4 & 6 (A)

Basic Price shall be maintained as a condition 5 under exploration
Currency to be maintained in the customer
For Sale from factory, Excise for a material is
2.
3.
4.
5.

Order.
Disallowance of Blank fields for Freight
Condition Types shall be allowed.
Freight Condition Types shall be
automatically defaulted based on Pricing
Procedure Determination.
Condition type is to be maintained for NSR
Page 148 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
6.
Gaps/Comments
which will pick up the cost price of the

calculate the contribution, which if
negative, workflow will be generated for
approval from competent authority.
6.13.8 Sales Order Processing

6.13.8.1
6.13.8.2
6.13.8.3
6.13.8.4
Sales Order
Creation
Sales Order
Amendment
Sales Order
Deletion
Order
Cancellation
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
Following are the preshipment documents are

required and capture in SAP:
a) Nepal Invoice
Preshipment
6.13.8.5
Documents
b)
c)
f)
g)
Packing List
Excise Invoice
Excise Certificate
ARE -1

documents in SAP. This shall be done through
ABAP.
As same as Direct
Export sales.
6.13.9 Delivery
Gate Entry
System
6.13.9.2
Process shall be same as domestic sales.

domestic sales.
Similar to the
domestic sales.
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
Page 149 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
Weighment
Delivery Order
6.13.9.4 Creation &
Picking
6.13.9.5 Loading
Final
Weighment
Post Goods
6.13.9.7
Issue
6.13.9.6

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
6.13.10 Billing
1.
2.
Excise Invoice
6.13.10.
Generation /
1
Selection
Excise Invoice should be generated without

1) Payment of duty or
2) With Bond
Commercial
6.13.10. Invoice
2
Creation Billing
6.13.10.
L.R.Preparation
3

3.

automatically or manually after generation
of billing document. To generate automatic
excise invoice billing type is assign to
delivery type. Or can be generated
manually using J1II Transaction (with
reference to billing.)
No excise will be charged under Intimation
in form of Bond B1 ( ARE1 Form).
Invoice under bond/ certificate name shall
be printed on the invoice.
4.
RG1 register (A Finish Good stock

Register) shall get updated after PGI and
RT12 (Monthly Return Register) shall get
updated after generation & posting of
excise invoice.
5.
Excise invoice is printed with the help of

output determination corresponds to the
(A)

domestic sales
(A)
LR Shell be prepared by capturing Delivery and

Invoice Details.
(C)
Page 150 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT

documents in SAP. This can capture through
ABAP.
6.13.10. Post Shipment

4
Documents
Gaps/Comments
(C)
6.13.11 Credit Control

1
Limit
Calculating
6.13.11.
Credit
2
Exposure
6.13.11. Performing
3
Credit Check

domestic sales
Similar to the
domestic sales
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -

Receipt of
6.13.12.
Customer
1
Complaint
6.13.12. Quality
2
Notification
6.13.12. Complaint
3
Settlements
6.13.12. Customer
4
Returns ( Sales
Return)

domestic sales
Similar to the
domestic sales
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -

return to plant or will be sold to other customer from
port.

the following way:
1.
2.
Returns Order.
3.
into any one of the following (ISPATs) stock.
4.
Block stock returns
Block Stock
Similar to the
domestic sales

Page 151 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
6.13.12. Free of Charge

5
Delivery

suggested by CVS IT
Free of Charge
6.13.12.
Subsequent
6
Delivery
6.13.12.
Debit Memo
7
6.13.12.
Credit Memo
8

initiated.
5.
material, a credit memo shall be created for
even the full amount. Alternatively, a partial
credit memo shall be created for certain
items even if the customer returns the entire
quantity, by reducing him quantity in the
Return Order to the quantity to be credited.
6.
7.
More discussion is needed for Export
diversion in case of material directly sold to
outside customers (as far as excise
formalities are concerned).
domestic sales
Gaps/Comments
Similar to the
domestic sales
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
6.14 Export Support Sales:

6.14.1.1 Sales Plan
As same as domestic sales

domestic sales.
Similar to the
domestic sales


domestic sales
Similar to the
domestic sales
Page 152 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
Sales Activity
Planning
Recording
6.14.2.3
Sales Activity
Sales
6.14.2.4
Promotions
6.14.2.2

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do - do -
- do - do -

Processing
Capability
6.14.3.2
Confirmation
Process
Delivery Date
Process
Inquiry
6.14.3.4
Creation
Inquiry
6.14.3.6
Deletion
- do - do - do -

6.14.4.1 Commission
6.14.4.2
Discounts
before sale
Discounts
during sale
Discounts after
6.14.4.4
Sale
Special Cash
6.14.4.5
Discounts
6.14.4.3
% of Commission should be given on the base of

basic value to the commission Agents

Export sales.

domestic sales
(A)
Similar to the
domestic sales
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -

Quotation
6.14.5.1
Creation
- do -
Page 153 Of 361
6.14.5.2
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Quotation
Amendment
- do -
- do -
- do -

Payment
6.14.6.1 Guarantees
process
- do -
- do -
- do -
6.14.7 Export Support Sales Contracts

6.14.7.1
Export support
Sales Contracts
- do -
- do -
- do -

6.14.8.1
6.14.8.2
6.14.8.3
6.14.8.4
6.14.8.5
6.14.8.6
6.14.8.7
6.14.8.8
Proforma
Invoice
Sales Order
( work order)
Sales Order
Creation
Partner
Allocations
Material
Specification
Entry
Availability
Check &
Delivery Date
Determination
Terms &
Conditions
Pricing, Taxes
& Discounts
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do
1.
2.
3.
4.
Basic Price (this price should be picked up

shall be done here, period wise reports should be
made available for deviation of actual price with
the price list price)
Excise (Excise should be applicable to all sales
other than under bond exemption Sales)
Basic Price should be maintained in Indian
currency.
Sales Tax (full Provision should be made for the
1. Basic Price shall be maintained as a condition 1-4 & 6,7,8,9- (A)

2. For Sale from factory, Excise for a material is
3. Sales Tax shall be calculated on the following
basis:
If the Region of Sending Plant & Region

Page 154 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
5.
6.
7.
applicability of the sales tax for other than direct

export).
All types of discounts which are defined in
Discounts / Rebates should not allow blank
fields.
By default system should select / show the
following and ask the value for the following
types of discounts as per the type of sales order.
Export Support Rebate for Export Support

Sales
Other discounts
Freight Rebate
There should be a means for calculating the Net
Sales Realisation which is achieved by
subtracting the minimum floor price from the net
sales price. If the NSR is negative, approval for
sales at the given price is to be obtained from
DIC (Marketing) or competent level.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Gaps/Comments
of Ship to Party (Region in Customer

Master) is same, then Local Sales Tax is
applicable.
For Other sales than direct Sale the value
is picked up from the Local Sales tax
condition type, which is assigned a value
for that combination of Region of Sending
Plant & region of Ship-to-Party.
If the Region of Sending Plant & Region
of Ship to Party (Region in Customer
Master) is different, then Central Sales
Tax is applicable. The value is picked up
from the Central Sales tax condition type,
which is assigned a value for that
combination of Region of Sending Plant &
region of Ship-to-Party.
Also, if the customer produces a Sales
tax concession Form then the Sales Tax
shall be calculated as per the form.(e.g.
C Form).
Freight Value shall be calculated out as

per the Incoterms maintained in the
Customer Master, which are defaulted into
the Sales Order.
Disallowance of Blank fields for Freight
Condition Types shall be provided.
Freight Condition Types shall be
automatically determined based on Pricing
Condition type is to be maintained for
NSR which will pick up the cost price of the
calculate the contribution, which if negative;
workflow will be generated for approval from
competent authority.
As same as domestic
sales
Page 155 Of 361
6
6.14.8.1
0
6.14.8.1
1
6.14.8.1
2
6.14.8.1
3
Processes
in Sales
Follow-up
Actions
Sales Order
Amendment
Sales Order
Deletion
Order
Cancellation

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -

domestic sales.
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
6.14.9 Delivery
6.14.9.2
6.14.9.3
6.14.9.4
6.14.9.5
6.14.9.6
6.14.9.7
Gate Entry
System
Empty Vehicle
Weighment
Delivery Order
Creation &
Picking
Loading
Final
Weighment
Post Goods
Issue
6.14.10 Billing
6.14.10. Excise Invoice
1
Generation /
Selection
Excise Invoice should be generated without

1. payment of duty or
2. With Bond
1.
2.
3.
4.

automatically or manually after generation
of billing document. To generate automatic
excise invoice billing type is assign to
delivery type. Or can be generated
manually using J1II Transaction (with
reference to billing.)
No excise will be charged under Intimation
in form of Bond B1 ( ARE1 Form).
Invoice under bond/ certificate name shall
be printed on the invoice.
No excise duty shall be debited to the
(A)
Page 156 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
5.
6.
7.
Commercial
6.14.10. Invoice
2
Creation Billing
6.14.10.
L.R.Preparation
3

Gaps/Comments
CENVAT account, and so no accounting

entries shall be generated. However, the
sale is marked as a export support sale
and the system generates an outgoing
excise invoice.
Even though the excise duty is zero, when
the excise invoice is printed, the system
calculates the duty for the purposes of
printing.
RG1 register ( A Finish Good stock
Register) shall get updated after PGI and
RT12 (Monthly Return Register ) shall get
updated after generation & posting of
excise invoice.
Excise invoice is printed with the help of
output determination corresponds to the

Invoice Details.
Same as domestic
sales.
(C)

1
Limit
Calculating
6.14.11.
Credit
2
Exposure
6.14.11. Performing
3
Credit Check
same as domestic
sales.
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -

Receipt of
6.14.12.
Customer
1
Complaint
Same as domestic
sales.
Page 157 Of 361
6
6.14.12.
2
6.14.12.
3
Processes
in Sales
Quality
Notification
Complaint
Settlements

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -

the following way:
1.
2.
A Billing block shall be maintained in
the Returns Order.
3.
into any one of the following (ISPATs) stock.
Customer
6.14.12.
Returns ( Sales
4
Return)
4.
5.
6.
Block stock returns
Block Stock

initiated.
If the customer returns only some of
the material, a credit memo shall be created
the entire quantity, by reducing him quantity
in the Return Order to the quantity to be
credited.
Same as domestic
sales.
Page 158 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
6.14.12. Free of Charge

5
Delivery
Free of Charge
6.14.12.
Subsequent
6
Delivery
6.14.12.
Debit Memo
7
6.14.12.
Credit Memo
8

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
6.14.13 Others
6.14.13. Recording of
1
shipping Bills
for export
support sale
In pricing the Export Support Subsidy discount

should be activated and made mandatory. Provision
of recording shipping bills and or BRC (Bank
realisation certificate) against the sale on export
support should be there against each invoice against
the bulk despatches in a particular scheduling
Agreement / sales order. Also there should be a
comparison between the export documents we are
supposed to receive and we have actually received.
The provision to be made to indicate the end product
for which the sale has to be made. Based on this the
conversion ratio should be calculated.
CR for 1MT of CR material the raw material
(HR) should be 1.085MT.
GP for 1MT of GP material the raw material
(HR) should be 1.118MT.
Based on the above the system should calculate the
quantity for which the shipping bill and BRC is to be
received. The customer wise sale status to be made
available like the quantity supplied, quantity for
which the shipping bill should be received and actual
shipping bills received.
There should be a clear classification between other
sales and this particular sale.
Export support discount will be mandatory in

(A/C)
export support pricing .
Recording of shipping bills against the export
support sale and accepted conversion ratio for
Shipping bill received against material sold need
to be possible through ABAP workaround.
Page 159 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
6.15 Third Party ( Deemed Export ), CT2 / CT3 Exports Sales:

6.15.1.1 Sales Plan

domestic sales
Similar to the
domestic sales

Sales Activity
Planning
Recording
6.15.2.3
Sales Activity
Sales
6.15.2.4
Promotions
6.15.2.2

domestic sales
Similar to the
domestic sales
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do - do -
- do - do -

6.15.3.2
6.15.3.3
6.15.3.4
6.15.3.5
6.15.3.6
Processing
Capability
Confirmation
Process
Delivery Date
Confirmation
Process
Inquiry
Creation
Inquiry Change
Inquiry
Deletion
- do - do - do -

6.15.4.1 Commission
6.15.4.2 Discounts
% of Commission should be given on the base of

invoice value to the commission Agents
-
Commission and rebate agreement conditions

can be determined.
-
(A)
Page 160 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
before sale
6.15.4.3
Discounts
during sale
Discounts after
Sale
Special Cash
6.15.4.5
Discounts
6.15.4.4

As same as domestic
domestic sales
sales
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -

Quotation
6.15.5.1
Creation
Quotation
6.15.5.2
Amendment

Payment
6.15.6.1 Guarantees
process
do -
- do -
- do -
6.15.7 Third Party Export Sales Contracts

Third Party
6.15.7.1 Export Sales
Contracts
- do -
- do -
- do -

6.15.8.1
6.15.8.2
6.15.8.3
6.15.8.4
6.15.8.5
6.15.8.6
6.15.8.7
Proforma
Invoice
Sales Order
( work order)
Sales Order
Creation
Partner
Allocations
Material
Specification
Entry
Availability
Check &
Delivery Date
Determination
Terms &
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
Page 161 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
Conditions
& Discounts

suggested by CVS IT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Basic Price (this price should be picked up

shall be done here, period wise reports should
be made available for deviation of actual price
Excise element should not be charged incase
of CT2 / CT3 sales.
Sales Tax (full Provision should be made for
the applicability of the sales tax for other than
direct export).
All types of discounts which are defined in
Discounts / Rebates should not allow blank
fields.
By default system should select / show the
following and ask the value for the following
types of discounts as per the type of sales
order.
Export Support Rebate for Export Support

Sales
Other discounts
Freight Rebate
There should be a means for calculating the
obtained from DIC (Marketing) or competent
level.
The CT2 / CT3 master should be linked here to
the sales order. Tracking should be done to the
sale against a particular CT2 master. System
should not allow more despatches than the
CT2 master quantity and value.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Gaps/Comments
Basic Price shall be maintained as a

1-4 , 6,8 & 9 (A)
condition type and shall be picked up from 5 under exploration
the value assigned to the condition type
7-workflow is out of
for that material. Values shall be
scope.
maintained for even customer-material
10- ( C )
combination.
Currency to be maintained in the customer
For Sale from factory, Excise for a material
is picked up from the value assigned to the
chapter-id to which the material is
assigned.
Sales Tax shall be calculated on the
following basis:
If the Region of Sending Plant &

Region of Ship to Party (Region in
Customer Master) is same, then Local
Sales Tax is applicable.
There will be No sales tax for Direct

For Other sales than direct Sale the
value is picked up from the Local Sales
tax condition type, which is assigned a
value for that combination of Region of
Sending Plant & region of Ship-toParty.
If the Region of Sending Plant &

Region of Ship to Party (Region in
Customer Master) is different, then
Central Sales Tax is applicable. The
value is picked up from the Central
Sales tax condition type, which is
assigned a value for that combination
of Region of Sending Plant & region of
Ship-to-Party.
Also, if the customer produces a Sales

tax concession Form then the Sales
Tax shall be calculated as per the form.
(e.g. C Form)
Page 162 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
5.

Order.
6. Disallowance of Blank fields for Freight
Condition Types shall be allowed.
7. Freight Condition Types shall be
automatically defaulted based on Pricing
8. Condition type is to be maintained for NSR
which will pick up the cost price of the
calculate the contribution, which if
negative; workflow will be generated for
approval from competent authority.
9. Pricing will also affect on the basis
10. CT2 / CT3 forms shall be maintained
maintaining form features of SAP CIN
functionality. Value wise tracking of
despatches against particular CT2/CT3
shall be done using ABAP functionality.
6.15.8.1
0
6.15.8.1
1
6.15.8.1
2
6.15.8.1
3
Follow-up
Actions
Sales Order
Amendment
Sales Order
Deletion
Order
Cancellation
As same as domestic
sales
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
6.15.9 Delivery
6.15.9.2
Gate Entry
System

- do -

- do -
As same as domestic
sales
- do -
Page 163 Of 361
6.15.9.3
6.15.9.4
6.15.9.5
6.15.9.6
6.15.9.7
Processes
in Sales
Empty Vehicle
Weighment
Delivery Order
Creation &
Picking
Loading
Final
Weighment
Post Goods
Issue

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
6.15.10 Billing
1.
2.
3.
Excise Invoice
6.15.10.
Generation /
1
Selection
Excise Invoice should be generated with

3. payment of duty or
4. Under Bond
4.
5.
6.
Commercial
6.15.10. Invoice
2
Creation
Billing
6.15.10.
L.R.Preparation
3

Excise invoice shall be created same as

direct sales.
In case of direct export no excise will be
charged under Intimation in form of Bond
B1 (ARE1 Form).
Also in case of CT2/CT3 no excise will be
charged, but excise invoice shall be
created with zero excise duty. And text will
be printed on invoice Against CT2 /CT3
( A / C)
form.
While creating excise invoice all register
posting will be updated.
Provision shall be made so that no excise
invoice will be generated without duty or
bond.
Tracking of CT2/CT3 forms shall be done
using ABAP functionality.

Invoice Details.
As same as domestic
sales
(A)

6.15.1 Fixing Credit
1.1
Limit
As same as domestic
sales
Page 164 Of 361

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
6.15.1 Calculating
1.2
Credit Exposure
- do -
- do -
- do -
6.15.1 Performing
1.3
Credit Check
- do -
Processes
in Sales
- do
- do

6.15.1
2.1
6.15.1
2.2
6.15.1
2.3
6.15.1
2.4
Receipt of
Customer
Complaint
Quality
Notification
Complaint
Settlements
Customer
Returns ( Sales
Return)
As same as domestic
sales
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -

return to plant or will be sold to other customer from
port.

As same as domestic
the following way:
sales
1. A return order is created with / without
2. A Billing block shall be maintained in the
Returns Order.
3. On receiving the returned material, a
Goods Issue is performed which brings
back into any one of the following
(ISPATs) stock.
4.
5.
Block stock returns
Block Stock

approve the complaint, the billing block
shall be released else a rejection indicator
shall be initiated.
material, a credit memo shall be created
Page 165 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
6.
6.15.1 Free of Charge

2.5
Delivery
Free of Charge
6.15.1
Subsequent
2.6
Delivery
6.15.1
Debit Memo
2.7
6.15.1
Credit Memo
2.8
Gaps/Comments
the entire quantity, by reducing him

quantity in the Return Order to the
quantity to be credited.
replacement goods by entering a reason
for rejection for the appropriate items in
the return order. Then a free of charge
As same as domestic
sales
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
- do -
No standard functionality is available to record

bill of lading of third customer.
No standard
functionality is
available to record
bill of lading of
third customer
6.15.13 Others
6.15.1 Recording of
3.1
shipping Bills
and Bill of lading
to avail custom
benefits
Bill of lading of third party export customer on which

export is made should be recorded in the system. So
that custom benefits can be availed.
Page 166 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
6.16 Sale of Services:

6.16.1.1 Sales Plan
As same as direct sales

Hired barges are not getting used for own In case
of Barges , they are billeted to Indorama cement
as per their requirements.
These barges are used by IIL for transportation of
bulk material from ship to jetty and transportation
of pellets from Mandavi Pellets in Goa to Dolvi.
Monthly plan is prepared by IIL purchase deptt as
to which incoming material is to be transported to
the jetty from various places. Barges are hired on
yearly basis from vendors. Few barges are hired on
the spot also. Depending on the arrival of the
ships, the barges are sent from the jetty. Normally
it takes 6 to 12 hours time depending on the tide
position to reach the ship.
If transportation then same is billeted to others for
services.
As same as direct
sales

Sales Activity
Planning
Recording
6.16.2.3
Sales Activity
6.16.2.2
As same as direct
sales
- do - do -

Processing
Capability
6.16.3.2
Confirmation
Process
Inquiry for the services should be generated in the

system.
The marketing person should be able to determine
with the help of the system, whether the Services
requested by customer is available or not.
If no earlier history has been found for that
services, then the Inquiry has to be passed on to
the Production Department for confirmation.
If Production Department confirms the availability,
then inquiry is created.
Inquiry for the services shall be generated with

the system with the service material.
Same as Direct sale.
As same as direct
sales
(A)
Page 167 Of 361
6.16.3.3
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
The Inquiry should be created with the following
fields: Customer Code (Customer Master to be
created, if not existing), Service, Payment terms,
Delivery terms, Quantity of material to be
processed and rate, Delivery Requirement dates,
Mode of Inquiry received, sales employee who is
handling the particular segment / customer.
The Inquiry should be sent automatically to
Production though SAP Mail / Lotus Notes.
The Marketing Person should be able to scan and
attach some important documents to Inquiry, if
required.
Message should be flashed for queries unattended
for more than a specific period.
Inquiry
Creation

Inquiry
6.16.3.5
Deletion

1.
2.
3.
4.
Marketing Person can create the Inquiry with

all details about Customer & services render,
Payment Terms, Expected Delivery Date,
Validity Period for Inquiry etc.
The Inquiry shall be sent to Production users
using SAP Mail. If Lotus Texts in Inquiry shall
be used to record the comments from PP and
QM Users
Attachment of scanned documents to Inquiry
is possible.
A report shall be generated by the system,
which shall display all inquiries for which
there are no follow up activity for a specific
period.
Gaps/Comments
(A/H)
2. Lotus Notes
Integration with
SAP R/3 system
and
Implementation
of Workflow. (H
Not in Scope)
(A)
Subsequent reference documents shall be
available in the standard system.
(A)

6.16.4.1 Quotation
Creation
1.
2.
3.
4.
Quotation should be created with or without

reference to an Inquiry.
1.
1.
Quotation shall be released to customer only
after being approved by the designated authority.
Multiple Quotations should be possible against a
2.
single Inquiry.
There should be provision for entering the details
of negotiations that occurred with the customer
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Ideally, Quotation should be

created with reference to an Inquiry
For new materials, Inquiries are created
temporarily using the service material, which
matches the customer requirement the most.
Now, follow-up action is not possible on the
Inquiry.
As same as direct
sales.
(7)- work flow is
not in a scope.
Payment terms shall be finalized at this level.

If Payment Guarantees are involved in
payment terms, the details shall be
maintained in the Quotation under Payment
Terms.
Ideally, the instruments in Payment
Guarantees should be created at this
juncture and referred in the final quotation.
Using Workflow component of SAP R/3
system can incorporate approval process for
quotation.
Against a single Inquiry, multiple quotations
shall be created until the customer accepts
the quotation.
Page 168 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
The details of the negotiations shall be

entered using the Texts in Quotation.
6.16.4.2
Quotation
Amendment
In case the quotation does not mature to a

firm order, the quotation should be short
closed assigning a reason for rejection to the
items.
As same as direct
sales

Payment
6.16.5.1 Guarantees
process
As same as direct
sales

1.
6.16.6.2
Sales Order
Creation
2.
3.
Partner
Allocations
Availability
Check &
6.16.6.4
Delivery Date
Determination
Terms &
6.16.6.5
Conditions
6.16.6.3
1.
2.
3.
Sales order should be created with / without

reference to a quotation.
Purchase Order Number & Date of the Customer
should be stored in the Sales Order.
Validity of the document (valid from date and
valid to date) should be available.
1.
2.
3.
Ideally a Sales Order should be created with

reference to a quotation.
The Customer Purchase Order Number &
Date fields shall be available for entry.
The validity period of the Sales Order shall be
maintained in the system.
To verify the availability production capacity.
In case of sales of services basic price as a

service charges are charged to the customer.
No excise duty will be attract on the services
provided.
Service tax will be charged on services rendered.
Basic Price shall be maintained as a manual

condition type ,
Service tax shall be calculated on the

basis condition record.
(A)
As same as direct
sales
As same as direct
sales
As same as direct
sales
( A)
As same as direct
sales
Page 169 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
Follow-up
Actions
Sales Order
6.16.6.9
Amendment
0
Deletion
6.16.6.1 Order
1
Cancellation
6.16.6.8

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
As same as direct
sales
As same as direct
sales
As same as direct
sales
As same as direct
sales
6.16.7 Inbound Delivery

6.16.7.1 Gate In system
6.16.7.2
Inbound
delivery
Same as direct Sale.

Material receipt is done at factory by MM. GRN is
prepared. Goods are separately stored or identified
and processes are carried out as per the job work
order. No Cenvat credit is taken on the material used
for job work process.

Shall be handled through MM module
functionality (Process ID 7.3.8).
As same as direct
sales
(A)
6.16.8 Outbound Delivery & Billing

Gate Out
system
Empty Vehicle
6.16.8.2
Weighment
6.16.8.1
Outbound
6.16.8.3
Delivery
6.16.8.4 Loading
6.16.8.5
Final
Weighment
Commercial
Invoice
6.16.8.6
Creation Billing
6.16.8.7 Fixing Credit

Processed material is delivered to Customer or
requested ship to party of the customer.

Shall be handled through MM functionality

( Process ID 7.4.6) .
In case of barge services no delivery shall be
created.
Commercial invoice is generated for the service

rendered to customer.
In case of sale of services of barges yearly
agreement
is
made
with
Indorama.
These
agreements are quantity based. As and when
Indorama uses the barges of IIL, direct billing is
done with reference to the agreement. No excise
duty is charged. Only service tax is charged on the
value.
Commercial invoice shall be generated with

service charges and service tax.
In case of barge services invoice is with reference
to SO only.
Same as direct
Sale.
As same as direct
sales
(A)
As same as direct
sales
As same as direct
sales
(A)
As same as direct
Page 170 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
Limit
Calculating
6.16.8.8 Credit
Exposure
Performing
6.16.8.9
Credit Check

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
sales
As same as direct
sales
As same as direct
sales

Receipt of
6.16.9.1 Customer
Complaint
Quality
6.16.9.2
Notification
Complaint
6.16.9.3
Settlements
6.16.9.4 Debit Memo
Type of complaint is quality complaint.
In case of sales of services type of complaint

shall be quality complaint and shall be handled
as same as direct sales.
As same as direct
sales
As same as
sales
As same as
sales
As same as
sales
As same as
sales
direct
direct
direct
direct
Page 171 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
7. Summary of integration Points

Integration Aspects
Process
FI
Name
5. Master Data Maintenance :
S.No
6.1.1.2
Maintaining
Customer
MM
PP
QM
Currency setting,
Reconciliation
Account,
Payment terms,
Account
Assignment
Group for
Customer
CIN
CO
Maintenance of
ECC,CST,LST
,PAN ,Excise
Indicator for
customer
6.1 Direct Sales (OEM/OAU, Projects, Trade, Assortment and Sale of By-Products):
6.1.1
Sales Plan
6.1.2.1
6.1.2.2
Sales Activities
Sales Activity
On the basis of
Sales Plan
Material
Procurement
Plan Shall be
Determined
On the basis of
Sales Plan
Production plan
shall be
Determined and
MRP for RM.
Material wise Sales

Quantity along with
Customers shall be
transferred into Profitability
Planning of CO-PA from
Sales Plan. All sales related
overhead expenses like
freight, commissions,
rebates, discounts etc.
shall be planned in PA. The
cost of each material
comes from MAP or SP
from the material valuation
record. Then the cost
centre cost is transferred
to profitability planning
Page 172 Of 361
6.1.2.3
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Planning
Sales Activity
Recording
6.1.2.4
Sales
Promotions
6.1.3
Enquiry
Processing
Distribution of
free samples to
prospective
customers.
Sales Promotions
A/c Dr.
Inventory A/C Cr.
6.1.3 Enquiry Processing
6.1.3.1
Enquiry
Receipt
6.1.3.2
Processing
Capability
Confirmation
Process
6.1.3.3
Delivery Date
Confirmation
Process
If the material is
not as per the Ispat
specification new
TDC will be
generated or if not
possible regretted.
Availability
Check shall be
Done
Processing
capability Shall
be conformed
On the basis of
Material
availability at
FG stores
Delivery Date
shall be
determined.
If the Material is
not available at
FG Stores, on
the basis of
production
capacity delivery
date will be
redtermined.
Page 173 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Capability check
will be carried out
6.1.3.4
If new specification
has to be
developed to meet
the customer's
requirement, the
same is to be
created and
maintained through
document
management
system.
Enquiry
Creation
6.1.3.5
Enquiry
Change
6.1.3.6
Enquiry
Deletion
On the basis of
Material
availability at
FG stores
Delivery Date
shall be
redetermined.
If the Material is
not available at
FG Stores, on
the basis of
production
capacity delivery
date will be
redetrmined.

6.1.4
6.1.4.1
6.1.4.2
6.1.4.3
6.1.4.4
Discounts &
Rebates
Discounts
before sale
Discounts
during sale
Rebate
Special Cash
Discounts
6.1.5 Quotation Processing :
Page 174 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
6.1.5.1
Quotation
Creation
6.1.5.2
Quotation
Amendment

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
At the time of quotation

processing, the planned
cost for the material can
be seen. The cost is
derived from the BOM and
routing based on the MAP
of the material. The
planned margin for the
quotation can be arrived
and it is passed to the
condition type - EK02
6.1.6
Payment
Guarantees
Process
On the basis of
mutually agreed
payment terms
Payment
Guarantee
Process shall be
determined

6.1.7.0
Sales Contract
6.1.7.1
Sales Order
Creation
6.1.7.2
6.1.7.3
6.1.7.4
On the basis of
Production
Capacity contract
Acceptance will
be done.
Availability of
material(NCO,
Scrap) will be
Checked
Partner
Allocations
Material
Specification
Entry
Availability
Check &
Delivery Date
Production Order
will be generated
on the base of
schedule Lines
SO - Capability
Check shall be
carried out
Production for
SO shall be
conformed
Page 175 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Determination
6.1.7.5
6.1.7.6
Terms &
Conditions
Excise and
Taxes will be
determined on
the basis of
Given
conditions
Pricing, Taxes
& Discounts
6.1.7.7
Credit Check
6.1.7.8
Follow-up
Actions
6.1.7.9
Sales Order
Amendment
6.1.7.10
Sales Order
Deletion
6.1.7.11
Order
Cancellation
On the Basis of
Decided Credit
limit, Credit
check will be
done.
Production Plan
will re
determined
Production Plan
will re
determined
Production Plan
will re
determined
6.1.8 Delivery
6.1.8.1
6.1.8.2
6.1.8.3
Despatch Plan
Gate Entry Of
Empty Vehicle
Empty Vehicle
Weighment
Page 176 Of 361
6.1.8.4
6.1.8.5
6.1.8.6
6.1.8.7
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Material
availability
Checking,
Batch
Determination
and Picking will
be done from
various FG
stores
Delivery Order
Creation &
Picking
Loading
Final
Weighment
Post Goods
Issue
Accounting
document will be
generated on the
base of material
Document
( Cost of goods
sold account Dr.,
Inventory FG
account Cr. )
Excise Invoice
Generation /
Selection
Excise Invoice
Entry will be
posted
( Excise Duty
paid account
Dr.,Excise duty
payable account
Cr.)
Material
document will
be generated
through PGI
and Inventory
is updated.
and Inventory
is updated.
RG1Stock
updated.
6.1.9 Billing
6.1.9.1
RG23 (A) Will

be updated
and Cenvat
Entries. RT12
entries
updated.
Page 177 Of 361
6.1.9.2
Processes
in Sales
Commercial
Invoice
Creation Billing

suggested by CVS IT
Automatic
Generation of
accounting
document and
posting of entries
into respective
account
(Customer
account Dr.,Sales
account
Cr.,Excise duty
recovered
Cr.,Sales tax
payable Cr.)
Gaps/Comments
All sales values, recoveries,

rebates, commissions,
export benefits, any
accrual expenses like
freight, insurances are
captured from the Billing
Document.
6.1.10 Credit Management.

6.1.10.1
Fixing Credit
Limit
6.1.10.2
Calculating
Credit
Exposure
6.1.10.3
Performing
Credit Check
Credit limit shall

be fixed at FI
level and
controlled at SD
level
Credit limit shall
be fixed at FI
level and
controlled at SD
level
Credit Check on
the basis of
Credit limit

6.1.11.1
Receipt of
Customer
Complaint
Quality related
material complaint
will be taken care
through SD
6.1.11.2
Quality
Notification
Quality related
material Problem, if
any, will be notified
and settled.
Page 178 Of 361
6.1.11.3
6.1.11.4
6.1.11.5
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Complaint
Settlements
Customer
Returns( Sales
Return)
Free of Charge
Delivery
Accounting
Document will be
generated on the
base of credit
note (Customer
Account : Cr
,Sales Discounts
Account : Dr )
Cost of goods
sold account Cr
& Inventory FG
account Dr;
Excise Duty paid
account Cr &
Excise duty
payable account
Dr ;Customer
account Cr ,Sales
account Dr &
Excise duty
recovered Dr (in
case if material
removed on
payment of duty
and return with
excise doc within
six month)
Accounting
Document will be
generated for the
cost of delivery
( Cost of goods
sold account Dr.,
Inventory FG
account Cr. )
Gaps/Comments
Validatation of
complaint against
specifications of
material delivered..
On the basis
of reverse PGI
Inventory is
Updated.
Material
Document will
be Generated
Return material is
sent for quality
inspection .
RG1 and RG23

(A) entry
updated
All sales values, recoveries,

rebates, commissions,
export benefits, any
accrual expenses like
freight, insurances are
captured from the Billing
Document in negative
values
RG23(A) Will
be updated
and Cenvat
Entries
Page 179 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Free of Charge
Subsequent
Delivery
Accounting
Document will be
generated for the
cost of delivery
(Cost of goods
sold account Dr.,
Inventory FG
account Cr.)
Debit Memo
Customer
Account : Dr
Sales Discounts
Account : Cr
Rate Difference
Account : Cr
Interest Received
Account : Cr
Deferential
Excise Duty
will be Paid
6.1.11.8
Credit Memo
Customer
Account : Cr
Sales Discounts
Account : Dr
Deferential
Excise Duty
Claimed back
from Excise
authorities
6.1.12.1
Administrative
Customer
Services
6.1.13.1
Customer
Service
6.1.11.6
6.1.11.7
Gaps/Comments
All credit notes posted are

also updated in PA customer wise credits
6.1.12.1 Administrative Customer Services
6.1.13.1 Customer Service
6.2 Depot Sales, Commission Agent:

Page 180 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
6.2.1.1
Sales Plan
6.2.2.1
Sales Activities
Sales Activity
Planning
Recording
Sales Activity
On the basis of
Sales Plan
Material
Procurement
Plan Shall be
Determined
Gaps/Comments
On the basis of
Sales Plan
Production plan
shall be
Determined
and MRP for
RM.

6.2.2.2
6.2.2.3
6.2.2.4
Sales
Promotions
Sales Promotions
A/c Dr.
Inventory A/C Cr.

6.2.3.1
6.2.3.2
6.2.3.3
6.2.3.4
6.2.3.5
6.2.3.6
Inquiry receipt
Processing
Capability
Confirmation
Process
Delivery Date
Confirmation
Process
Processing
capability Shall
be conformed
On the basis of
Material
availability at
FG stores
Delivery Date
shall be
conformed
If the Material
is not available
at FG Stores,
on the basis of
production
capacity
delivery date
will be
conformed.
Inquiry
Creation
Inquiry Change
Inquiry
Deletion

6.2.4.1
6.2.4.2
Discounts &
Rebates
Discounts
Page 181 Of 361
6.2.4.3
6.2.4.4
6.2.4.5
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
before sale
Discounts
during sale
Discounts after
Sale
Special Cash
Discounts
6.2.5 Quotation
6.2.5.1
6.2.5.2
Quotation
Creation
Quotation
Amendment
6.2.6.1
Payment
Guarantees
process
6.2.7.1
Sales Order
On the basis of
mutually agreed
payment terms
Payment
Guarantee
Process shall be
determined
6.2.7.2
6.2.7.3
6.2.7.4
6.2.7.5
6.2.7.6
Sales Order
Creation
Availability of
material(NCO,
Scrap) will be
Checked
Partner
Allocations
Material
Specification
Entry
Availability
Check &
Delivery Date
Determination
Terms &
Conditions
Production
Order will be
generated on
the base of
schedule Lines
SO Capability
Check shall
be carried
out
Production for
SO shall be
conformed
Page 182 Of 361
6.2.7.7
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Excise and Taxes will

be determined on the
basis of Given
conditions
Pricing, Taxes
& Discounts
6.2.7.8
Credit Check
6.2.7.9
Follow-up
Actions
6.2.7.10
Sales Order
Amendment
6.2.7.11
Sales Order
Deletion
6.2.7.12
Order
Cancellation
6.2.7.13
Depot Indent
6.2.8.1
Despatch Plan
Gate Entry
System
Empty Vehicle
Weighment
Gaps/Comments
On the Basis of
Decided Credit
limit, Credit
check will be
done.
Production Plan
will re
determined
Production Plan
will re
determined
Production Plan
will re
determined
6.2.8 Delivery for Stock Transfer

6.2.8.2
6.2.8.3
6.2.8.4
6.2.8.5
6.2.8.6
Delivery Order
Creation &
Picking for
stock transfer
Material
availability
Checking,
Batch
Determination
and Picking will
be done from
various FG
stores
Loading
Final
Weighment
Page 183 Of 361
6.2.8.7
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Post Goods
Issue
Accounting
document will be
generated on the
base of material
Document
( Cost of goods
sold account Dr.,
Inventory FG
account Cr. )
Material
document will
be generated
through PGI
and Inventry is
updated.
Gaps/Comments
RG1Stock updated.
6.2.9 Stock Transfer Challan/ Material Receipt Note

6.2.9.1
Stock Transfer
Challan
Inventory FG
Account Dr.&
Inventory FG
Account Cr
Material
document will
generated
through PGI
6.2.9.2
Material
Receipt
No accounting
document
Material
document will
generated
RG23(A/D) Will be
updated and Cenvat
Entries.RT12 entries
updated.
6.2.10 Delivery & Billing from Depot

6.2.10.1
6.2.10.2
6.2.10.3
6.2.10.4
6.2.10.5
6.2.10.6
Despatch Plan
Empty Vehicle
Weighment
Material
Picking will be
done from
Depot
Delivery Order
Creation &
Picking
Loading
Final
Weighment
Post Goods
Issue
Accounting
document will be
generated on the
base of material
Document
( Cost of goods
sold account Dr.,
Inventory FG
account Cr. )
Material
document will
be generated
through PGI
and Inventory
is updated.
RG1Stock updated.
Page 184 Of 361
6.2.10.7
6.2.10.8
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Excise Invoice
Generation /
Selection
No accounting
entry is
generated
Commercial
Invoice
Creation Billing
Automatic
Generation of
accounting
document and
posting of entries
into respective
account
(Customer
account Dr.,Sales
account
Cr.,Excise duty
recovered
Cr.,Sales tax
payable Cr.)
Gaps/Comments
RG23 (A) Will be

updated and Cenvat
Entries. RT12 entries
updated.

6.2.11.1
Fixing Credit
Limit
6.2.11.2
Calculating
Credit
Exposure
6.2.11.3
Performing
Credit Check
Credit limit shall

be fixed at FI
level and
controlled at SD
level
Credit limit shall
be fixed at FI
level and
controlled at SD
level
Credit Check on
the basis of
Credit limit
6.2.12.1
Receipt of
Customer
Complaint
Quality
related
material
complaint
will be
validated.
Page 185 Of 361
6.2.12.2
6.2.12.3
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
6.2.12.4
Customer
Returns (Sales
Returns)
6.2.12.5
Free of Charge
Delivery
Gaps/Comments
Quality
related
material
Problem, if
any, will be
notified and
settled.
Quality
Notification
Complaint
Settlements
Accounting
Document will be
generated on the
base of credit
note (Customer
Account : Cr
,Sales Discounts
Account : Dr )
Cost of goods
sold account Cr
& Inventory FG
account Dr;
Excise Duty paid
account Cr &
Excise duty
payable account
Dr ;Customer
account Cr ,Sales
account Dr &
Excise duty
recovered Dr
Accounting
Document will be
generated for the
cost of delivery
(Cost of goods
sold account Dr.,
Inventory FG
account Cr. )
On the base of
Reverse PGI &
Inventory is
Updated.
Material
Document will
be Generated
Return
material is
sent for
quality
inspection
( at plant).
RG23D Stock will be

Updated on the base of
Reversal PGI.
RG23(A) Will be
updated and Cenvat
Entries
Page 186 Of 361
6.2.12.6
6.2.12.7
6.2.12.8
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Free of Charge
Subsequent
Delivery
Accounting
Document will be
generated for the
cost of delivery
(Cost of goods
sold account Dr.,
Inventory FG
account Cr. )
Debit Memo
Customer
Account : Dr
Sales Discounts
Account : Cr
Rate Difference
Account : Cr
Interest Received
Account : Cr
Deferential Excise Duty

will be Paid
Credit Memo
Customer
Account : Cr
Sales Discounts
Account : Dr

Claimed back from
Excise authorities
Gaps/Comments
6.3 Consignment Agent.

6.3.1.1
Sales Plan
6.3.2.1
Sales Activities
Sales Activity
Planning
Recording
Sales Activity
On the basis of
Sales Plan
Material
Procurement
Plan Shall be
Determined
On the basis of
Sales Plan
Production plan
shall be
Determined
and MRP for
RM.

6.3.2.2
6.3.2.3
Page 187 Of 361
6.3.2.4
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Sales
Promotions
Gaps/Comments
Sales Promotions
A/c Dr.
Inventory A/C Cr.

6.3.3.1
6.3.3.2
6.3.3.3
6.3.3.4
6.3.3.5
6.3.3.6
Inquiry receipt
Processing
Capability
Confirmation
Process
Delivery Date
Confirmation
Process
Processing
capability Shall
be conformed
On the basis of
Material
availability at
FG stores
Delivery Date
shall be
conformed
If the Material
is not available
at FG Stores,
on the basis of
production
capacity
delivery date
will be
conformed.
Inquiry
Creation
Inquiry Change
Inquiry
Deletion

6.3.4.1
6.3.4.2
6.3.4.3
6.3.4.4
6.3.4.5
Discounts &
Rebates
Discounts
before sale
Discounts
during sale
Discounts after
Sale
Special Cash
Discounts

6.3.5.1
Quotation
Creation
Page 188 Of 361
6.3.6.1
Processes
in Sales
Payment
Guarantees
process

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
On the basis of
mutually agreed
payment terms
Payment
Guarantee
Process shall be
determined

6.3.7.1
6.3.7.2
6.3.7.3
Consignment
Fill Up
Delivery
Billing
No accounting
entry is posted
No accounting
entry is posted
for Bill. But
excise invoice is
generated.
Excise duty paid
account Dr
Excise duty
payables Cr
6.3.7.4
6.3.7.5
6.3.7.6
No accounting entry is
posted for Bill. But
excise invoice is
generated.
Excise duty paid
account Dr.
Excise duty payables
Cr.
Consignment
Issue
Delivery
Cost of goods
sold account Dr.
Inventory FG
account Cr.
Billing
Consignment
Agent Account
Dr.
To consignment
sales Account
Consignment
commission
account Dr.
Commission
payable account
Cr .
Page 189 Of 361
6.3.7.7
6.3.7.8
6.3.7.9
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Availability
Check &
Delivery Date
Determination
Terms &
Conditions
Production for
SO shall be
conformed

basis of Given
conditions
Pricing, Taxes
& Discounts
6.3.7.10
Credit Check
6.3.7.11
Follow-up
Actions
6.3.7.12
Sales Order
Amendment
6.3.7.13
Sales Order
Deletion
6.3.7.14
Order
Cancellation
Gaps/Comments
On the Basis of
Decided Credit
limit, Credit
check will be
done.
Production Plan
will re
determined
Production Plan
will re
determined
Production Plan
will re
determined
6.4 Scrap Sales:

6.4.1.1
Payment
Guarantees
Process
6.4.3.1
Sales Order
On the basis of
mutually agreed
payment terms
Payment
Guarantee
Process shall be
determined
Page 190 Of 361
6.4.3.2
6.4.3.3
6.4.3.4
6.4.3.5
6.4.3.6
6.4.3.7
6.4.3.8
6.4.3.9
6.4.3.10
6.4.3.11
6.4.3.12
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Availability of
material(NCO,
Scrap) will be
Checked
Sales Order
Creation
Gaps/Comments
SO Capability
Check shall
be carried
out
Partner
Allocations
Material
Specification
Entry
Availability
Check &
Delivery Date
Determination
Terms &
Conditions
basis of Given
conditions
Pricing, Taxes
& Discounts
Credit Check
On the Basis of
Decided Credit
limit, Credit
check will be
done.
Follow-up
Actions
Sales Order
Amendment
Sales Order
Deletion
Order
Cancellation
6.4.4 Delivery
6.4.4.1
6.4.4.2
6.4.4.3
Despatch Plan
Gate Entry
System
Empty Vehicle
Weighment
Page 191 Of 361
6.4.4.4
6.4.4.5
6.4.4.6
6.4.4.7
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Delivery Order
Creation &
Picking
Loading
Final
Weighment
Post Goods
Issue
Accounting
document will be
generated on the
base of material
Document.
(Cost of goods
sold scrap
account Dr. &
Inventory Scrap
account Cr.)
Material
document will
be generated
through PGI
and Inventory
is updated.
RG1Stock updated.
6.4.5 Billing
6.4.5.1
Excise Invoice
Generation /
Selection
Excise Invoice
Entry will be
posted
(Excise duty paid
account Dr. &
Excise duty
payables Cr.)
RG23 (A) Will be

updated and Cenvat
updated.
Page 192 Of 361
6.4.5.2
Processes
in Sales
Commercial
Invoice
Creation Billing

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Automatic
Generation of
accounting
document and
posting of entries
into respective
account
(Customer
account - Dr.
Sales account Cr.
Excise duty
recovered
Account - Cr.
Sales tax
payable Account
- Cr. )
6.5 Railways:
6.5.1.1
Quotation
Creation
6.5.2.1
Payment
Guarantees
Process
On the basis of
mutually agreed
payment terms
Payment
Guarantee
Process shall be
determined
6.5.3 Contracts
6.5.3.1
Contracts
On the basis of
Production
Capacity
contract
Acceptance will
be done.
Page 193 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments

6.5.4.1
6.5.4.2
6.5.4.3
6.5.4.4
6.5.4.5
6.5.4.6
Sales Order
Sales Order
Creation
Availability of
material(NCO,
Scrap) will be
Checked
Partner
Allocations
Material
Specification
Entry
Availability
Check &
Delivery Date
Determination
Terms &
Conditions
6.5.4.7
Pricing, Taxes
& Discounts
6.5.4.8
Follow-up
Actions
6.5.4.9
Sales Order
Amendment
6.5.4.10
Sales Order
Deletion
6.5.4.11
Order
Cancellation
Production
Order will be
generated on
the base of
schedule Lines
SO Capability
Check shall
be carried
out
Production for
SO shall be
conformed

basis of Given
conditions
Production Plan
will re
determined
Production Plan
will re
determined
Production Plan
will re
determined
6.5.5 Delivery
6.5.5.1
6.5.5.2
6.5.5.3
Despatch Plan
Gate Entry
System
Empty Vehicle
Weighment
Page 194 Of 361
6.5.5.4
6.5.5.5
6.5.5.6
6.5.5.7
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Delivery Order
Creation &
Picking
Loading
Final
Weighment
Post Goods
Issue
Accounting
document will be
generated on the
base of material
Document
( Cost of Goods
sold A/c Dr
Finished Goods
Inventory Cr )
Excise Invoice
Generation /
Selection
Excise Invoice
Entry will be
posted
( Excise duty
paid account
Dr
Excise duty
payable account
Cr )
Material
document will
be generated
through PGI
and Inventory
is updated.
RG1Stock updated.
6.5.6 Billing
6.5.6.1
RG23 (A) Will be

updated and Cenvat
updated.
Page 195 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
6.5.6.2
Commercial
Invoice
Creation Billing
6.5.6.3
L.R.Preparation
Gaps/Comments
Automatic
Generation of
accounting
document and
posting of entries
into respective
account
(Customer
account - Dr.,
Railway Sales
account - Cr.,
Excise duty
recovered
Account - Cr. &
Sales tax
payable Account
- Cr.)

6.5.7.1
Fixing Credit
Limit
Credit limit shall

be fixed at FI
level and
controlled at SD
level
6.5.7.2
Calculating
Credit
Exposure
"
6.5.7.3
Performing
Credit Check
Credit Check on
the basis of
Credit limit
6.5.8.1
Receipt of
Customer
Complaint
Quality
related
material
complaint
will be taken
care through
SD
Page 196 Of 361
6.5.8.2
6.5.8.3
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
6.5.8.4
Customer
Returns(Sales
Return)
6.5.8.5
Free of Charge
Delivery
Gaps/Comments
Quality
related
material
Problem, if
any, will be
notified and
settled.
Quality
Notification
Complaint
Settlements
Accounting
Document will be
generated on the
base of credit
note (Customer
Account : Cr
Sales Discounts
Account : Dr )
Cost of goods
sold account Cr
& Inventory FG
account Dr;
Excise Duty paid
account Cr &
Excise duty
payable account
Dr ;Customer
account Cr ,Sales
account Dr &
Excise duty
recovered Dr
Accounting
Document will be
generated for the
cost of delivery
(Cost of goods
sold account Dr.,
Inventory FG
account Cr. )
Inventory is
Updated.
Material
Document will
be Generated
Return
material is
sent for
quality
inspection .
RG1 and RG23 (A)

entry updated
RG23(A) Will be
updated and Cenvat
Entries
Page 197 Of 361
6.5.8.6
6.5.8.7
6.5.8.8
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Free of Charge
Subsequent
Delivery
Accounting
Document will be
generated for the
cost of delivery
(Cost of goods
sold account Dr.,
Inventory FG
account Cr. )
Debit Memo
Customer
Account : Dr
Sales Discounts
Account : Cr
Rate Difference
Account : Cr
Interest Received
Account : Cr

will be Paid
Credit Memo
Customer
Account : Cr
Sales Discounts
Account : Dr

Claimed back from
Excise authorities
Gaps/Comments
6.6 Barter Sales:

6.6.1.1
6.6.1.2
Inquiry receipt
Processing
Capability
Confirmation
Process
6.6.1.3
Delivery Date
Confirmation
Process
6.6.1.4
Inquiry
Processing
capability Shall
be conformed
On the basis of
Material
availability at
FG stores
Delivery Date
shall be
conformed
If the Material
is not available
at FG Stores,
on the basis of
production
capacity
delivery date
will be
conformed.
Page 198 Of 361
6.6.1.5
6.6.1.6
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Creation
Inquiry Change
Inquiry
Deletion

6.6.2.1
6.6.2.2
Quotation
Creation
Quotation
Amendment

6.6.3.1
6.6.3.2
6.6.3.3
6.6.3.4
6.6.3.5
Sales Order
Sales Order
Creation
Availability of
material(NCO,
Scrap) will be
Checked
Partner
Allocations
Material
Specification
Entry
Availability
Check &
Delivery Date
Determination
6.6.3.6
Pricing, Taxes
& Discounts
6.6.3.7
Sales Order
Amendment
6.6.3.8
Sales Order
Deletion
6.6.3.9
Order
Cancellation
Production
Order will be
generated on
the base of
schedule Lines
SO Capability
Check shall
be carried
out
Production for
SO shall be
conformed
basis of Given
conditions
Production Plan
will re
determined
Production Plan
will re
determined
Production Plan
will re
determined
6.6.4 Delivery
Page 199 Of 361
6
6.6.4.1
6.6.4.2
6.6.4.3
6.6.4.4
6.6.4.5
6.6.4.6
6.6.4.7
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Despatch Plan
Gate Entry
System
Empty Vehicle
Weighment
Delivery Order
Creation &
Picking
Loading
Final
Weighment
Post Goods
Issue
Accounting
document will be
generated on the
base of material
Document ( Cost
of Goods sold
A/c Dr
Finished Goods
Inventory Cr )
Excise Invoice
Generation /
Selection
Excise Invoice
Entry will be
posted ( Excise
duty paid
account Dr. &
Excise duty
payable account
Cr )
Material
document will
be generated
through PGI
and Inventory
is updated.
RG1Stock updated.
6.6.5 Billing
6.6.5.1
RG23 (A) Will be

updated and Cenvat
updated.
Page 200 Of 361
6.6.5.2
Processes
in Sales
Commercial
Invoice
Creation Billing

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Automatic
Generation of
accounting
document and
posting of entries
into
Customer
account - Dr.
,FG Sales
account - Cr.
,Excise duty
recovered
Account - Cr. &
Sales tax
payable Account
- Cr
6.6.6.1
Receipt of
Customer
Complaint
6.6.6.2
Quality
Notification
6.6.6.3
Complaint
Settlements
Quality
related
material
complaint
will be taken
care through
SD
Quality
related
material
Problem, if
any, will be
notified and
settled.
Accounting
Document will be
generated on the
base of credit
note
Page 201 Of 361
6.6.6.4
Processes
in Sales
Customer
Returns

suggested by CVS IT
Cost of goods
sold account Cr
& Inventory FG
account Dr;
Excise Duty paid
account Cr &
Excise duty
payable account
Dr ;Customer
account Cr ,Sales
account Dr &
Excise duty
recovered Dr
Inventory is
Updated.
Return
material is
sent for
quality
inspection .
Gaps/Comments
RG1 and RG23 (A)

entry updated
6.7 Auction Sales

6.7.1.1
Payment
Guarantees
process
6.7.2.1
Sales Order
6.7.2.2
Sales Order
Creation
On the basis of
mutually agreed
payment terms
Payment
Guarantee
Process shall be
determined
6.7.2.3
6.7.2.4
6.7.2.5
Availability of
material(NCO,
Scrap) will be
Checked
Partner
Allocations
Material
Specification
Entry
Terms &
Conditions
Page 202 Of 361
6.7.2.6
6.7.2.7
6.7.2.8
6.7.2.9
6.7.2.10
6.7.2.11
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT

basis of Given
conditions
Pricing, Taxes
& Discounts
Credit Check
Gaps/Comments
On the Basis of
Decided Credit
limit, Credit
check will be
done.
Follow-up
Actions
Sales Order
Amendment
Sales Order
Deletion
Order
Cancellation
6.7.3 Delivery
6.7.3.1
6.7.3.2
6.7.3.3
6.7.3.4
6.7.3.5
6.7.3.6
6.7.3.7
Despatch Plan
Gate Entry
System
Empty Vehicle
Weighment
Delivery Order
Creation &
Picking
Loading
Final
Weighment
Post Goods
Issue
Accounting
document will be
generated on the
base of material
Document
( Cost of goods
sold account- Dr.
&
Inventory FG
account - Cr. )
Material
document will
be generated
through PGI
and Inventory
is updated.
RG1Stock updated.
Page 203 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
6.7.4 Billing
6.7.4.1
Excise Invoice
Generation /
Selection
6.7.4.2
Commercial
Invoice
Creation Billing
Excise Invoice
Entry will be
posted
( Excise duty
paid account
Dr
Excise duty
payable account
Cr )
Automatic
Generation of
accounting
document and
posting of entries
into
Customer
account - Dr.
,Sales account Cr. ,Excise duty
recovered
Account - Cr. &
Sales tax
payable Account
- Cr .
RG23(A) Will be
updated and Cenvat
updated.

Page 204 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
6.7.5.1
Fixing Credit
Limit
6.7.5.2
Calculating
Credit
Exposure
6.7.5.3
Performing
Credit Check

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Credit limit shall

be fixed at FI
level and
controlled at SD
level
Credit limit shall
be fixed at FI
level and
controlled at SD
level
Credit Check on
the basis of
Credit limit
6.7.6.1
Receipt of
Customer
Complaint
6.7.6.2
Quality
Notification
6.7.6.3
Complaint
Settlements
Quality
related
material
complaint
will be taken
care through
SD
Quality
related
material
Problem, if
any, will be
notified and
settled.
Accounting
Document will be
generated on the
base of credit
note
Page 205 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
6.7.6.4
Customer
Returns
6.7.6.5
Free of Charge
Delivery
6.7.6.6
Free of Charge
Subsequent
Delivery
6.7.6.7
Debit Memo
Cost of goods
sold account Cr
& Inventory FG
account Dr;
Excise Duty paid
account Cr &
Excise duty
payable account
Dr ;Customer
account Cr ,Sales
account Dr &
Excise duty
recovered Dr
Accounting
Document will be
generated for the
cost of delivery
( Cost of goods
sold account Dr.,
Inventory FG
account Cr. )
Accounting
Document will be
generated for the
cost of delivery
( Cost of goods
sold account Dr.,
Inventory FG
account Cr. )
Inventory is
Updated.
Material
Document will
be Generated
Customer
Account : Dr
Sales Discounts
Account : Cr
Rate Difference
Account : Cr
Interest Received
Account : Cr
Return
material is
sent for
quality
inspection .
Gaps/Comments
RG1 and RG23 (A)

entry updated
RG23(A) Will be
updated and Cenvat
Entries

will be Paid
Page 206 Of 361
6.7.6.8
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Credit Memo
Customer
Account : Cr
Sales Discounts
Account : Dr
Gaps/Comments

Claimed back from
Excise authorities
6.8 Free Samples

6.8.1.1
6.8.1.2
Sales Activities
Recording
Sales Activity

6.8.2.1
Inquiry
Processing

6.8.3.1
6.8.3.2
6.8.3.3
6.8.3.4
6.8.3.5
Sales Order
Creation
Availability of
material(NCO,
Scrap) will be
Checked
Partner
Allocations
Material
Specification
Entry
Availability
Check &
Delivery Date
Determination
Terms &
Conditions
6.8.3.6
Pricing, Taxes
& Discounts
6.8.3.7
Follow-up
Actions
6.8.3.8
Sales Order
Amendment
Production
Order will be
generated on
the base of
schedule Lines
SO Capability
Check shall
be carried
out
Production for
SO shall be
conformed

basis of Given
conditions
Production Plan
will re
determined
Page 207 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
6.8.3.9
Sales Order
Deletion
6.8.3.10
Order
Cancellation

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Production Plan
will re
determined
Production Plan
will re
determined
6.8.4 Delivery
6.8.4.1
6.8.4.2
6.8.4.3
6.8.4.4
6.8.4.5
6.8.4.6
6.8.4.7
Despatch Plan
Gate Entry
System
Empty Vehicle
Weighment
Delivery Order
Creation &
Picking
Loading
Final
Weighment
Post Goods
Issue
Accounting
document will be
generated on the
base of material
Document
(Where samples
are issued
against delivery,
Cost of Goods
sold A/c - Dr. &
Finished Goods
Inventory Cr. )
Excise Invoice
Generation /
Selection
Excise Invoice
Entry will be
posted (Excise
duty paid
account Dr. &
Excise duty
payable account
Cr. )
Material
document will
be generated
through PGI
and Inventory
is updated.
RG1Stock updated.
6.8.5 Billing
6.8.5.1
RG23 (A) Will be

updated and Cenvat
updated.
Page 208 Of 361
6.8.5.2
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Commercial
Invoice
Creation Billing
Gaps/Comments
Automatic
Generation of
accounting
document and
posting of entries
into respective
account
6.9 Third Party Sale

6.9.1.1
Sales Plan
6.9.2.1
Sales Activities
Sales Activity
Planning
Recording
Sales Activity
On the basis of
Sales Plan
Material
Procurement
Plan Shall be
Determined
On the basis of
Sales Plan
Production plan
shall be
Determined
and MRP for
RM.

6.9.2.2
6.9.2.3

6.9.3.1
6.9.3.2
6.9.3.3
6.9.3.4
6.9.3.5
Inquiry receipt
Processing
Capability
Confirmation
Process
Delivery Date
Confirmation
Process
Processing
capability Shall
be conformed
On the basis of
Material
availability at
FG stores
Delivery Date
shall be
conformed
If the Material
is not available
at FG Stores,
on the basis of
production
capacity
delivery date
will be
conformed.
Inquiry
Creation
Inquiry Change
Page 209 Of 361
6.9.3.6
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Inquiry
Deletion
6.9.4 Discounts & Rebates for making quotation

6.9.4.1
6.9.4.2
6.9.4.3
6.9.4.4
6.9.4.5
Discounts &
Rebates
Discounts
before sale
Discounts
during sale
Discounts after
Sale
Special Cash
Discounts

6.9.5.1
6.9.5.2
Quotation
Creation
Quotation
Amendment
6.9.6.1
Payment
Guarantees
Process
6.9.7.1
Contracts
6.9.8.1
Sales Order
Sales Order
Creation
Partner
Allocations
Material
Specification
Entry
Availability
Check &
On the basis of
mutually agreed
payment terms
Payment
Guarantee
Process shall be
determined
6.9.7 Contracts
6.9.8.2
6.9.8.3
6.9.8.4
6.9.8.5
Page 210 Of 361
6.9.8.6
6.9.8.7
6.9.8.8
6.9.8.9
6.9.8.10
6.9.8.11
6.9.8.12
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Delivery Date
Determination
Terms &
Conditions

basis of Given
conditions Excise
invoice to be raised by
the third party on their
final customer while
commercial invoice will
be raised by IIL on
the final customer.
Pricing, Taxes
& Discounts
Credit Check
On the Basis of
Decided Credit
limit, Credit
check will be
done.
Follow-up
Actions
Sales Order
Amendment
Sales Order
Deletion
Order
Cancellation
6.9.9 Delivery to Processor

6.9.9.1
6.9.9.2
6.9.9.3
6.9.9.4
Gate Entry
Empty Vehicle
Weighment
Delivery Order
Creation &
Picking
Loading
Page 211 Of 361
6.9.9.5
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Final
Weighment
6.9.9.6
Post Goods
Issue
6.9.9.7
L.R.Preparation
6.9.10.1
Delivery To
Customer
6.9.10.2
Commercial
Invoice
Creation Billing
Accounting
document will be
generated on the
base of material
Document ( Cost
of goods sold
account: Dr. &
Inventory FG
account : Cr )
Material
document will
be generated
through PGI
and Inventory
is updated.
RG1Stock updated.
6.9.10 Delivery & Billing To Customer

No Entries will
be passed
Automatic
Generation of
accounting
document and
posting of entries
into Customer
account Dr. &
Sales account
Cr )

6.9.11.1
Fixing Credit
Limit
6.9.11.2
Calculating
Credit
Exposure
Credit limit shall

be fixed at FI
level and
controlled at SD
level
Credit limit shall
be fixed at FI
level and
controlled at SD
level
Page 212 Of 361
6.9.11.3
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Performing
Credit Check
Gaps/Comments
Credit Check on
the basis of
Credit limit
6.9.12.1
Receipt of
Customer
Complaint
6.9.12.2
Quality
Notification
6.9.12.3
Complaint
Settlements
6.9.12.4
Customer
Returns ( Sales
Return)
Quality
related
material
complaint
will be taken
care through
SD
Quality
related
material
Problem, if
any, will be
notified and
settled.
Accounting
Document will be
generated on the
base of credit
note
Cost of goods
sold account Cr
& Inventory FG
account Dr;
Excise Duty paid
account Cr &
Excise duty
payable account
Dr ;Customer
account Cr ,Sales
account Dr &
Excise duty
recovered Dr
Inventory is
Updated.
Return
material is
sent for
quality
inspection .
RG1 and RG23 (A)

entry updated
Page 213 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
6.9.12.5
Free of Charge
Delivery
6.9.12.6
Free of Charge
Subsequent
Delivery
6.9.12.7
6.9.12.8
Accounting
Document will be
generated for the
cost of delivery
( Cost of goods
sold account Dr.,
Inventory FG
account Cr. )
Accounting
Document will be
generated for the
cost of delivery
( Cost of goods
sold account Dr.,
Inventory FG
account Cr. )
Material
Document will
be Generated
Gaps/Comments
RG23(A) Will be
updated and Cenvat
Entries
Debit Memo
Customer
Account : Dr
Sales Discounts
Account : Cr
Rate Difference
Account : Cr
Interest Received
Account : Cr

will be Paid
Credit Memo
Customer
Account : Cr
Sales Discounts
Account : Dr

Claimed back from
Excise authorities
6.10 Group Company

6.10.1. Order
6.10.1.1
6.10.1.2
Sales Transport
Order
Material
Specification
Entry
Page 214 Of 361
6.10.1.3
6.10.1.4
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Availability
Check &
Delivery Date
Determination
Pricing, Taxes
Gaps/Comments
Production for
SO shall be
conformed
6.10.2. Delivery
6.10.2.1
6.10.2.2
6.10.2.3
6.10.2.4
6.10.2.5
6.10.2.6
Despatch Plan
Gate Entry
System
Empty Vehicle
Weighment
Delivery Order
Creation &
Picking
Loading
Final
Weighment
Post Goods
Issue
Accounting
document will be
generated on the
base of material
Document
( Cost of Goods
sold A/c - Dr. &
Finished Goods
Inventory
Cr . )
6.10.3.1
Excise &
commercial
Invoice
Generation /
Selection
Accounting
Entries are
:-Excise duty
paid account Dr. & Excise duty
payable account
Cr
6.10.3.2
L.R.Preparation
6.10.2.7
Material
document will
be generated
through PGI
and Inventory
is updated.
RG1Stock updated.
6.10.3 Billing
Page 215 Of 361
6.10.3.3
6.10.3.4
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Debit Memo
Customer
Account : Dr
Sales Discounts
Account : Cr
Rate Difference
Account : Cr
Interest Received
Account : Cr

will be Paid
Credit Memo
Customer
Account : Cr
Sales Discounts
Account : Dr

Claimed back from
Excise authorities
Gaps/Comments
6.11 Stock Transfer / Captive Consumption

6.11.1 Stock transport Order Processing & Execution
6.11.1.1
6.11.1.2
6.11.1.3
6.11.1.4
Sales Transport
Order
Material
Specification
Entry
Availability
Check &
Delivery Date
Determination
Pricing &,
Taxes
6.11.2 Delivery
6.11.2.1
6.11.2.2
6.11.2.3
6.11.2.4
Empty Vehicle
Weighment
Delivery Order
Creation &
Picking
Loading
Final
Weighment
Page 216 Of 361
6.11.2.5
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Post Goods
Issue
Accounting
document will be
generated on the
base of material
Document
(Inventory semifinished
goods/finished
goods Dr. &
Inventory semifinished
goods/finished
goods Cr. )
Material
document will
be generated
through PGI
and Inventory
is updated.
Gaps/Comments
RG1Stock updated.
6.11.3 Billing
6.11.3.1
Excise Invoice
Generation /
Selection
In case of
captive
consumption no
accounting entry
for excise liability
is posted. For
stock transfers
excise liability
entry is
generated.
Excise duty paid
account Dr
Excise duty
payable account
Cr
RG23 (A) Will be

updated and Cenvat
updated.
6.12 Direct Export Sales

6.12.1.1
Sales Plan
On the basis of
Sales Plan
Material
Procurement
Plan Shall be
Determined
On the basis of
Sales Plan
Production plan
shall be
Determined
and MRP for
Page 217 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
RM.

6.12.2.1
6.12.2.2
6.12.2.3
6.12.2.4
Sales Activities
Sales Activity
Planning
Recording
Sales Activity
Sales
Promotions
Sales Promotions
A/c Dr.
Inventory A/C Cr.

6.12.3.1
6.12.3.2
6.12.3.3
6.12.3.4
6.12.3.5
6.12.3.6
Inquiry receipt
Processing
Capability
Confirmation
Process
Delivery Date
Confirmation
Process
Processing
capability Shall
be conformed
On the basis of
Material
availability at
FG stores
Delivery Date
shall be
conformed
If the Material
is not available
at FG Stores,
on the basis of
production
capacity
delivery date
will be
conformed.
Inquiry
Creation
Inquiry Change
Inquiry
Deletion

6.12.4.1
6.12.4.2
Discounts
before sale
Discounts
during sale
Page 218 Of 361
6.12.4.3
6.12.4.4
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Discounts after
Sale
Special Cash
Discounts

6.12.5.1
6.12.5.2
Quotation
Creation
Quotation
Amendment
6.12.6 Payment Guarantees

6.12.6.1
Payment
Gurantee
Process
6.12.7.1
Export Sales
Contracts
6.12.7 Export Sales Contract

6.12.8.1
6.12.8.2
6.12.8.3
6.12.8.4
6.12.8.5
6.12.8.6
6.12.8.7
Proforma
Invoice
Sales Order
( work order)
Sales Order
Creation
Availability of
material(NCO,
Scrap) will be
Checked
Partner
Allocations
Material
Specification
Entry
Availability
Check &
Delivery Date
Determination
Terms &
Conditions
Production
Order will be
generated on
the base of
schedule Lines
SO Capability
Check shall
be carried
out
Production for
SO shall be
conformed
Page 219 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
6.12.8.8

suggested by CVS IT

basis of Given
conditions
Pricing, Taxes
& Discounts
6.12.8.9
Credit Check
6.12.8.10
Follow-up
Actions
6.12.8.11
Sales Order
Amendment
6.12.8.12
Sales Order
Deletion
6.12.8.13
Order
Cancellation
Gaps/Comments
On the Basis of
Decided Credit
limit, Credit
check will be
done.
Production Plan
will re
determined
Production Plan
will re
determined
Production Plan
will re
determined
6.12.9 Delivery
6.12.9.1
6.12.9.2
6.12.9.3
6.12.9.4
6.12.9.5
6.12.9.6
Despatch Plan
Gate Entry
System
Loading
Final
Weighment
Post Goods
Issue
Accounting
document will be
generated on the
base of material
Document
( Cost of goods
sold account Dr
Inventory FG
account Cr. )
Material
document will
be generated
through PGI
and Inventory
is updated.
RG1Stock updated.
Packing List &

Container
Page 220 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
6.12.9.7

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Packing List
Packing List &
Container
Packing List
6.12.10 Billing
6.12.10.1
6.12.10.2
6.12.10.3
6.12.10.4
Excise Invoice
Generation /
Selection
When goods are

removed under
bond,CT2,Ct3,
export sales ; No
accounting entry
is generated .
Otherwise
Entries passed
will be : Excise
duty paid
account Dr. &
Excise duty
payable account
Cr.
Commercial
Invoice
Creation Billing
Automatic
Generation of
accounting
document and
posting of entries
into Customer
account Dr. ,
Export sales
account Cr
Export benefits
receivable
account Dr
Export benefits
account Cr
RG23 (A) Will be

updated and Cenvat
updated.
L.R.Preparation
Post Shipment
Documents
Page 221 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
6.12.11.1
Fixing Credit
Limit
6.12.11.2
Calculating
Credit
Exposure
6.12.11.3
Performing
Credit Check
6.12.11.4
Export
Diversion

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Credit limit shall

be fixed at FI
level and
controlled at SD
level
Credit limit shall
be fixed at FI
level and
controlled at SD
level
Credit Check on
the basis of
Credit limit
6.12.12.1
Receipt of
Customer
Complaint
6.12.12.2
Quality
Notification
6.12.12.3
Complaint
Settlements
Quality
related
material
complaint
will be taken
care through
SD
Quality
related
material
Problem, if
any, will be
notified and
settled.
Accounting
Document will be
generated on the
base of credit
note
Page 222 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
6.12.12.4
6.12.12.5

suggested by CVS IT
Debit Memo
Customer
Account : Dr
Sales Discounts
Account : Cr
Rate Difference
Account : Cr
Interest Received
Account : Cr

will be Paid
Credit Memo
Customer
Account : Cr
Sales Discounts
Account : Dr

Claimed back from
Excise authorities
Gaps/Comments
6.13 Sales to Nepal and Bhutan Exports

6.13.1.1
Sales Plan
6.13.2.1
Sales Activities
Sales Activity
Planning
Recording
Sales Activity
On the basis of
Sales Plan
Material
Procurement
Plan Shall be
Determined
On the basis of
Sales Plan
Production plan
shall be
Determined
and MRP for
RM.

6.13.2.2
6.13.2.3
6.13.2.4
Sales
Promotions
Sales Promotions
A/c Dr.
Inventory A/C Cr.

6.13.3.1
6.13.3.2
Inquiry receipt
Processing
Capability
Confirmation
Process
Processing
capability Shall
be conformed
Page 223 Of 361
6.13.3.3
6.13.3.4
6.13.3.5
6.13.3.6
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Delivery Date
Confirmation
Process
On the basis of
Material
availability at
FG stores
Delivery Date
shall be
conformed
Gaps/Comments
If the Material
is not available
at FG Stores,
on the basis of
production
capacity
delivery date
will be
conformed.
Inquiry
Creation
Inquiry Change
Inquiry
Deletion

6.13.4.1
6.13.4.2
6.13.4.3
6.13.4.4
6.13.4.5
Commission
Discounts
before sale
Discounts
during sale
Discounts after
Sale
Special Cash
Discounts

6.13.5.1
6.13.5.2
Quotation
Creation
Quotation
Amendment

6.13.6.1
Payment
Guarantee
Process
6.13.7
Export Sales
Contracts

6.13.8.1
6.13.8.2
Proforma
Invoice
Sales Order
Page 224 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
( work order)
6.13.8.3
6.13.8.4
6.13.8.5
6.13.8.6
6.13.8.7
6.13.8.8
Availability of
material(NCO,
Scrap) will be
Checked
Sales Order
Creation
Partner
Allocations
Material
Specification
Entry
Availability
Check &
Delivery Date
Determination
Terms &
Conditions
Production
Order will be
generated on
the base of
schedule Lines
SO Capability
Check shall
be carried
out
Production for
SO shall be
conformed

basis of Given
conditions
Pricing, Taxes
& Discounts
6.13.8.9
Credit Check
6.13.8.10
Follow-up
Actions
6.13.8.11
Sales Order
Amendment
6.13.8.12
Sales Order
Deletion
6.13.8.13
Order
Cancellation
6.13.9.1
Despatch Plan
On the Basis of
Decided Credit
limit, Credit
check will be
done.
Production Plan
will re
determined
Production Plan
will re
determined
Production Plan
will re
determined
6.13.9 Delivery
Page 225 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
6.13.9.2
6.13.9.3
6.13.9.4
6.13.9.5
6.13.9.6
6.13.9.7

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Gate Entry
System
Loading
Final
Weighment
Post Goods
Issue
Accounting
document will be
generated on the
base of material
Document
(Cost of goods
sold account Dr.
& Inventory FG
account Cr.
)
Material
document will
be generated
through PGI
and Inventory
is updated.
RG1Stock updated.
Packing List &

Container
Packing List
Packing List &
Container
Packing List
6.13.10 Billing
6.13.10.1
Excise Invoice
Generation /
Selection
Excise Invoice
Entry will be
posted
( Excise duty
paid account Dr.
& Excise duty
payables Cr. )
RG23 (A) Will be

updated and Cenvat
updated.
Page 226 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
6.13.10.2
6.13.10.3
6.13.10.4

suggested by CVS IT
Commercial
Invoice
Creation Billing
Gaps/Comments
Automatic
Generation of
accounting
document and
posting of entries
into Customer
account Dr. ,
Sales account
Cr. & Excise duty
recovered
account Cr.
L.R.Preparation
Post Shipment
Documents

6.13.11.1
Fixing Credit
Limit
6.13.11.2
Calculating
Credit
Exposure
6.13.11.3
Performing
Credit Check
6.13.11.4
Export
Diversion
Credit limit shall

be fixed at FI
level and
controlled at SD
level
Credit limit shall
be fixed at FI
level and
controlled at SD
level
Credit Check on
the basis of
Credit limit
6.13.12.1
Receipt of
Customer
Complaint
Quality
related
material
complaint
will be taken
care through
SD
Page 227 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
6.13.12.2

suggested by CVS IT
Complaint
Settlements
6.13.12.4
Customer
Returns ( Sales
Return)
6.13.12.5
Free of Charge
Delivery
Gaps/Comments
Quality
related
material
Problem, if
any, will be
notified and
settled.
Quality
Notification
6.13.12.3
Accounting
Document will be
generated on the
base of credit
note
Cost of goods
sold account Cr
& Inventory FG
account Dr;
Excise Duty paid
account Cr &
Excise duty
payable account
Dr ;Customer
account Cr ,Sales
account Dr &
Excise duty
recovered Dr
Accounting
Document will be
generated for the
cost of delivery
( Cost of goods
sold account Dr.,
Inventory FG
account Cr. )
Inventory is
Updated.
Material
Document will
be Generated
Return
material is
sent for
quality
inspection .
RG1 and RG23 (A)

entry updated
RG23(A) Will be
updated and Cenvat
Entries
Page 228 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
6.13.12.6
6.13.12.7
6.13.12.8

suggested by CVS IT
Free of Charge
Subsequent
Delivery
Accounting
Document will be
generated for the
cost of delivery
( Cost of goods
sold account Dr.,
Inventory FG
account Cr. )
Debit Memo
Customer
Account : Dr
Sales Discounts
Account : Cr
Rate Difference
Account : Cr
Interest Received
Account : Cr

will be Paid
Credit Memo
Customer
Account : Cr
Sales Discounts
Account : Dr

Claimed back from
Excise authorities
Gaps/Comments
6.14 Export Support Sales

6.14.1.1
Sales Plan
6.14.2.1
Sales Activities
Sales Activity
Planning
Recording
Sales Activity
On the basis of
Sales Plan
Financial
Projections Shall
be determined
On the basis of
Sales Plan
Material
Procurement
Plan Shall be
Determined
On the basis of
Sales Plan
Production plan
shall be
Determined
and MRP for
RM.

6.14.2.2
6.14.2.3
Page 229 Of 361
6.14.2.4
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Sales
Promotions
Gaps/Comments
Sales Promotions
A/c Dr.
Inventory A/C Cr.

6.14.3.1
6.14.3.2
6.14.3.3
6.14.3.4
6.14.3.5
6.14.3.6
Inquiry receipt
Processing
Capability
Confirmation
Process
Delivery Date
Confirmation
Process
Processing
capability Shall
be conformed
On the basis of
Material
availability at
FG stores
Delivery Date
shall be
conformed
If the Material
is not available
at FG Stores,
on the basis of
production
capacity
delivery date
will be
conformed.
Inquiry
Creation
Inquiry Change
Inquiry
Deletion

6.14.4.1
6.14.4.2
6.14.4.3
6.14.4.4
6.14.4.5
Commission
Discounts
before sale
Discounts
during sale
Discounts after
Sale
Special Cash
Discounts

6.14.5.1
6.14.5.2
Quotation
Creation
Quotation
Amendment

6.14.6.1
Payment
Page 230 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Guarantee
Process

6.14.7.1
Export Sales
Contracts

6.14.8.1
6.14.8.2
6.14.8.3
6.14.8.4
6.14.8.5
6.14.8.6
6.14.8.7
6.14.8.8
Proforma
Invoice
Sales Order
( work order)
Availability of
material(NCO,
Scrap) will be
Checked
Sales Order
Creation
Partner
Allocations
Material
Specification
Entry
Availability
Check &
Delivery Date
Determination
Terms &
Conditions
Credit Check
6.14.8.10
Follow-up
Actions
SO Capability
Check shall
be carried
out
Production for
SO shall be
conformed

basis of Given
conditions
Pricing, Taxes
& Discounts
6.14.8.9
Production
Order will be
generated on
the base of
schedule Lines
On the Basis of
Decided Credit
limit, Credit
check will be
done.
Page 231 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
6.14.8.11
Sales Order
Amendment
6.14.8.12
Sales Order
Deletion
6.14.8.13
Order
Cancellation

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Production Plan
will re
determined
Production Plan
will re
determined
Production Plan
will re
determined
6.14.9 Delivery
6.14.9.1
6.14.9.2
6.14.9.3
6.14.9.4
6.14.9.5
6.14.9.6
6.14.9.7
Despatch Plan
Gate Entry
System
Loading
Final
Weighment
Post Goods
Issue
Accounting
document will be
generated on the
base of material
Document
( Cost of goods
sold account Dr.
&
Inventory FG
account Cr. )
Material
document will
be generated
through PGI
and Inventory
is updated.
RG1Stock updated.
Packing List &

Container
Packing List
Packing List &
Container
Packing List
6.14.10 Billing
Page 232 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Excise Invoice
Generation /
Selection
If bond is taken
by the customer
no excise invoice
accounting entry
is generated ;
Otherwise Excise
duty paid
account Dr. &
Excise duty
payables Cr.
Commercial
Invoice
Creation Billing
Automatic
Generation of
accounting
document and
posting of entries
into Customer
account Dr. &
Sales account
Cr.
6.14.11.1
Fixing Credit
Limit
Credit limit shall

be fixed at FI
level and
controlled at SD
level
6.14.11.2
Calculating
Credit
Exposure
"
6.14.11.3
Performing
Credit Check
Credit Check on
the basis of
Credit limit
6.14.11.4
Export
Diversion
6.14.10.1
6.14.10.2
Gaps/Comments
RG23 (A) Will be

updated and Cenvat
updated.

6.14.12.1
Receipt of
Customer
Complaint
Quality
related
material
complaint
will be taken
care through
Page 233 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
SD
6.14.12.2
Quality
related
material
Problem, if
any, will be
notified and
settled.
Quality
Notification
6.14.12.3
Complaint
Settlements
6.14.12.5
Free of Charge
Delivery
6.14.12.6
Free of Charge
Subsequent
Delivery
Accounting
Document will be
generated on the
base of credit
note
Accounting
Document will be
generated for the
cost of delivery
( Cost of goods
sold account Dr.,
Inventory FG
account Cr. )
Accounting
Document will be
generated for the
cost of delivery
( Cost of goods
sold account Dr.,
Inventory FG
account Cr. )
Material
Document will
be Generated
RG23(A) Will be
updated and Cenvat
Entries
Page 234 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Debit Memo
Customer
Account : Dr
Sales Discounts
Account : Cr
Rate Difference
Account : Cr
Interest Received
Account : Cr

will be Paid
6.14.12.8
Credit Memo
Customer
Account : Cr
Sales Discounts
Account : Dr

Claimed back from
Excise authorities
6.14.13.1
Recording of
shipping Bills
for export
support sale
6.14.12.7
Gaps/Comments
6.14.13 Others
6.15 Third Party(Deemed Export)Export Sales

6.15.1.1
Sales Plan
6.15.2.1
Sales Activities
Sales Activity
Planning
Recording
Sales Activity
On the basis of
Sales Plan
Material
Procurement
Plan Shall be
Determined
On the basis of
Sales Plan
Production plan
shall be
Determined
and MRP for
RM.

6.15.2.2
6.15.2.3
Page 235 Of 361
6.15.2.4
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Sales
Promotions
Gaps/Comments
Sales Promotions
A/c Dr.
Inventory A/C Cr.

6.15.3.1
6.15.3.2
6.15.3.3
6.15.3.4
6.15.3.5
6.15.3.6
Inquiry receipt
Processing
Capability
Confirmation
Process
Delivery Date
Confirmation
Process
Processing
capability Shall
be conformed
On the basis of
Material
availability at
FG stores
Delivery Date
shall be
conformed
If the Material
is not available
at FG Stores,
on the basis of
production
capacity
delivery date
will be
conformed.
Inquiry
Creation
Inquiry Change
Inquiry
Deletion

6.15.4.1
6.15.4.2
6.15.4.3
6.15.4.4
6.15.4.5
Commission
Discounts
before sale
Discounts
during sale
Discounts after
Sale
Special Cash
Discounts

6.15.5.1
6.15.5.2
Quotation
Creation
Quotation
Amendment

6.15.6.1
Payment
Page 236 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Guarantee
Process

6.15.7.1
Export Sales
Contracts

6.15.8.1
6.15.8.2
6.15.8.3
6.15.8.4
6.15.8.5
6.15.8.6
6.15.8.7
Proforma
Invoice
Sales Order
( work order)
Availability of
material(NCO,
Scrap) will be
Checked
Sales Order
Creation
Partner
Allocations
Material
Specification
Entry
Availability
Check &
Delivery Date
Determination
Terms &
Conditions
6.15.8.8
Credit Check
6.15.8.9
Follow-up
Actions
6.15.8.10
Sales Order
Amendment
6.15.8.11
Sales Order
Deletion
Production
Order will be
generated on
the base of
schedule Lines
SO Capability
Check shall
be carried
out
Production for
SO shall be
conformed
On the Basis of
Decided Credit
limit, Credit
check will be
done.
Production Plan
will re
determined
Production Plan
will re
determined
Page 237 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
6.15.8.12

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Production Plan
will re
determined
Order
Cancellation
6.15.9 Delivery
6.15.9.1
6.15.9.2
6.15.9.3
6.15.9.4
6.15.9.5
6.15.9.6
6.15.9.7
Despatch Plan
Gate Entry
System
Loading
Final
Weighment
Post Goods
Issue
Accounting
document will be
generated on the
base of material
Document
(Cost of goods
sold account Dr.
& Inventory FG
account Cr.)
Material
document will
be generated
through PGI
and Inventory
is updated.
RG1Stock updated.
Packing List &

Container
Packing List
Packing List &
Container
Packing List
6.15.10 Billing
6.15.10.1
Excise Invoice
Generation /
Selection
When goods are

removed under
bond, CT2,Ct3,
export sales No
accounting entry
is generated
otherwise similar
to Direct Export
sales without
bond.
RG23 (A) Will be

updated and Cenvat
updated.
Page 238 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Commercial
Invoice
Creation Billing
Automatic
Generation of
accounting
document and
posting of entries
into Customer
account Dr. &
Sales account Cr.
6.15.11.1
Fixing Credit
Limit
Credit limit shall

be fixed at FI
level and
controlled at SD
level
6.15.11.2
Calculating
Credit
Exposure
"
6.15.11.3
Performing
Credit Check
Credit Check on
the basis of
Credit limit
6.15.11.4
Export
Diversion
6.15.10.2
Gaps/Comments
6.15.12.1
Receipt of
Customer
Complaint
6.15.12.2
Quality
Notification
Quality
related
material
complaint
will be taken
care through
SD
Quality
related
material
Problem, if
any, will be
notified and
settled.
Page 239 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
6.15.12.3
Complaint
Settlements
6.15.12.4
Customer
Returns ( Sales
Return)
6.15.12.5
Free of Charge
Delivery
6.15.12.6
Free of Charge
Subsequent
Delivery
Accounting
Document will be
generated on the
base of credit
note
Cost of goods
sold account Cr
& Inventory FG
account Dr;
Excise Duty paid
account Cr &
Excise duty
payable account
Dr ;Customer
account Cr ,Sales
account Dr &
Excise duty
recovered Dr (in
case if material
removed on
payment of duty
and return with
excise doc within
six month)
Accounting
Document will be
generated for the
cost of delivery
( Cost of goods
sold account Dr.,
Inventory FG
account Cr. )
Accounting
Document will be
generated for the
cost of delivery
( Cost of goods
sold account Dr.,
Inventory FG
account Cr. )
Inventory is
Updated.
Material
Document will
be Generated
Return
material is
sent for
quality
inspection .
Gaps/Comments
RG1 and RG23 (A)

entry updated
RG23(A) Will be
updated and Cenvat
Entries
Page 240 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Debit Memo
Customer
Account : Dr
Sales Discounts
Account : Cr
Rate Difference
Account : Cr
Interest Received
Account : Cr

will be Paid
6.15.12.8
Credit Memo
Customer
Account : Cr
Sales Discounts
Account : Dr

Claimed back from
Excise authorities
6.15.13.1
Recording of
shipping Bills
for export
support sale
6.15.12.7
Gaps/Comments
6.15.13 Others
6.16 Sale of Services

6..1 Sales Plan / Marketing Plan
6.16.1.1
Sales Plan
6.16.2.1
Sales Activities
Sales Activity
Planning
Recording
Sales Activity

6.16.2.2
6.16.2.3

6.16.3.1
6.16.3.2
6.16.3.4
6.16.3.5
6.16.3.6
Inquiry receipt
Processing
Capability
Confirmation
Process
Inquiry
Creation
Inquiry Change
Inquiry
Deletion
Page 241 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments

6.16.5.2
Quotation
Amendment
6.16.6.1
Payment
Guarantees
process
On the basis of
mutually agreed
payment terms
Payment
Guarantee
Process shall be
determined

6.16.7.1
6.16.7.2
6.16.7.3
6.16.7.4
6.16.7.5
6.16.7.6
6.16.7.7
6.16.7.8
6.16.7.9
6.16.7.10
Sales Order
Partner
Allocations
Availability
Check &
Delivery Date
Determination
Terms &
Conditions
Pricing, Taxes
Credit Check
On the Basis of
Decided Credit
limit, Credit
check will be
done.
Follow-up
Actions
Sales Order
Amendment
Sales Order
Deletion
Order
Cancellation
6.16.8 Inbound Delivery

6.16.8.1
Gate In system
6.16.8.2
Inbound
delivery
No accounting
entry is
generated
Page 242 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
6.16.9 Outbound Delivery

6.16.9.1
6.16.9.2
6.16.9.3
6.16.9.4
6.16.9.5
6.16.9.6
Gate Out
system
Empty Vehicle
Weighment
Outbound
Delivery
No accounting
entry is
generated
Loading
Final
Weighment
Commercial
Invoice
Creation Billing
Automatic
Generation of
accounting
document and
posting of entries
into Customer
account : Dr &
Sales of services
account : Cr

6.16.10.1
Fixing Credit
Limit
6.16.10.2
Calculating
Credit
Exposure
6.16.10.3
Performing
Credit Check
Credit limit shall

be fixed at FI
level and
controlled at SD
level
Credit limit shall
be fixed at FI
level and
controlled at SD
level
Credit Check on
the basis of
Credit limit

6.16.11.1
Receipt of
Customer
Complaint
Quality
related
complaint
will be taken
Page 243 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
care through
SD
6.16.11.2
6.16.11.3
6.16.11.4
6.16.11.5
Quality
related
Problem, if
any, will be
notified and
settled.
Quality
Notification
Complaint
Settlements
Accounting
Document will be
generated on the
base of credit
note
Debit Memo
Customer
Account : Dr
Sales Discounts
Account : Cr
Rate Difference
Account : Cr
Interest Received
Account : Cr

will be Paid
Credit Memo
Customer
Account : Cr
Sales Discounts
Account : Dr

Claimed back from
Excise authorities
Page 244 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Print Outputs
Print Outputs at each stage
Type of Sale /
Stage of Sale
Sales
Activities
Inquiry
Quotation
Sales Document
Delivery and
related processes
Excise
Invoice
Creation
Customer
Complaint
Processing
Billing
Domestic Sales
Direct Sales - OEM

Sales, NCO Sales,
Projects, Traders
a) Visit plan
b) Visit
compliance
report
c) Visit report
e) Inquiry
with
follow-up
activity
d) Sales
Operation
Plan
h) Sales Order
conformation
i) LC requisition
j) LC amendment
format
f) Quotation
k) Schedule
g) Quotation
agreement
amendmen
confirmation
t
l) Contract
confirmation
m) Credit note
request
n) Debit note
request
o)
Delivery
note
p)
q)
r)
s)
t)
u)
ui)
Deliver
y / Truck
Reporting Slip
Lorry receipt
v) Excise
Test certificate Invoice
Bar code label
Weighment slip
SGS sticker
Packing list
w) Performa
Invoice
x) commercial
Invoice
y) Debit Note
z) Credit Note
aa) Quality
notificati
on
bb)Visit
report
cc) complaint
analysis
report
a ,b , c, d
f, g
h,i,j,k,l,
m , n.
o , p , q , r, t
w,x,y,z
Sales through
Commission Agents
f, g
h,i,j,k,l,
m , n.
o , p , q , r, t
w,x,y,z
aa , bb , cc
Third Party Sales with

Processing
f, g
h,i,j,k,l,
m , n.
o , p , q , r, t
w,x,y,z
aa , bb , cc
f, g
h , l , m , n.
o , p , q , r, t
w,x,y,z
aa , bb , cc
Sales through Depots
Scrap Sales
aa , bb , cc
Barter Sales
f, g
h , k , l , m , n.
o , p , q , r, t
x,y,z
aa , bb , cc
Assortment Sale
f. g
h,i,j,k,l,
m , n.
o , p , q , r, t
x,y,z
aa , bb , cc
Online Auctions
f, g
h,i,j,k,l
o , p , q , r, t ,
w,x,y,z
aa , bb , cc
Page 245 Of 361
Processes
in Sales
Sale to Railways

suggested by CVS IT
a, b, c, d
a, b, c
Sale of Service / Job

Work
Sale to Group
Companies
Free Samples
f, g
h , k , l , m , n.
Gaps/Comments
o , p , q , r, t , u
w,x,y,z
aa , bb , cc
o , p , q , r, t
f, g
h,k,l
o , p , q , r, t
aa , bb , cc
f, g
h,k,m,n
o , p , q , r, t
x,y,z
aa , bb , cc
o , p , q , r, t , u, ui
w,x
aa , bb , cc
o , p , q , r, t , u, ui
w,x
aa , bb , cc
h,i,j,k, m,
n.
o , p , q , r, t , u
w,x,y,z
aa , bb , cc
h,i,j,k,l,m
, n.
o , p , q , r, t
w,x,y,z
aa , bb , cc
h,i,j,k,l,m
, n.
o , p , q , r, t , u
w,x,y,z
aa , bb , cc
o , p , q , r, t
x,y,z
Exports
Direct Export Sales to
countries other than
Nepal, Bhutan
a,b,c,d
f, g
Nepal & Bhutan

Exports
a,b,c,d
f, g
Deemed Exports
a,b,c,d
f, g
CT-2 / CT-3 Sales
a,b,c,d
Export Support Sales
f, g
h,i,j,k
h,i,j,k
Stock Transfers
Inter-Plant Transfers
h , k , m , n.
Captive Consumption
h, k , m , n.
o , p , q , r, t
x,y,z
Page 246 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
9. Master Data Coding Logic:

1) Account Groups :
Sold To Party
0001
Ship To Party
0002
Payer
0003
Bill To Party
0004
Prospective Customer
0005
Competitor
0006
One Time Customer
2) Business Partners :
HR CR,CC,CG Products
Description
Sold To Party
CPD or
CPDA
SPCode
DRI Products
Description
Code
Ship To Party
SH
3) Customer Groups:
OEM Payer
EAF
PY OE
TRADE
TR
INDUCTION ARC FURNACE
Bill To Party
BP AU
AUCTION
TRADERS_DRI
EXPORT
Contact person
CP EX
PROJECT
PR
Special stock Partner/CA
SB AG
AGENTS
OAU
OA
Forwarding Agent
CR
GOVT./PSU
GO
Commission Agent
08
4) Customer ABC Indicator (to be decided on the basis of relationship, consistency, sales
Sales Agent
09
Customer A
Customer
Sales BEmployee
PE
Customer C
5) Customer Code:
Customer
From
To
Sold To Party
1
999999
Ship To Party
1
999999
Payer
1
999999
Bill To Party
1
999999
EF
IF
TR
Pig Iron Products

Description
FOUNDRY
EAF_PI
TRADERS_PI
Code
FO
EF
TR
potential, payment history ,credit rating etc):
Page 247 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
6) Industry Sectors :
Description
Appliances
Code
AP
LPG
LP
Automobiles
SAW
Pipes And Tubes
Boilers
Railways
Cold Rolling Mills
Civil construction (Projects)
AM
SA
PT
BO
RY
CR
CC
Description
Plates and Sheet
Manufacturers
Stainless Steel
Manufacturers
Ship Builders/Ports
White Goods
Fabrication and Panels
Sales And Service
Ancillary Units
Power
Agricultural Products
Code
PS
SS
SB
WG
FP
SS
AU
PO
AP
Page 248 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
10.
Report type
1
2
3
Branch Targets
Marketing plan for Dolvi complex
Month end expected position of Dolvi
complex
Report type
Reports *
Sales Activities
Which gives the next month marketing
plans
Marketing plan for Dolvi complex
Month end expected position of Dolvi
complex
Order Processing
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Details of Order Booked report

Opening Orders
Order Booking details
Order Booking status
Order Booking Status
Order Booking Summary
Order booking summary
Order booking detail

which gives the opening orders for a month
To date, MTD order booking plan & actual
CCS order booking status
Order Booking Status for Dolvi complex
To date, MTD order booking plan & actual
OB summary Zone wise
11
Pending Order Position
gives customer wise, material wise order

pending for dispatch.
12
13
SA SO rate Diff.
Sales Agreement wise detail
gives any difference between SA Rate and

SO Rate
Customers order execution report
14
SO available & not available
gives so made & not made qty against

allocated stock
15
Tally -HSM / SIP / IMIL Barter Details
gives the account status of the customer

Sales under Barter
16
WO Details NCO segment wise
customer wise Pending Work Orders gives

NCO stock summary
17
18
WO Summary WO Details
Work Order Summary
segment wise WO summary as on date

customer wise Pending Work Orders
Work Order summary
19
20
Daily Despatch Reports.

Daily MKTG Summary rep
Customer wise Qty. Despatch

plans vs actual
21
Day wise despatch plan
customer wise day wise despatch plan for

the month
Report type
Gaps/Comments
Delivery
Page 249 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
22
23
24
Day wise despatch plan

Monthly dispatches
NCO allocated Stock
customer wise day wise despatch plan for

the month
gives despatch details of the month
NCO allocated Stock, with SO No
25
NCO daily report
it gives a over all status of NCO stock ,

sales, dispatches , NSR
26
27
NCO Stock
Party wise allocated Stock analysis
Which gives the free NCO & Narrow slit coil

stock
Party wise allocated Stock analysis
28
29
Slit daily report

Trade Sheet grade dispatches
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
Transporter wise despatch report

Production Report
Production Report
Production Report
Production Report
Work Order Status
Stock Report
Stock Report
Stock Report
Stock Report
Stock Report
Vehicle In Gate
Vehicle Out Gate
Change Vehicle Number
Empty Out Trucks
Weighment - Incoming
Delivery Reverse-SIP
Weighment - Outgoing
Waited Trucks
Truck Servicing
Empty Out Trucks Report
Truck Details > 12 Hrs
Gaps/Comments
it gives a over all status of narrow slit coil

stock , sales, dispatches , NSR
gives Trade MTO dispatches in Sheet grade
Transporter wise dispatches for given
period
Production Report For H R Coil
Production Report For Slit Coils
Production Report For Sheets & Plates
Production Report For Slit Coils
Work Order Status
Hr Coil Stock Report
Hr Sheet/Plates/Slits Stock Report
Party Wise Stock Reports
Work In Progress
NCO Stock
Vehicle In Gate
Vehicle Out Gate
Change Vehicle Number
Empty Out Trucks
Weighment - Incoming
Delivery Reverse-SIP
Weighment - Outgoing
Waited Trucks
Truck Servicing
Empty Out Trucks Report
Truck Details > 12 Hrs
Page 250 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
52
Black Listed Trucks
53
54
55
56
57
58
Creation Of Delivery
Billing Document Creation
Creation Of Excise Invoice
Pending Sales Order Position Report
Captive Consumption
Captive Consumption Report
59
Customer wise Despatch Report
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
Transporter wise Despatch

Transporter Wise- Product Wise Summary
Region Wise Dispatch
SD- Trans-Details
Customer wise Daily Despatch Report
Despatch For The Month
Lorry Receipt Table
MIS Dolvi Logistics
Weekly Report For Logistics& Service
Centre
Coil Mapping
Stock Allocation Report
71
Barter Details
Sales under Barter
72
Customer wise Dispatch
Customer wise subtotal, material wise

Dispatch summary
73
74
Customer wise, product wise dispatch

summary
Daily HR Production Rep
Customer wise, material wise Dispatch

summary
Production detail customer wise
Report type
75
Dolvi Marketing report
76
77
Dispatch Detail
Month end actual position of Dolvi complex
Gaps/Comments
Black Listed Trucks

Creation Of Delivery-Vl 01 For Domestic
And Vl04 For Export
Billing Document Creation
Creation Of Excise Invoice
Pending Sales Order Position Report
Captive Consumption Of DRI
Captive Consumption Report
Customer wise Despatch Report For The
Day
Transporter wise Dispatch Report For The
Day
Transporter Wise- Product Wise Summary
Region Wise Dispatch
SD-Transporter wise Despatch Report
Customer wise -Daily Despatch
Despatch Report For The Month-In Short
LR. Table
MIS Dolvi-Logistics
Weekly Report For Logistics& Service
Centre
Material Allocation Report
Stock Allocation Report Summary
Billing
this is a full consolidated report for Dolvi

complex with production, sales, stock order
booking, collection etc
All the dispatch details invoice wise, coil
wise
Month end actual position of Dolvi complex
Page 251 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
78
Monthly NCO off take report
gives region wise, party wise monthly

dispatches
79
Monthly Performance Month end actual
over all monthly performance of Dolvi

complex Month end actual
80
NCO Traders Report
which gives NCO off take by the Mumbai

traders in the months
81
82
Order type wise Dispatch report

Trade Sheet grade dispatches
gives total qty against MTO, NCO,

Secondary Products
gives Trade MTO dispatches in Sheet grade
83
Traders sales &collection in a month
this gives the opening outstanding, sales /

collection during the month and liabilities
during the month
84
Weekly report
Weekly plan & actual OB, Sales, Collection

person wise
Report type
85
86
87
88
89
90
Report type
Customer Complaint Processing

Customer complain record
Quality complain record
Visit calendar
Customer Visit Plan & Actual Summary
All customer complaint status is
maintained in this report
Task Sheet
Stocks report
91
92
Stock Report
Stock Age Analysis
HR stock details
day wise stock age analysis of HR.
93
94
95
96
97
98
Production Summary Stock summary

Stock summary
Customer wise Stock summary
Segment wise NCO Stock
NCO segment wise
coil wise Stock details
Customer wise HR production summary

Stock summary
Stock summary
Stock summary
gives NCO and Narrow slit coil stock
gives NCO stock summary
coil wise Mill coil Stock details
coil wise Stock details

Production details coil wise- mill coil
coil wise slit coil, sheet, plate Stock details

coil wise production details
99
100
Gaps/Comments
Page 252 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
101
Production details coil wise- slitters / CTL
102
Mechanical details Chemical details
Heat wise, coil wise mechanical detail Heat

wise, coil wise product chemistry
103
104
105
Chemical details Non prime coil

Non prime coil details
stock age analysis
Heat wise, coil wise product chemistry coil

wise reason for non prime
coil wise reason for non prime
stock age analysis
Gaps/Comments
* Reports shall be updated.
Page 253 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
11. Role Matrix
Page 254 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
Business Partners Maintenance
6.1.1.1
Sales Prospect Maintenance
6.1.1.2
Maintaining Customers
6.1.1.3
Contact Persons Maintenance
6.1.1.4
Forwarding Agents Maintenance
6.1.1.5
Sales Personnel Maintenance
6.1.1.7
Transporters( Forwarding agent)
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Delete( Flag for deletion)
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Delete(Flag for deletion)
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 255 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 256 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 257 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 258 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 259 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 260 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 261 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 262 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 263 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 264 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 265 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 266 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 267 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 268 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 269 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 270 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 271 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 272 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 273 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 274 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 275 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 276 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 277 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 278 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 279 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 280 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 281 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 282 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 283 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 284 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 285 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 286 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 287 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 288 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 289 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 290 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 291 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 292 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 293 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 294 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 295 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 296 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 297 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Usage Points
Serial
No.
Process Name
Transaction
Users

6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.1.3
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.7
6.1.1.8
Hierarchy nodes
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block
Create
Change
Display
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Create
Change
Display
Block / Unblock
Create
Change
Display
Delete
Page 298 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
12. Pricing Matrix

1. Direct Sales
a.
Order
of
Pricing
Element
Sales of HR (MTO, NCO, Narrow Slit, Secondary Products) Coils
Pricing Element
Calculation Logic
Basic Price
a.
b.
Discount/Surcharge
on Basic Price
c.
Material is defined for

a particular grade,
particular thickness, a
particular width and
particular edge
properties. So there
will be material price
(SAP standard table
no004)Other features
of a particular
material will be
entered as variants .
A variant surcharge
will be added for each
value of this
dependent
characteristic.
Surcharge
for variants
Per P.O.:
This discount is
applicable by
selecting a particular
PO
Material/
Rate / Location: Is
applicable for a
particular material,
rate, location
Is it
changeable
manually
during
transaction?
(Y/N)
Header
Level /
Item
Level?
Item level
a.
b.
Item
level
Header
Level:
Applica
ble to
all
items
in the
particu
lar
Sales
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
G/L Account to which it has to

be posted.
Debit
Credit
Automatic
Yes
Customer
Account
Sales Account
Automatic
Manual
Automatic
Manual
Manual
Manual
manual
Yes
Sales Account
Customer
Account
Page 299 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
1. Direct Sales
a.

d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
a.
b.
Rebates
c.
Export
Support Sales
Freight
Subsidy
Price
difference discount
(When customer
insists for a discount
over& above the price
and discounts already
given, then this
discount is given.)
Commission
Agent: Paid manually
with no specific
conditions
Others
Quantity based
Rebate
Hierarchy based
Rebates applicable
when all the group
companies buy a
certain quantity
within a specified
period.
Commission to
agents: Calculated
on net sales value
excluding all taxes,
freights, discount on
the basis of region
and paid retroactively
on monthly basis
c.
d.
e.
docum
ent.
Item
Level
Header
Level
Header
Level
f.
Header
Level
Item Level
Automatic
Yes
Rebate Account
Liability for
Rebate A/C
Page 300 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
1. Direct Sales
a.

a.
b.
5
6
7
Excise
Basic + Excise
Additional Excise
Duty
Special Excise Duty
Local Sales Tax
Surcharge on LST
a.
Manua
l excise: This will
overwrite the
automatic excise duty
as derived from j1il
Automatic excise:
This will be derived
from j1il as a
combination of
Chapter id and final
excise indicator on
the assessable values
of items as per
rules. Exemption
under CT2/CT3 and
goods sent to natural
calamity relief
fund(CR Coils) and
manufacture of
defence
equipments(CR
COILS).
Addition of basic price
and excise duty
Nil
Nil
Rates to be maintained
in FTXP for a particular
combination of Country
key, tax code and tax
jurisdiction code for
sales made within the
same state.
Calculated as 10% on
ToT
Item level
Item level
a. Manual
b. Automatic
Automatic
Customer
Account
Excise Duty
recovered from
Customer A/C
Excise Duty Paid

A/C
Excise Duty
Payable A/C
Customer
Account
Sales Tax
Recovered
from Customer
Account
a. Yes
b. No
No
Item level
Automatic
No
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
Account
Sales Tax
Recovered
from Customer
Page 301 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
1. Direct Sales
a.

Account
10
11
Turnover Tax
Central Sales Tax
12
Surcharge on CST
13
Octroi
Rates applicable on
total value( basic +
freight+ excise
+CST/LST) to be
maintained in FTXP for
a particular combination
of Country key, tax
code and tax
sales.
sales made to different
state. Exemption is
effected in case of
possession of the
following forms: Form
BC, Form EC,Form N15,Form D,Form H
Calculated as
percentage on ToT
Applicable on total
invoice value( inclusive
of Basic, ED, ST,TOT,
Surcharges, freight) to
be paid by customer for
ex factory clearance.
Octroi exemption is
effected in case of
possession of Form R
Item level
Item level
Automatic
Automatic
No
Customer
Account
Sales Tax
Recovered
from Customer
Account
No
Customer
Account
Sales Tax
Recovered
from Customer
Account
Customer
Account
Item level
Automatic
No
Header
level
Automatic
No
Customer
Account
Sales Tax
Recovered
from Customer
Account
Octroi
Recovered
Account
Page 302 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
1. Direct Sales
a.

( sale to 100% export
oriented unit)
14
Handling Charges
15
Insurance
16
Freight
17
Total Invoice Value
Applicable on total
ex factory clearance
Applicable on total
ex factory clearance
Applicable on weight of
the material. If terms is
TO PAY then value
should be shown as
zero. If terms is
PREPAID then value to
be maintained in
condition record as
combination of
destination, transporter,
customer and mode of
transporter. If terms is
TO BE BILLED, then
transporter is paid by
IIL at actual and the
amount is charged by a
debit note.
Calculated as sum of
basic, less discount, ED,
Sales tax, surcharges,
Handling
charges
Recovered
Account
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
Account
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
Account
Insurance
Recovered
Account
Item level
Automatic
yes
Customer
Account
Freight
Recovered On
sale Account
Header
level
Automatic
Yes
Page 303 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
1. Direct Sales
a.

TOT
This is the selling price
net of all discounts,
taxes and freight. This
is compared with the
Minimum Floor Price.
18
Net Sales
Realization Value
b.
DRI/Pig Iron Sales
Order
of
Pricing
Element
Pricing Element
Basic Price
Calculation Logic
There will be material

price (SAP standard
table no 004) for a
product. Other features
of a particular material
will be entered as
variants like packing.
Item level
Header
Level /
Item
Level?
Item level
Automatic
No
Manual or
Automatic?
(M/A)
Is it
changeable
manually
during
transaction?
(Y/N)
Automatic
Yes

be posted.
Debit
Credit
Customer
account
Sales Account
Page 304 Of 361
b.
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
b.
c.
Discount/Surcharge
on Basic Price
d.
e.
f.
g.
3
Gaps/Comments
DRI/Pig Iron Sales

a.
Rebates
a.
b.
c.
Surcharg
e for variants
Per P.O.: This discount
is applicable by
selecting
a
particular PO
Material/ Rate /
Location: Is applicable
for a particular
material, rate,
location
Freight Subsidy
Price difference
discount (When
customer insists for a
discount over& above
the price and
discounts already
given, then this
discount is given.)
Commission Agent:
Paid manually with no
specific conditions
Quantity based
Rebate
Hierarchy based
Rebates applicable
when all the group
companies buy a
certain quantity within
a specified period.
Commission to
agents: Calculated on
net sales value
the basis of region
and paid retroactively
a. Item
level
b. Header
Level:
Applicabl
e to all
items in
the
particula
r PO
c. Item
Level
d. Header
Level
e. Header
Level
f. Header
Level
Item Level
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Automatic
Manual
Automatic
Manual
Manual
Manual
manual
Automatic
Yes
Sales Account
Customer
account
Yes
Company rebate
account
Liability for
rebates A/C
Page 305 Of 361
b.
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
DRI/Pig Iron Sales
on monthly basis
a.
b.
Excise
c.
5
6
7
Basic + Excise
Additional Excise
Duty
Special Excise Duty
Manual excise: This

will overwrite the
as derived from J1IIL
Automatic excise: This
will be derived from
j1il as a combination
of Chapter id and final
excise indicator on
of items as per rules
.
Exemption under
CT2/CT3 and goods
sent to natural
calamity relief
fund(CR Coils) and
manufacture of
defence
equipments(CR
COILS).
and excise duty
Customer
account
Item level
a. Manual
Automatic
b.
a. Yes
b. No
Excise Duty paid
A/C
Item level
Automatic
Excise duty
recovered from
customer A/C
Excise duty
payable A/C
No
Nil
Nil
Page 306 Of 361
b.
10
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
DRI/Pig Iron Sales
Local Sales Tax
Rates to be
maintained in FTXP
for a particular
combination of
Country key, tax code
and tax jurisdiction
code for sales made
within the same state
Surcharge on LST
TOT
Turnover Tax
11
Central Sales Tax
12
Surcharge on CST
Rates applicable on
freight + excise+
CST/LST) to be
maintained in FTXP
for a particular
combination of
code for sales.
Rates to be
maintained in FTXP
for a particular
combination of
code for sales made
to different state.
Exemption is effected
in case of possession
of the following
forms: Form BC, Form
EC,Form N-15,Form
D,Form H
TOT
Item level
Item level
Item level
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
No
Customer
account
Sales tax
recovered from
customer A/C
No
Customer
account
Sales Tax
Recovered
from customer
A/C
No
Customer
account
Sales Tax
Recovered
from customer
A/C
Customer
account
Sales Tax
Recovered
from customer
A/C
Item level
Automatic
No
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
account
Sales Tax
Recovered
from customer
Page 307 Of 361
b.
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
DRI/Pig Iron Sales

A/C
13
Octroi
14
Handling Charges
15
Insurance
Applicable on total
invoice
value( inclusive of
Basic, ED, ST,TOT,
Surcharges, freight)
to be paid by
customer for ex
factory clearance.
Octroi exemption is
effected in case of
oriented unit)
Applicable on total
invoice
value( inclusive of
Basic, ED, ST ,TOT,
to be paid by
customer for ex
factory clearance
Applicable on total
invoice
value( inclusive of
Basic, ED, ST, TOT,
to be paid by
customer for ex
factory clearance
Header
level
Automatic
No
Customer
account
Octroi
recovered
account
Handling
charges
recovered
account
Insurance
recovered
account
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
account
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
account
Page 308 Of 361
b.
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
DRI/Pig Iron Sales
16
Freight
17
Total Invoice Value
18
Net Sales
Realization Value
Applicable on weight
of the material. If
terms is TO PAY then
value should be
shown as zero. If
terms is PREPAID then
value to be
maintained in
condition record as
combination of
destination,
transporter, customer
and mode of
TOBE BILLED, then
amount is charged by
a debit note.
basic, less discount,
ED, Sales tax,
surcharges, TOT.
This is the selling
price net of all
discounts, taxes and
freight. This is
compared with the
Minimum Floor Price
Item level
Automatic
yes
Header
level
Automatic
Yes
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
account in case
of prepaid
Freight
recovered on
sale account
Page 309 Of 361
c.
Order
of
Pricing
Element
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
CR/CG/CC Sales
Pricing Element
Basic Price
Discount/Surcharge
on Basic Price
Header
Level /
Item
Level?
Calculation Logic
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Base price to be
decided on the basis
of product(grade +
form), size range,
edge properties(Only
for CR)
Surcharge for variants
Cash discount
Special discount
(When customer
at discounts already
given, then this
discount is given.)
Width Discount: For
Non-standard width
Hardness Discount:
When customer asks
for Hard or Annealed
but the material
delivered in semi
hard, then this
discount is given.
Grade Discount
Item level
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Item
level
Header
level
Header
Level
Item
Level
Item
Level
Item
level
Item
Level
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Manual or
Automatic?
(M/A)
Is it
changeable
manually
during
transaction?
(Y/N)
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Manual
Manual
Manual
Manual
manual

be posted.
Debit
Credit
Yes
Customer
account
Sales account
Yes
Sales Account
Customer
account
Page 310 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Quantity based
Rebate
Rebates
a.
b.
5
6
7
Excise
Basic + Excise
Additional Excise
Duty
Special Excise Duty
Local Sales Tax
Surcharge on LST
Manual excise: This

will overwrite the
as derived from j1id
Automatic excise:
from j1id as a
combination of
excise indicator on the
assessable values of
items as per rules.
Exemption under
CT2/CT3 and goods
sent to natural
calamity relief fund
and manufacture of
defence equipments.
and excise duty
Item Level
Automatic
Yes
Gaps/Comments
Company rebate
account
Customer
account
Item level
a.
b.
Manual
Automatic
a. Yes
b. No
Excise Duty paid
A/C
Item level
Automatic
Liability for
Rebates A/C
Excise duty
recovered from
customer A/C
Excise duty
payable A/C
No
Nil
Nil
Rates to be
maintained in FTXP
for a particular
combination of
code for sales made
Calculated as
percentage of ToT
Item level
Automatic
No
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
account
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered from
customer A/C
Sales Tax
account
Recovered from
Page 311 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
customer A/C
10
11
Turnover Tax
Central Sales Tax
12
Surcharge on CST
13
Octroi
Rates applicable on
freight + excise
+CST/LST) to be
maintained in FTXP
for a particular
combination of
code for sales.
Rates to be
maintained in FTXP
for a particular
combination of
code for sales made
to different state.
of the following
EC,Form N-15,Form
D,Form H
Calculated as
percentage on TOT
Applicable on total
invoice
value( inclusive of
Basic, ED, ST,TOT,
to be paid by
customer for ex
factory clearance.
Octroi exemption is
effected in case of
Item level
Item level
Automatic
Automatic
No
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered from
customer A/C
No
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered from
customer A/C
Customer
account
Item level
Automatic
No
Header
level
Automatic
No
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered from
customer A/C
Octroi
Recovered
account
Page 312 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments

oriented unit)
14
Handling Charges
15
Insurance
16
Freight
17
Total Invoice Value
Applicable on total
invoice
value( inclusive of
Basic, ED, ST,TOT,
to be paid by
customer for ex
factory clearance
Applicable on total
invoice value(inclusive
to be paid by
customer
(Optional)for ex
factory clearance
of the material. If
value should be
shown as zero. If
value to be
maintained in
condition record as
combination of
destination,
and mode of
TOBE BILLED, then
IIL at accruals and the
a debit note.
Header
level
Automatic/Manu
al
No
Customer
account
Handling
charges
Recovered
account
Insurance
Account
Recovered
account
freight account
Recovered
account
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
account
Item level
Automatic
yes
Customer
account in case
of prepaid
Automatic
Yes
Page 313 Of 361
19
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
ED, Freight, Sales tax,
surcharges, TOT
This is the selling
price net of all
freight. This is
compared with the
Minimum Floor Price
Net Sales
Realization Value
Item level
Automatic
Gaps/Comments
No
2. Depot Sales
a.
Order
of
Pricing
Element
CR/CG/CC Sales
Pricing Element
Basic Price
Discount/Surcharge
on Basic Price
Header
Level /
Item
Level?
Calculation Logic
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Base price to be
of product(grade+
form), size range,
edge properties (For
CR only)
Cash discount
c. Export Support
Sales
Special discount
(When customer
given, then this
discount is given.)
Width Discount: For
Non-standard width
g. Hardness Discount:
When customer asks
but the material
delivered in semi hard,
Item level
a.
Item
level
b. Header
level
c. Header
Level
d. Item
Level
e. Item
Level
f. Item
level
g. Item
Level
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Manual or
Automatic?
(M/A)
Is it
changeable
manually
during
transaction?
(Y/N)
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Manual
Manual
Manual
Manual
Manual

be posted.
Debit
Credit
Yes
Customer
account
Sales account
Yes
Sales Account
Customer
account
Page 314 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
f.
a.
b.
Excise
Basic + Excise
Additional Excise
Duty
Gaps/Comments
then this discount is

given.
Grade discount
Quantity based
Rebate
Rebates
Manual excise: This

will overwrite the
b. Automatic excise:
from j1id as a
combination of
items as per rules .
Exemption under
CT2/CT3 and goods
sent to natural
and manufacture of
defence equipments.
and excise duty
Item Level
Automatic
Yes
Rebate A/C
Customer
account
Item level
a. Manual
Automatic
b.
a. Yes
b. No
Excise duty paid
A/C
Item level
Automatic
Liability for
Rebates A/C
Excise duty
recovered from
Customer A/c
Excise duty
payable A/C
No
Nil
Page 315 Of 361
6
7
10
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Special Excise Duty
Local Sales Tax
Surcharge on LST
Turnover Tax
11
Central Sales Tax
12
Surcharge on CST
Nil
Rates to be
a particular
combination of
code for sales made
Calculated as
percentage of TOT
Rates applicable on
freight+ excise+
CST/LST) to be
a particular
combination of
code for sales.
Rates to be
a particular
combination of
code for sales made to
different state.
of the following forms:
Form BC, Form
EC,Form N-15,Form
D,Form H
Calculated as
percentage on TOT
Item level
Item level
Item level
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
No
No
No
Item level
Automatic
No
Item level
Automatic
No
Gaps/Comments
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered
from customer
A/C
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered
from customer
A/C
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered
from customer
A/C
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered
from customer
A/C
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered
Page 316 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
from customer
A/C
13
Octroi
14
Handling Charges
15
Insurance
16
Freight
Applicable on total
invoice
value( inclusive of
Basic, ED, ST,TOT,
be paid by customer
for ex factory
clearance. Octroi
exemption is effected
of Form R ( sale to
100% export oriented
unit)
Applicable on total
invoice value(inclusive
of Basic, ED, ST, TOT,
be paid by customer
for ex godown
clearance
Applicable on total
invoice
value( inclusive of
Basic, ED, ST,TOT,
be paid by customer
(Optional)for ex
Godown clearance
of the material. If
value should be shown
as zero. If terms is
be maintained in
condition record as
combination of
destination,
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
account
Octroi
recovered
account
Handling
Charges
recovered
Account
Insurance
recovered
account
Header
level
Automatic
No
Customer
account
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
account
Item level
Automatic
yes
Customer A/C
Freight
recovered on
sales account
Page 317 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
and mode of
TOBE BILLED, then
a debit note.
17
Consignment
agent/ Depot
Operator
Commission
19
Discount on Invoice
Value
20
Net Sales
Realization Value
Applicable on basic value

or net value or weight of
the material.
Any advance taken

from the customer
may be adjusted here.
Any other adjustment
Minimum Floor Price
Item
level /
Header
Level
Automatic
yes
Item level
Automatic
No
Commission A/C
Liability for
Commission
A/C
3. Exports Sales
a.
Order
of
Pricing
Element
Export Sales
Pricing Element
Calculation Logic
Header
Level /
Item
Level?
Manual or
Automatic?
(M/A)
Is it
changeable
manually
during
transaction?
(Y/N)

be posted.
Debit
Credit
Page 318 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Basic Price
In case of CR/CG/CC,
base price to be
of product, grade,
thickness range, edge
properties. In case of
HR, material is defined
for a particular grade,
particular thickness
range and particular
width range.So there
will be material price
(SAP standard table
no004) for a particular
grade, thickness range
and width range.
Other features of a
particular material will
be entered as variants
like product form(slit/
centre slit/sheet/coil).
A variant surcharge
value of this
dependent
characteristic. In case
of DRI and Pig Iron,
price (SAP standard
table no 004) for a
product. Other
features of a particular
material will be
entered as variants
like packing.
Discount/Surcharge
on Basic Price
Surcharge for
variants.
Rebates
Gaps/Comments
Item level
Automatic
Yes
Customer
account
Sales account
Item level
Automatic
Yes
Sales Account
Customer
account
Nil
Page 319 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
through payment
of Excise duty :
calculated by
chapter id and
excise indicator
through bond : No
excise duty
Item level

and excise duty
Item level
Excise
Basic + Excise
Additional Excise
Duty
Special Excise Duty
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Local Sales Tax

Surcharge on LST
Turnover Tax
Central Sales Tax
Surcharge on CST
Octroi
Handling Charges
Insurance
16
Freight
17
Total Invoice Value
18
Discount on Invoice
Value
Automatic
Gaps/Comments
Customer
account
Excise duty
recovered from
Customer A/C
Excise duty paid

A/C
Excise duty
payable A/C
Customer
account
Freight
recovered on
sale account
a. No
Automatic
No
Item level
manual
yes
Header
level
Automatic
Yes
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Arranged by customer
Depending on
incoterms. Freight will
be applicable in case
of CIF etc . This is
claimed separately by
freight invoice.
Calculated as basic
value
Nil
Page 320 Of 361
19
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Net Sales
Realization Value

Minimum Floor Price
Item level
Automatic
Gaps/Comments
No
4. Third Party Sales

a.
Order
of
Pricing
Element
1
HRC Sales (Processing through Third Party)
Pricing Element
Basic Price
Calculation Logic
Material is defined for

a particular grade,
particular thickness
range and particular
width range.So there
will be material
price(SAP standard
table no004) for a
particular grade,
thickness range and
width range. Other
features of a particular
material will be
entered as variants
like product form(slit/
centre slit/sheet/coil).
A variant surcharge
value of this
dependent
characteristic. Base
price will also include
the cost of conversion
Header
Level /
Item
Level?
Item level
Manual or
Automatic?
(M/A)
Automatic
Is it
changeable
manually
during
transaction?
(Y/N)
Yes

be posted.
Debit
Credit
Customer
account
Sales account
Page 321 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
by the third party.
a.
b.
c.
Discount/Surcharge
on Basic Price
d.
e.
f.
g.
3
Rebates
a.
b.
c.

Per P.O.: This discount
is applicable by
PO
Material/ Rate /
Location: Is applicable
for a particular
material, rate, location
Freight Subsidy
Price difference
discount (When
customer insists for a
discount over& above
the price and
discounts already
given, then this
discount is given.)
Commission Agent:
Paid manually with no
specific conditions
Quantity based Rebate
Hierarchy based
Rebates applicable
when all the group
companies buy a
certain quantity within
a specified period.
C. Commission to
agents: Calculated on
net sales value
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Item
level
Header
Level:A
pplicab
le to all
items
in the
particul
ar PO
Item
Level
Header
Level
Header
Level
f.Head
er
Level
Item Level
a. Automatic
b.Manual
c.
Automatic
d.Manual
e.Manual
f.Manual
g.manual
Yes
Sales Account
Automatic
Yes
rebate account
Customer
account
Liability for
rebates A/C
Page 322 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
the basis of region and
paid retroactively on
monthly basis
a.
b.
Excise
c.
Manual excise: This

will overwrite the
excise indicator on
Exemption under
CT2/CT3 and goods
sent to natural
and manufacture of
defence equipments.
and excise duty
Basic + Excise
Additional Excise
Duty
Nil
Special Excise Duty
Nil
Local Sales Tax
Surcharge on LST
Rates to be
a particular
combination of
code for sales made
TOT
Item level
Item level
a. Manual
b.Automatic
Automatic
Customer
account
Excise duty
recovered from
customer A/C
Excise duty paid

A/C
Excise duty
payable A/C
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered
from customer
A/C
a. Yes
b. No
No
Item level
Automatic
No
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered
from customer
Page 323 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
A/C
10
11
Turnover Tax
Central Sales Tax
12
Surcharge on CST
13
Octroi
Rates applicable on
freight+ excise+
CST/LST) to be
a particular
combination of
code for sales.
Rates to be
a particular
combination of
different state.
Form BC, Form
EC,Form N-15,Form
D,Form H
TOT
Applicable on total
invoice
value( inclusive of
Basic, ED, ST,TOT,
be paid by customer
for ex factory
clearance. Octroi
Item level
Item level
Automatic
Automatic
No
No
Item level
Automatic
No
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered
from customer
A/C
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered
from customer
A/C
Customer
account
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered
from customer
A/C
Octroi
Recovered
account
Page 324 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
of Form R ( sale to
unit)
14
Handling Charges
15
Insurance
16
Freight
17
Total Invoice Value
Applicable on total
invoice
value( inclusive of
Basic, ED, ST,TOT,
be paid by customer
for ex factory
clearance
Applicable on total
invoice
value( inclusive of
Basic, ED, ST,TOT,
be paid by customer
for ex factory
clearance
of the material . If
be maintained in
condition record as
combination of
destination,
and mode of
TOBE BILLED, then
a debit note.
ED, Sales tax,
Handling
Charges
recovered
Account
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
account
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
account
Insurance
recovered
account
Item level
Automatic
yes
Customer
account
Freight
recovered on
sale account
Header
level
Automatic
Yes
Page 325 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
surcharges, TOT
18

Minimum Floor Price
Net Sales
Realization Value
Item level
Automatic
No
5.Scrap Sales
a.
Order
of
Pricing
Element
Scrap Sales
Pricing Element
Calculation Logic
Header
Level /
Item
Level?
Basic Price
Determined Manually
Discount/Surcharge
on Basic Price
No discount
Rebates
Quantity based Rebate
Item Level
Excise
Manual excise: This

will overwrite the
excise indicator on
Exemption under
CT2/CT3 and goods
Item level
a.
b.
c.
Item level
Manual or
Automatic?
(M/A)
Is it
changeable
manually
during
transaction?
(Y/N)
Manual
Yes
Automatic
a. Manual
Automatic
b.

be posted.
Debit
Credit
Customer
account
Sales account
Sales account
Customer
account
Yes
Rebate Account
Liability For
Rebate A/C
a. Yes
b. No
Customer
Account
Excise Duty
recovered from
Customer A/C
Excise Duty Paid

A/C
Excise Duty
Payable A/C
Page 326 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
sent to natural
calamity relief fund)
and manufacture of
defence equipments.
and excise duty
Basic + Excise
Additional Excise
Duty
Nil
Special Excise Duty
Nil
Local Sales Tax
Rates to be
a particular
combination of
code for sales made
Surcharge on LST
Calculated as
percentage of TOT
10
Turnover Tax
11
Central Sales Tax
Rates applicable on
freight +excise+
CST/LST) to be
a particular
combination of
code for sales.
Rates to be
a particular
combination of
Item level
Item level
Item level
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
No
No
Customer
Account
Sales Tax
Recovered
from Customer
A/C
No
Customer
Account
Sales Tax
Recovered
from Customer
A/C
Customer
Account
Sales Tax
Recovered
from Customer
A/C
Item level
Automatic
No
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
Account
Sales Tax
Recovered
from Customer
A/C
Page 327 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments

different state.
Form BC, Form
EC,Form N-15,Form
D,Form H
12
13
Surcharge on CST
Octroi
14
Handling Charges
15
Insurance
Calculated as
percentage on TOT
Applicable on total
invoice
value( inclusive of
Basic, ED, ST,TOT,
be paid by customer
for ex factory
clearance. Octroi
of Form R ( sale to
unit)
Applicable on total
invoice
value( inclusive of
Basic, ED, ST,TOT,
be paid by customer
for ex factory
clearance
Applicable on total
invoice
value( inclusive of
Basic, ED, ST,TOT,
be paid by customer
for ex factory
clearance
Sales Tax
Recovered
from Customer
A/C
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
Account
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
Account
Octroi
Recovered
Account
Handling
Charges
Recovered
Account
Insurance
Recovered
Account
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
Account
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
Account
Page 328 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
16
Freight
17
Total Invoice Value
18
Net Sales
Realization Value
of the material. If
be maintained in
condition record as
combination of
destination,
and mode of
TOBE BILLED, then
a debit note.
ED, Sales tax,
surcharges, TOT
This is the selling
price net of all
freight. This is
compared with the
Minimum Floor Price
Item level
Automatic
yes
Header
level
Automatic
Yes
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
Account
Gaps/Comments
Freight
Recovered On
Sales Account
Page 329 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
6. Assortment Sales
a.
Order
of
Pricing
Element
Assortment Sales
Pricing Element
Calculation Logic
Basic Price
Determined Manually
Discount/Surcharge
on Basic Price
No discount
Rebates
A. Quantity based Rebate
a.
b.
Excise
c.
Basic + Excise
Additional Excise
Duty
Manual excise: This

will overwrite the
j1id as a combination
excise indicator on
Exemption under
CT2/CT3 and goods
sent to natural
and manufacture of
defence equipments.
and excise duty
Header
Level /
Item
Level?
Manual or
Automatic?
(M/A)
Is it
changeable
manually
during
transaction?
(Y/N)
Item level
Manual
Item Level
Automatic
Item level
a. Manual
b.Automatic

be posted.
Debit
Credit
Yes
Customer
Account
Sales Account
Yes
rebate account
Liability for
rebates A/c
Customer
Account
Excise Duty
recovered from
Customer A/C
a. Yes
b. No
Excise Duty Paid
A/C
Item level
Automatic
Excise Duty
Payable A/C
No
Nil
Page 330 Of 361
10
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Special Excise Duty
Local Sales Tax
Surcharge on LST
Turnover Tax
11
Central Sales Tax
12
Surcharge on CST
Gaps/Comments
Nil
Rates to be
maintained in FTXP
for a particular
combination of
code for sales made
Calculated as
percentage of TOT
Rates applicable on
freight+ excise+
CST/LST) to be
maintained in FTXP
for a particular
combination of
code for sales.
Rates to be
maintained in FTXP
for a particular
combination of
code for sales made
to different state.
of the following
EC,Form N-15,Form
D,Form H
Calculated as
percentage on TOT
Item level
Item level
Item level
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
No
No
No
Item level
Automatic
No
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered
from customer
A/C
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered
from customer
A/C
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered
from customer
A/C
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered
from customer
A/C
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Page 331 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Recovered
from customer
A/C
13
Octroi
14
Handling Charges
15
Insurance
Applicable on total
invoice
value( inclusive of
Basic, ED, ST,TOT,
to be paid by
customer for ex
factory clearance.
Octroi exemption is
effected in case of
oriented unit)
Applicable on total
invoice
value( inclusive of
Basic, ED, ST,TOT,
to be paid by
customer for ex
factory / Godown
clearance
Applicable on total
invoice
value( inclusive of
Basic, ED, ST,TOT,
to be paid by
customer (Optional)
for ex factory /
Godown clearance
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
account
Octroi
recovered
account
Handling
Charges
recovered
Account
Insurance
recovered
account
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
account
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
account
Page 332 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
16
Freight
17
Total Invoice Value
18
Net Sales
Realization Value
of the material. If
value should be
shown as zero. If
value to be
maintained in
condition record as
combination of
destination,
and mode of
TOBE BILLED, then
a debit note.
ED, Sales tax,
surcharges, TOT
This is the selling
price net of all
freight. This is
compared with the
Minimum Floor Price
Item level
Automatic
yes
Header
level
Automatic
Yes
Item level
Automatic
No
Gaps/Comments
Customer
account in case
of prepaid
Freight
Recovered
account
Page 333 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
7. Auction Sales
Page 334 Of 361
a.
Order
of
Pricing
Element
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Auction Sales
Pricing Element
Calculation Logic
Decided on the basis

of the price of the
highest bidder
Basic Price
Discount/Surcharge
on Basic Price
Nil
Rebates
Nil
a.
b.
Excise
c.
Basic + Excise
Additional Excise
Duty
Manual excise: This

will overwrite the
from j1il as a
combination of
items as per rules
c. Exemption under
CT2/CT3 and goods
sent to natural
and manufacture of
defence equipments.
and excise duty
Header
Level /
Item
Level?
Manual or
Automatic?
(M/A)
Is it
changeable
manually
during
transaction?
(Y/N)
Item level
Manual
Yes

be posted.
Debit
Credit
Customer
account
Sales account
Customer
account
Item level
a. Manual
b.Automatic
a. Yes
b. No
Excise Duty paid
A/C
Item level
Automatic
Excise duty
recovered from
customer A/C
Excise duty
payable A/C
No
Nil
Page 335 Of 361
10
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Special Excise Duty
Local Sales Tax
Surcharge on LST
Turnover Tax
11
Central Sales Tax
12
Surcharge on CST
Gaps/Comments
Nil
Rates to be
maintained in FTXP
for a particular
combination of
code for sales made
Calculated as
percentage of TOT
Rates applicable on
freight+ excise+
CST/LST) to be
maintained in FTXP
for a particular
combination of
code for sales.
Rates to be
maintained in FTXP
for a particular
combination of
code for sales made
to different state.
of the following
EC,Form N-15,Form
D,Form H
Calculated as
percentage on TOT
Item level
Item level
Item level
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
No
No
No
Item level
Automatic
No
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered
from customer
A/C
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered
from customer
A/C
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered
from customer
A/C
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered
from customer
A/C
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Page 336 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Recovered
from customer
A/C
13
Octroi
14
Handling Charges
15
Insurance
Applicable on total
invoice
value( inclusive of
Basic, ED, ST,TOT,
to be paid by
customer for ex
factory clearance.
Octroi exemption is
effected in case of
oriented unit)
Applicable on total
invoice
value( inclusive of
Basic, ED, ST,TOT,
to be paid by
customer for ex
factory clearance
Applicable on total
invoice
value( inclusive of
Basic, ED, ST,TOT,
to be paid by
customer (Optional)
for ex factory
clearance
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
account
Octroi
recovered
account
Handling
Charges
recovered
Account
Insurance
recovered
account
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
account
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
account
Page 337 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
16
Freight
17
Total Invoice Value
18
Net Sales
Realization Value
of the material . If
value should be
shown as zero. If
terms is PREPAID
then value to be
maintained in
condition record as
combination of
destination,
and mode of
TOBE BILLED, then
IIL at actuals and the
a debit note.
ED, Sales tax,
surcharges, TOT
This is the selling
price net of all
freight. This is
compared with the
Minimum Floor Price
Item level
Automatic
yes
Header
level
Automatic
Yes
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
account
Gaps/Comments
Freight
recovered on
sale account
Page 338 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
8. Sale to Railways
a.
Order
of
Pricing
Element
Sale of CR/HR Coils
Pricing Element
Manual or
Automatic?
(M/A)
Item level
Automatic
Calculation Logic
Basic Price
a.
b.
c.
d.
Header
Level /
Item
Level?
Discount/Surcharge
on Basic Price
e.
f.
Base price to be
of product, grade,
thickness range, edge
properties
Cash discount
Weight Loss discount:
Discount due to
shortage of weight
measured at the
customer's site and
paid by credit memo.
Special discount
(When customer
given, then this
discount is given.)
Width Discount: For
Non-standard width
Hardness Discount:
When customer asks
but the material
delivered in semi
hard, then this
discount is given.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Item
level
Header
Level
Header
Level
Item
Level
Item
level
Header
Level
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Automatic
Manual
Manual
Manual
manual
Is it
changeable
manually
during
transaction?
(Y/N)

be posted.
Debit
Credit
Yes
Customer
account
Sales account
Yes
Sales Account
Customer
account
Page 339 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
A. Quantity based
Rebate
Rebates
a.
b.
Excise
Manual excise: This

will overwrite the
excise indicator on
Exemption under
CT2/CT3 and goods
sent to natural
calamity relief
fund(CR Coils) and
manufacture of
defence
equipments(CR
COILS).
and excise duty
Basic + Excise
Additional Excise
Duty
Nil
Special Excise Duty
Nil
Local Sales Tax
Rates to be
maintained in FTXP
for a particular
combination of
code for sales made
Item Level
Automatic
Yes
Gaps/Comments
rebate account
Customer
account
Item level
a.
Manual
Automatic
a.Yes
b. No
Excise Duty paid
A/C
Item level
Item level
Automatic
Automatic
Liability for
rebates A/c
Excise duty
recovered from
customer A/C
Excise duty
payable A/C
No
No
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered
from customer
A/C
Page 340 Of 361
10
11
12
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Surcharge on LST
Turnover Tax
Central Sales Tax
Surcharge on CST
13
Octroi
14
Handling Charges
Calculated as
percentage of TOT
Rates applicable on
freight+ excise+
CST/LST) to be
maintained in FTXP
for a particular
combination of
code for sales.
Rates to be
maintained in FTXP
for a particular
combination of
code for sales made
to different state
Calculated as
percentage on TOT
Applicable on total
invoice
value( inclusive of
Basic, ED, ST,TOT,
to be paid by
customer for ex
factory clearance
Applicable on total
invoice
value( inclusive of
Basic, ED, ST,TOT,
Item level
Item level
Item level
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
No
No
No
Gaps/Comments
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered
from customer
A/C
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered
from customer
A/C
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered
from customer
A/C
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered
from customer
A/C
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
account
Octroi
Recovered
account
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
account
Handling
charges
Recovered
account
Page 341 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
15
Insurance
16
Freight
17
Total Invoice Value
18
19
Discount on Invoice
Value
Net Sales
Realization Value
to be paid by
customer for ex
factory clearance
Applicable on total
invoice
value( inclusive of
Basic, ED, ST,TOT,
to be paid by
customer for ex
factory clearance
of the material. If
value should be
shown as zero. If
terms is PREPAID
then value to be
maintained in
condition record as
combination of
destination,
and mode of
transporter. If terms
is TOBE BILLED, then
a debit note.
ED, Sales tax,
surcharges, TOT
Gaps/Comments
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
account
Item level
Automatic
yes
Customer
account in case
of prepaid
Header
level
Automatic
Yes
Item level
Automatic
No
Insurance
Account
Recovered
account
Freight account
Recovered
account
NIL
This is the selling
price net of all
freight. This is
compared with the
Page 342 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Minimum Floor Price
9.Free Samples
a.
Order
of
Pricing
Element
1
2
3
4
Free Samples
Pricing Element
Calculation Logic
Minimum value
decided by Excise
Basic Price
Discount/Surcharge
on Basic Price
Rebates
Excise
Header
Level /
Item
Level?
Item level
Manual or
Automatic?
(M/A)
Is it
changeable
manually
during
transaction?
(Y/N)
Manual
Yes

be posted.
Debit
Credit
Company
Expense Account
Sales account
Nil
a.
b.
c.
Nil
Manual excise: This
will overwrite the
from j1id as a
combination of
excise indicator on
Exemption under
CT2/CT3 and goods
sent to natural
and manufacture of
defence equipments.
Exemption under
Item level
a. Manual
b.Automatic
a. Yes
b. No
Excise Duty paid
A/C
Excise duty
payable A/C
Page 343 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
CT2/CT3 and goods

sent to natural
and manufacture of
defence equipments.

and excise duty
Basic + Excise
Additional Excise
Duty
Nil
Special Excise Duty
Nil
Local Sales Tax
Rates to be
maintained in FTXP
for a particular
combination of
code for sales made
Surcharge on LST
TOT
10
Turnover Tax
Rates applicable on
freight+ excise+
CST/LST) to be
maintained in FTXP
for a particular
combination of
code for sales.
Item level
Automatic
No
Item level
Automatic
No
Item level
Automatic
No
Sales tax paid
A/C
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
Account
Sales Tax A/C
Sales Tax
account
Recovered
from customer
A/C
Page 344 Of 361
11
12
13
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Central Sales Tax
Surcharge on CST
Octroi
14
Handling Charges
15
Insurance
Rates to be
maintained in FTXP
for a particular
combination of
code for sales made
to different state
TOT
Applicable on total
invoice
value( inclusive of
Basic, ED, ST,TOT,
to be paid by
customer for ex
factory clearance.
Octroi exemption is
effected in case of
oriented unit)
Applicable on total
invoice
value( inclusive of
Basic, ED, ST,TOT,
to be paid by
customer for ex
factory clearance
Applicable on total
invoice
value( inclusive of
Basic, ED, ST,TOT,
to be paid by
customer (Optional)
Item level
Automatic
No
Gaps/Comments
Customer
Account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered
from customer
A/C
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
Account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered
from customer
A/C
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
Account
Octroi
recovered
account
Customer
Account
Handling
charges
Recovered
account
Item level
Automatic
No
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
Account
Insurance
Account
Recovered
account
Page 345 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
for ex factory
clearance
16
Freight
17
Total Invoice Value
18
19
Discount on Invoice
Value
Net Sales
Realization Value
of the material. If
value should be
shown as zero. If
value to be
maintained in
condition record as
combination of
destination,
and mode of
TOBE BILLED, then
a debit note.
ED, Sales tax,
surcharges, TOT
Item level
Automatic
yes
Header
level
Automatic
Yes
Customer
Account
Freight account
Recovered
account
Nil
Nil
Page 346 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
10. Inter Company Sales

a.
Order
of
Pricing
Element
2
3
Sale from one Company Code to another Company Code
Pricing Element
Calculation Logic

price(SAP standard
table no 004) for a
product. Other
features of a
particular material will
be entered as variants
like packing.
Calculated on 115%
of production cost of
hot metal
Basic Price
Discount/Surcharge
on Basic Price
Rebates
b.
Excise
c.
5
Basic + Excise
Item level
Manual or
Automatic?
(M/A)
Automatic
Is it
changeable
manually
during
transaction?
(Y/N)
Yes

be posted.
Debit
Credit
Customer
account
Sales account
Nil
a.
Header
Level /
Item
Level?
Nil
Manual excise: This
will overwrite the
excise indicator on
Exemption under
CT2/CT3
and excise duty
Customer
account
Item level
a. Manual
b.Automatic
a. Yes
b. No
Excise Duty paid
A/C
Item level
Automatic
Excise duty
recovered from
customer A/C
Excise duty
payable A/C
No
Page 347 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Additional Excise
Duty
Nil
Special Excise Duty
Nil
10
11
Local Sales Tax
Surcharge on LST
Turnover Tax
Central Sales Tax
12
Surcharge on CST
13
Octroi
Rates to be
maintained in FTXP
for a particular
combination of
code for sales made
TOT
Rates applicable on
freight+ excise+
CST/LST) to be
maintained in FTXP
for a particular
combination of
code for sales.
Rates to be
maintained in FTXP
for a particular
combination of
code for sales made
to different state
TOT
Item level
Item level
Item level
Item level
Item level
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
No
No
No
No
No
Gaps/Comments
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered
from customer
A/C
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered
from customer
A/C
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered
from customer
A/C
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered
from customer
A/C
Customer
account
Sales Tax
account
Recovered
from customer
A/C
Nil
Page 348 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
14
15
16
Handling Charges
Insurance
Freight
17
Total Invoice Value
18
Discount on Invoice
Value
19
Net Sales
Realization Value
Nil
Nil
Nil
ED, Sales tax,
surcharges, TOT
Header
level
Automatic
Yes
Item level
Automatic
No
Gaps/Comments
Nil
This is the selling
price net of all
freight. This is
compared with the
Minimum Floor Price
11. Stock Transfer

a.
Order
of
Pricing
Element
2
3
Sale from one plant to another within same company code / to Depot.
Pricing Element
Basic Price
Discount/Surcharge
on Basic Price
Rebates
Calculation Logic

price(SAP standard
table no 004) for a
product. Price decided
on the basis of market
rate for GP Trade.
Header
Level /
Item
Level?
Item level
Manual or
Automatic?
(M/A)
Automatic
Is it
changeable
manually
during
transaction?
(Y/N)
Yes

be posted.
Debit
Credit
Company /Depot
account
Sales account
Nil
Nil
Page 349 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
a.
b.
4
Excise
Manual excise: This

will overwrite the
j1id as a combination
excise indicator on
and excise duty
Basic + Excise
Additional Excise
Duty
Nil
Special Excise Duty
Nil
Local Sales Tax
Nil
Surcharge on LST
Nil
10
Turnover Tax
Nil
11
Central Sales Tax
Nil
12
Surcharge on CST
Nil
13
Octroi
Applicable on total
invoice
value( inclusive of
Basic, ED, ST,TOT,
to be paid by
customer for ex
factory clearance.
Item level
Item level
Item level
a. Manual
b.Automatic
Gaps/Comments
Company /Depot
account
Excise duty
recovered from
customer A/C
Excise Duty paid

A/C
Excise duty
payable A/C
a. Yes
b. No
Automatic
No
Automatic
No
Page 350 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
14
15
16
Handling Charges
Insurance
Freight
17
Total Invoice Value
Octroi exemption is
effected in case of
oriented unit)
Nil
Nil
Nil
ED, Sales tax,
surcharges, TOT
Header
level
Automatic
Gaps/Comments
Yes
12. Sales Of Services
Order
of
Pricing
Element
Pricing Element
Basic Price
Calculation Logic
There will be Service

material price(SAP
standard table no
004) for a product.
Discount/Surcharge
on Basic Price
Rebates
Excise
Nil
Basic + Excise
Nil
Header
Level /
Item
Level?
Item level
Manual or
Automatic?
(M/A)
Automatic
Is it
changeable
manually
during
transaction?
(Y/N)
Yes

be posted.
Debit
Credit
Customer
account
Sales account
Nil
Nil
Page 351 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Additional Excise
Duty
Nil
Special Excise Duty
Nil
Service Tax
9
10
11
Handling Charges
Insurance
Freight
12
Total Invoice Value
Rates to be
maintained in FTXP
for a particular
combination of
code for sales made
Nil
Nil
Nil
ED, Sales tax,
surcharges, TOT
Item level
Automatic
No
Header
level
Automatic
Yes
Customer
account
Gaps/Comments
Service Tax
account
Recovered
from customer
A/C
13. Direct Sales of Lime
Order
of
Pricing
Element
Pricing Element
Calculation Logic
Is it
changeable
manually
during
transaction?
(Y/N)
Header
Level /
Item
Level?

be posted.
Debit
Credit
Customer
Account
Sales Account
Direct material price
Basic Price
Item level
Automatic
Yes
Page 352 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments

i.
j.
Per P.O.:
This discount is
applicable by
PO
Material/
Rate / Location: Is
applicable for a
rate, location
i.
j.
Discount/Surcharge
on Basic Price
Rebates
k.
Subsidy
Freight
Price
difference discount
(When customer
over& above the
price and discounts
already given, then
this discount is
given.)
m.
Commissio
n Agent: Paid
manually with no
specific conditions
n.
Others
d. Quantity based
Rebate
e. Hierarchy based
Rebates applicable
when all the group
companies buy a
certain quantity
within a specified
period.
k.
Header
Level
l.
Item
Level
Header
Level
l.
Header
Level
m. Header
n. Header
Item Level
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
Manual
Automatic
Manual
Manual
Manual
manual
Automatic
Yes
Sales Account
Yes
Rebate Account
Customer
Account
Liability for
Rebate A/C
Page 353 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Excise
Basic + Excise
6
7
Additional Excise
Duty
Special Excise Duty
Local Sales Tax
Surcharge on LST
f.
Commission to
agents: Calculated
on net sales value
the basis of region
and paid
retroactively on
monthly basis
nil
b.
Addition of basic
price and excise duty
Nil
Nil
same state. Current
rates are within
Maharastra 15.3% and
outside Maharastra 4%
nil
Item level
Item level
Automatic
Automatic
No
No
Customer
Account
Sales Tax
Recovered
from Customer
Account
Page 354 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments

nil
10
Turnover Tax
11
Central Sales Tax
12
Surcharge on CST
state. Exemption is
effected in case of
possession of the
nil
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
Account
Sales Tax
Recovered
from Customer
Account
Handling
charges
Recovered
Account
Insurance
Recovered
Account
nil
13
Octroi
14
Handling Charges
15
Insurance
Applicable on total
be paid by customer
for ex factory clearance
Applicable on total
be paid by customer
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
Account
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
Account
Page 355 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
16
Freight
17
Total Invoice Value
18
Net Sales
Realization Value
the material. If terms
is TO PAY then value
should be shown as
zero. If terms is
be maintained in
condition record as
combination of
destination,
and mode of
TO BE BILLED, then
debit note.
ED, Sales tax,
surcharges, TOT
Item level
Automatic
yes
Header
level
Automatic
Yes
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
Account
Freight
Recovered On
sale Account
Page 356 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
13. Direct Sales of Coke
Order
of
Pricing
Element
Pricing Element
Calculation Logic
Is it
changeable
manually
during
transaction?
(Y/N)
Header
Level /
Item
Level?

be posted.
Debit
Credit
Yes
Customer
Account
Sales Account
Yes
Sales Account
Direct material price
Basic Price
Discount/Surcharge
on Basic Price
Item level
o.
p.
Per P.O.:
This discount is
applicable by
PO
Material/
Rate / Location: Is
applicable for a
rate, location
q.
r.
Freight
o. Item
Level
p. Header
Level
q.
Header
Level
r.
Header
Level
s. Header
t. Header
Automatic
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
Manual
Automatic
Manual
Manual
Manual
manual
Customer
Account
Subsidy
Price
difference discount
(When customer
over& above the
price and discounts
already given, then
this discount is
given.)
Page 357 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments

s.
t.
g.
h.
Rebates
Excise
Basic + Excise
6
7
Additional Excise
Duty
Special Excise Duty
i.
c.
Commissio
n Agent: Paid
manually with no
specific conditions
Others
Quantity based
Rebate
Hierarchy based
Rebates applicable
when all the group
companies buy a
certain quantity
within a specified
period.
Commission to
agents: Calculated
on net sales value
the basis of region
and paid
retroactively on
monthly basis
nil
Addition of basic
price and excise duty
Nil
Item Level
Automatic
Yes
Item level
Automatic
No
Rebate Account
Liability for
Rebate A/C
Nil
Page 358 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
Local Sales Tax
Surcharge on LST
same state. Current
rates are within
Maharastra 4% and
outside Maharastra 4%
nil
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
Account
Sales Tax
Recovered
from Customer
Account
No
Customer
Account
Sales Tax
Recovered
from Customer
Account
nil
10
Turnover Tax
11
Central Sales Tax
12
Surcharge on CST
state. Exemption is
effected in case of
possession of the
nil
Item level
Automatic
nil
13
Octroi
Page 359 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
14
Handling Charges
15
Insurance
16
Freight
17
Total Invoice Value
Applicable on total
be paid by customer
Applicable on total
be paid by customer
the material. If terms
is TO PAY then value
should be shown as
zero. If terms is
be maintained in
condition record as
combination of
destination,
and mode of
TO BE BILLED, then
debit note.
ED, Sales tax,
surcharges, TOT
Handling
charges
Recovered
Account
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
Account
Item level
Automatic
No
Customer
Account
Insurance
Recovered
Account
Item level
Automatic
yes
Customer
Account
Freight
Recovered On
sale Account
Header
level
Automatic
Yes
Page 360 Of 361
Processes
in Sales

suggested by CVS IT
Gaps/Comments
18
Net Sales
Realization Value

Item level
Automatic
No
Page 361 Of 361

SAP SD Blue Print

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

SAP SD Blue Print

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

To-Be Business Processes of Sales & Distribution for ISPAT Industries

Business Requirement from ISPAT / Usage

To Be Process suggested by CVS IT

Enterprise Structure of ISPAT group of companies.

Business requirements as given by the ISPAT Key Users.

To-Be Process on SAP R/3 system suggested by CVS IT Consultants

Gaps which are at different stages of exploration

Status of To-Be Business

Can be implemented on 4.6C

B-Possible with workaround

Can be implemented on 4.6C through indirect means

C-Possible with ABAP

Can be implemented on 4.6C through ABAP/4 development

D-Possible with ABAP (But

Can be implemented on 4.6C through ABAP/4 development

Possibility of implementation will be explored in the

Cannot be implemented on 4.6C

To-Be Business Processes of Sales &

Cannot be implemented because it is not part of the scope

The To-Be business process realization is dependent on the following aspects:

Scope of functionality described in the Software Services Agreement mentioned above.

Business Requirement from ISPAT / Usage

To Be Process suggested by CVS IT

Business Blue Print Sales & Distribution Prepared By: CVSIT

Business Requirement from ISPAT / Usage

To Be Process suggested by CVS IT

Current Enterprise Structure

Enterprise Structure on SAP R/3 system

Different Types of Sales

To-Be Business Processes

Summary Of Integration Points

Master Data Coding Logic

Business Blue Print Sales & Distribution Prepared By: CVSIT

To-Be Business Processes of Sales & Distribution for ISPAT Industries

Business Requirement from ISPAT / Usage

To Be Process suggested by CVS IT

1. Current Enterprise Structure

Ispat Industries Limited

Hot Roll Mill

Business Blue Print Sales & Distribution Prepared By: CVSIT

Business Requirement from ISPAT / Usage

Business Blue Print Sales & Distribution Prepared By: CVSIT

To Be Process suggested by CVS IT

Business Requirement from ISPAT / Usage

To Be Process suggested by CVS IT

Business Blue Print Sales & Distribution Prepared By: CVSIT

Business Requirement from ISPAT / Usage

Angle & shapes

To Be Process suggested by CVS IT

Ridge, Barge Board, North Light Curve, Gutter,

Business Blue Print Sales & Distribution Prepared By: CVSIT

Business Requirement from ISPAT / Usage

To Be Process suggested by CVS IT

3. SD Enterprise Structure on SAP R/3 4.6C

Sales Organisation East, IIL

This Sales Organisation will be responsible for all business transactions

Sales Organisation North, IIL

This Sales Organisation will be responsible for all business transactions

Sales Organisation South, IIL

This Sales Organisation will be responsible for all business transactions

Sales Organisation West, IIL

This Sales Organisation will be responsible for all business transactions

Sales Organisation East, IMIL

This Sales Organisation will be responsible for all business transactions